Full text of "Training manual."

See other formats

NINTK CENSUS OF CANADA, 1951

TRAINING MANUAL

,„v%"--°"^

98-19511-5
c. 3

DOMINION BUREAU OF STATISTICS - DEPARTMENT OF TRADE AND COMMERCE

FOREWORD

It is impossible to lay too great stress upon the necessity for
adequate training for the job of census-taking. If Commissioners, field
supervisors and enumerators do not master the instructions they cannot
do accurate work. A vast amount of thought has gone into the preparation
of the Training Manual and the Enumeration Manual and they have been made
as concise and simple as is possible in an undertaking having the scope
of a National Census.

It is the duty of Commissioners and field. supervisors to ensure
that every enumerator knows his job and teaching them will be made easier
if enumerators of good intelligence can be secured,

,To ensure uniform enumeration there must be uniform instruction.
This Training Manual lays down the procedures by which uniform instruction
can be attained and you must follow them strictly. Should you or any
other officer deviate from the instructions it contains, the result would
be differences of interpretation.

As Census officers you play a key role in this Ninth Census
of Canada, In accepting the responsibility of your position and in dis-
charging your duties effectually, you are performing a real service for
your community and, indeed, for Canada as a whole.

/u^^^u^^

Dominion Statistician,

,.?..-,,.,.■.. .:v

TABLE OF CONTENTS
Population, Housing, Etc.

Section Page

Training Time-Table iv

Greneral Procedure for Training Sessions ., vii

I, Introduction 1

II, Maps and Coverage i 6

III, Basic Definitions and Whom to Enumerate 13

IV, Visitation Record (Form 1) ...; 20

V, Population Documents (Que s, 1 - 19) (Forms 2 & 2A) 30

VI, Review and Question Period 52

VII, 1st Practice Narrative ; 63

VIII, Population Documents (Q.ues. 20 - 29) (Forms 2 & 2A) 71

IX, Review and Question Period 101

X, 2nd Practice Narrative 108

XI, The Individual Population Form (Form 5) 112

XII, Blind and Deaf Schedule (Form 3) 115

XIII. Live Stock and Greenhouses Elsewhere than on Farms (Form 7) 118

Xrv, Census of Distribution (Form 10) , 120

XV, Housing Document ( Form 4, ) . , . ; 129

XVI, Review and Question Period I5I

XVII, 3rd Practice Narrative I56

XVIII, Enumeration Technique and Field Procedure , ,. 161

XIX, Administrative Forms ,, , 15q

XX# List of Commercial Fishermen (Form 9) ,, I76

XXI, Final Review and Question Period I79

XXII, Distribution of Supplies I83

Table of Contents for Agriculture ..,, 185

- iii -

- iv -

1st Day

8.30 -

9.00

1.30

- 2.00

9.00 -

9.30

2.00

-2,30

9.30 -

10.30

2.30

- 3,30.

10.30 -

10.45

3.30

- 3.45

10.45 -

11.30

3.45

- 4.30

11.30 -

12,30

4.30

- 5.30

2nd Day

8.30 -

9.45

1.30

^ 2.45

9.45 -

10.15

2,45

- 3.15

10.15 -■

10.45

3.15

- 3.45

10.45 T

11.00

3.45

- 4.00

11.00 ■-

12,30

■4.00

- 5.30

3rd Day

8.30 -

•9.00

1,30

_ 2.00

9.00 -

9.30

2.00

- 2.30

9.30 :-

10.00

.2,30

- 3.00

10.00 -

10.10

3.00

- 3.10

10.10 -

10.20

3. 10

- 3.20

10.20 -

10.30

3.20

- 3.30

10.30 -

10.45

3.30

- 3.45

10.45 -

11.30

3.45

- 4.30

11.30 -

12.30

4.30

- 5,30

'Training Time-Table
(for classes not requiring Agriculture instructions)

Introduction • .

Maps and Coverage .■

Basic Definitions and Vfliom to Envmerate

Rest Period

Visitation Record

Population, Questions 1 - 19

Population, Questions 1 - l9 (Con.) ...

Review and Question Period

1st Practice Narrative

Rest Period

Population, Questions 20 - 29

Population, Questions 20 - 29 (Con.) .,

Review and Question Period

2nd Practice Narrative

Individual Population Form

Blind and Deaf Sched.ule ■. ... .

Livestock and Greenhouses Elsevfhere

than on Farms . . . . ^ '..'..

Rest Period

Census of Distribution ................

Housing , . ,

Hours &
Minutes

130

:30

:00

:15

:45

:00

:15
;30
:30
:15
:30

:30
:30
:30
:10
:10

■•.10
:15
:45

1:00

4th Day ■

8.30 - 9.15 or 1.30 - 2.15 -

9.15 - 9.45 or 2.15 - 2.45 ■ -

9.45 - 10.15 or 2.45 - 3.15 -

10.15 - 10.30 or 3.15 - 3.30 -

10.30 - 11.00 or 3.30 - 4.00 -

11.00-11.30 or 4,00-4.30 -

11.30 - 12.15 or 4.3Q T 5.15 -

12.15 - 12.30 or 5.15 - 5,30 -.

Housing (Con.) :45

Review and Question Period .............. :30

3rd Practice Narrative ..,....■ '30

Rest Period ....,..'.... : 15

Envuuerati on Technique ,- :-30

Administrative Forms : 30

Final Review and Questions (including . ' ,,

Fisheries where applicable) :45

Distribution of, supplies :15

- V -

1st Day

A.M.

P.Mc

TraininK Time-Table
(for classes requiring Agriculture instructions)

9.00 - 9.30

9.30 - 10,00

10.00 - ,10.15

10.15 - 11.15

11.15 - 12.00

2.00 - 3.15

3.15 r .3.30

3.30 - 4.30

4.30 - -5.00.

Introduction i ..... , ^

Maps and Coverage

Re st Peri od .................................

Basic Definitions and Whom to Enxunerate ....,

Visitation Record

Population, Questions 1 - 19 •

.Rest Period

Population, Questions 1-19 (Con.)

Review and Question Period

Hours &
Minutes

:30
:30

:15
1:00

:45

:15
:15
:00
:30

2nd Day

A.M.

9.00 - 9.30

9.30 - 10,30

10,30 - 10.45

10,45 - 11.45

11,45 - 12.00

P.M.

2.00 - 2.15

2.15 - 2,45

2.45 - 2,55

2,55 - 3.05

3.05 - 3.15

3.15 - 3.30

3.30.-. 4.15

4.15 - . 5.00

1st Practice Narrative , . « . , «

Population, Questions 20 - 29

Re st Period .s...,,,..,,,...,......... .......

Population, Questions 20 - 29 (Con.) ,

Review and Question Period

2hd Practice Narrative

Individual Population Form

Blind and Deaf Schedule . .'

Livestock and Greenhouses Elsewhere than on

- Farms ...,;.......

Rest Period

.Census of Distribution

Housing ,.

:30
1:00

:15
1:00

:15

:15
:30
:10
:10

:10

1 15
:45
:45

-vi -

Training Time-Table
(for classes requiring Agriculture instructions)

o , r. Hours &

2l±^31 Minutes

A.M. . . 9.00-10.00 - Housing 1:00

10.00 - 10,30 - Revievf and Question Period -30

10.30 - 10.45 - Rest Period :15

10.45-11.15 - 3rd Practice Narrative .'3O

11.15-11.45 ■ - Enumeration Technique ,...,■ :30

11.45 - 12.00 - Administrative Forms :15

P.M.' 2.00 — • 2.15 • - Administrative Forms :15

2.15 - 3.15 ■ - Final Review and Question Period 1:00

3.15- 3.30 - Rest Period :15

3.30 - 5.00 - Agriculture (Sections I, II and Practice

Exercise a) ,. 1:30

4th Day

A.M.., 9. CO' - 10.30 _ Sections, III, V, VI and Practice Exercises

B, C and D 1:30

10.30 - 10.45 - Rest Period

10,45 - 12,00 - Sections above continued ...,;.' 1:15

P.M,, 2,00 - 3,15 _ Sections VII to XV and Practice Exercises E. & F, 1:15

3.15 -"3.30 - Rest Period ., , :15

3.30 - 4.45 - Sections above continued 1:15

4.45- 5.00 - Distribution of supplies :15

■Notes: (a) Instructions on Commercial Fishermen Schedule to be given
■during the 4th afternoon in areas where it is required.
(2) It is possible that there may be enumerators not requiring
Agriculture instructions in this class ^ If so-, supplies
are to be distributed to them either at noon or during the
afternoon rest period of the 3rd day.

- vii -

GENERAL PROCEDURE FOR TRAINING SESSIONS

Following are a few suggestions of a general nature which may aid you in
preparing for and in the actual conduct of the training sessions,

1, Training room and equipment

The training room should be of adequate size, well-lighted and properly
ventilated, >

Before the training sessions begin, you should -

(i) check the seating arrangements to make sure you have sufficient
chairs and enough table space for each trainee to' place his
forms before him and be able to write on them comfortably,

(ii) have on hand a blackboard, chalk and eraser. You will be pro-
vided with enlarged samples of the enumeration documents. Be
• sure to use these and the blackboard freely, since many people'
remember things which they see more easily than those which ■
they hear,

(iii) avoid confusion by having all materials which you expect to
use at hand and in order, ready to begin the session,,

2, Your responsibility to the group

At the first session do what you can to create a friendly atmosphere,
putting the group at ease. Be friendly and informal. If some members
appear to be strangers to each other, see to it that they become
acquainted.

Make an effort to see that the group is as comfortable as possible.
Inform the group as to the location of the washrooms and of the restaurants
in the neighbourhood.

Your aim should be to create a friendly co-operative group, working
together as a unit, with a due sense of the importance of their task and
a feeling of responsibility for its successful completion,

3, The time-table

Make a point of starting each session on time. There is a great deal of
information to cover and you will need every minute. Set the example your-
self by arriving well in advance of the starting time. In so doing you will
be able to have everything in readiness to begin promptly, thus avoiding the
confusion of a last minute rush. On the first morning you must be present
at least 20 minutes ahead of time, in order to register the trainees as they
arrive.

- viii -

This time-table is meant to be a guide for you. You should endeavour to
adhere to it as closely as. possible in order to cover all the important points
which need to be discussed. However, it may be that in some areas certain
adjustments will need to be made to fit in with local circumstances. If
such is the case, it will be your duty to ensure that all topics are covered
in the time at your disposal, and that no essential detail is overlooked.

Be sure to observe the brief rest periods provided. Both you and the
trainee will benefit from a break in the midst. of the sessions. Should the
group become overtired and restless, valuable time will be wasted.

4. Attendance record

It will be necessary for you to keep a strict record of attendance
during the training sessions in order that you may check the training
account forms at the end of the sessions. You will be provided with an
Attendance Record (Form 37) upon which you should enter the names and
addresses of all trainees in advance. These are the persons (whose nanies
you already have on Form 31) who have been certified as to personality
qualifications by the Commissioner and have passed the written test. One
of your first duties will be to make certain that the list is correct in
detail as the trainees register and. to procure from each his telephone
number, or one at which he may be reached.

You will find this list a useful directory for locating enumerators.
Furthermore, you should also keep a list containing the names, addresses,
and phone numbers of your enumerators in your notebook, so that at all
times, whether during the training period or on the field, you will be
able quickly to locate any enumerator.

5. Seating plan

Your task of instructing will be made easier if, on the first day,
you make a plan of the seating arrangements and request each trainee to
take the same place each day. In this way you will more easily become
familiar with the members of the' group and be able to call upon them by
name during the discussion periods.

6. The Enumeration Portfolio

A portfolio of supplies has been provided for every enumerator. As
each trainee registers give him a portfolio. Make sure that it is in the,
language suitable for use in his sub-district and instruct him to enter
the correct District and Sub-district numbers in the space provided on
the cover.

- ix -

Each portfolio contains the following:-
1, Enumeration Manual

2. Specimen Booklet (Form 12)

3. Specimen Agriculture Schedule (Form 6)
U, Enumeration forms:

(a
(b

(c
(d

(e
(f
(S
(h

Visitation Record (Form 1)
Blind and Deaf Form (Form 3)
Individual Population Form (Form 5)
Livestock and Crreexihauses elsewhere than

on Farm Schedule (Form 7)
Census of Distribution Folio (Form lOA)
Account Form (Enumeration) (Form 16)
Progress Report Card (Foriri 25)
In certain sub-districts as required:
(i) Irrigation Schedule (Form 8)
(ii) Fisheries Folio (Form 9)

5, Container for Form 2A (Form 11)

■ -' 6« Notebook . , ( = > .. .^

7. Blotter

Use will be made of these materials as the sessions proceed. Trainees
should be encouraged to study them at home in order that they may be able to
participate more intelligently in the training group discussions. It must
be explained, however, that the separate blank forms are to be used later
for enumeration purposes. Care should therefore be taken that they are
not marked in any way, or destroyed.

Planning the discussion

Thorough preparation on your part before each session' is absolutely
essential. It will be embarrassing to you and a waste of time to the
ti^ainees if you enter upon a session without careful preparation. Read -
over the material in the Training Manual carefully in advance and make sure
you understand all the points covered. Be very certain that you understand
the answers to all the problems presented in the various exercises. To do
this you must master completely the Enumeration Manual. When in doubt,
consult it.

The Training Manual outlines each topic to be covered during the train-
ing sessions, gives detailed suggestions for presentation and includes
discussion questions and problem exercises with which to test and give
practice to .the training group. At each session be sure to go over the
"Points to cover". You should plan to follow closely the suggested
"Procedure", However, if you cannot avoid departing from the outline
suggested, make sure to give your group all the information outlined for
that session. Where possible make instructions appropriate to local

- X -

conditions. For example, when describing a particular type of structure,
mention a specific one which may be known to the group, >

You may wish to note additional points which you feel need special
attentigin in your area. Do not, include, however, situations which the
enumerators will seldom meet. If, during the training period, trainees '
wish to discuss such situations, suggest that they talk them over with you
later. It would be wasted time to discuss with the whole group a problem
which concerns only one enumerator and which possibly might not come up
at all. Refer them also to the appropriate section of the Enumeration ■'■
Manual, showing them how to use the Index- as a guide to finding a solution
for unusual problems^ Indeed, particular stress should be laid on the
proper use of the Enumeration Manual, with emphasis on the use of the
Index.

You will note that certain items in the suggested "Procedure" are
marked with an asterisk (A). The asterisk signals things you are to do -
i.e., display materials, write on the blackboard (BB stands for blackboard),
etc.

Certain sections, also, are taken directly from the Enumeration Manual
or specific Census forms. They are enclosed in square brackets and are
included in this Manual for your convenience. When reading them, be sure
to give the trainees the correct reference so that each may follow his
copy of the Enumeration Manual or form.

8, Participation of trainees

The greater the trainee participation, the more successful will be your
training sessions. Methods for accomplishing this are outlined in this
Training Manual. .Trainees will have an opportunity to answer questions, :
fill in practice forms, act as enumerator, etc.

The suggested discussion questions may be supplemented with other
appropriate ones. Care must be taken, however, to make the meaning clear
in the wording of all questions. Avoid ambiguous or leading questions, as
well ais those requiring simply "yes" or "no" as an answer. If the latter
type seems necessary, encourage further discussion by following immediately
with such questionis as "Why?" or "How?"

'■ Make certain that all members of your group have an equal opportunity
to participate. You will find that some are more eager than others to take
part. Do not let one or two persons dominate the discussion. You will
soon develop a technique for handling your group and learn which ones need ■'
to be encouraged to keep quiet and which to talk more,

t
Pause frequently to allow trainees to ask questions, but do not allow
the discussion to become so prolonged that other topics will be neglected.
If one person is slow to grasp a point which the others in the group have
easily understood, suggest he discuss that particular point with you later.
If a point is raised wiiich will be covered in a later session, suggest the
question be held until the time of that fliscussion.

- 1 =

I. INTRODUCTION

Points to cover

Procedure

1, Registration

2, Administration of Oath

3o Distribution of
Enumeration Port-
folios

4. Attendance record
and seating plan

5. Introductory
remarks

A As each trainee arrives, check your
record to make sure you have the correct
name, address, phone number, etc,

it Where possible, administer the Oath as
each trainee registers, impressing upon
each the importance of the task he is
about to undertake and the need for
absolute secrecy. The administration of
the Oath should be performed by having
each trainee read the Form of Oath aloud,
after vnhich he will sign the Form in the
conventional fashion,

A Should it prove impractical to administer
the Oath individually, have the group
stand, when all are assembled, and repeat
the Oath together, after which each must
sign the Form in the conventional fashion,

k Collect the completed Forms and forward
them, as soon as possible, to your
Commissioner who will retain them until
the completion of the enumeration and
then forward them to the Regional Office,

A Give each trainee an Enumeration Port-
folio, instructing him to enter the
District and Sub-district numbers on the
cover,

& Assign each to a seat, introduce him if
need be to his neighbour and mark his
name on your seating plan. Ask him to
occupy the same seat throughout the
training sessions, A record of attend-
ance (Form 37) must be kept for each
session.

To open the session, your remarks should include:

(a) A few casual remarks to put the group at ease,

(b) Your name and the phone number at which you
may be reached,

(c) Your responsibilities as Field Supervisor,
viz.,- the training of the group as Census
enumerators, the checking of their work in'
the field, the final checking of completed
work, and assistance with problems arising
during enumeration.

- 2 ^

Points, to cover

Procedure

6 , The importance
of the Census

(d) The period of time v;hich the training sessions
will cover - (Z^ half days of 4 hours each,

in areas in v:hich there is to be no Agriculture
instruction - 4 full days of 6 hours each,
in areas in vrhich there is to be Agriculture
instruction.) Do not outline the sessions
fully at this point. However, there is no
objection to your making a copy of this time-
table and posting it where the trainees may
study it at their leisure.

(e) The hour at vjhich each session begins,
stressing the necessity for starting on time.

(f) Give information regarding washrooms, and
near-by restaurants.

(g) Remind trainees to keep receipts for hotel or
room accommodation and a record of their
allowable expenses for their accounts.
Explain that detailed information concerning
expenses will bo given later.

Enumerators v;ill often be asked, ^'Wny is it necessary
to go to the expense of a Census every ten years?"
The answer to this question is clearly outlined in the
Introduction to the Enumeration Manual and may be
swnmed up, as follows:-

(a) Representation in the House of Commons is based
on population. The legal reason for taking
the Census is to determine that representation.

(b) The government must know age trends to estimate
future demands on family allo^^rance and old age
pensions,

(c) Census information on wages and salaries when
analyzed serves as a means of improving distribu-
tion and lowering costs to the consumer.

(d) Housing information aids in the making of hous-
ing plans and policy.

(e) Information on household equipment and appliances
aid manufacturers, wholesalers and , retailers in
estimating demand, future production and sales.

(f) As in every efficient business, it is necessary
to make a periodic inventory, so in this Ninth
Census, the enumerator is making an inventory of

' the Canadian people in order that the government
and business of the country may be operated
efficiently.

- 3 -

Points to oover

7. Responsibilities
of enumerators

8. The Enumeration
Portfolio

Procedure

Explain that trainees will have an opportunity to

study the answer to this question more
thoroughly when they see the Enumeration
Manual .

Outline the responsibilities of each enumerator as
follows : -

(a) To follow the training closely, m.aking certain
that all points of instruction are thoroughly
understood, \ihen in doubt, to question.

(b) To carry out these instructions fully during
enumeration. Again, when problems arise, to
question. - obtaining a decision from the Field
Supervisor, rather than jimiping at conclusions,
or turning to a fellov/ enumerator for advice.

(c) To obtain com.plete and correct information for
all questions ,asked and to make certain that
every necessary question is asked,

(d) To keep all information confidential. At no
time, either during the period of enuirieration

or later, may an enumerator divulge any informa-
tion gained through the performance of his
duties as enuirierator. Anyone found guilt j^ of
so d®ing is liable to a heavy fine or imprison-
ment, or both.

(e) To devote full time to the work of enumeration.
No enumerator is to combine any other occupation
with that of census duties. He must not collect,
obtain, or seek to obtain, any information except
that which is required to ansv;er the questions

on the Census forms.

You have already provided each trainee with an Enumeration
Portfolio.

Explain briefly that -

(i) these portfolios contain supplies which will be
used for study during the training sessions and
later in actual enumeration,
(ii) care must, therefore, be taken not to mark or
destroy any of these forms,
(iii) trainees will have an opportunity to examine
each form individually during the training
sessions and to study them at home.

* Remind trainees to bring their Portfolios
to each session, but do not spend tim.e
looking into themt at this point.

_ 4 -

Points to cover

9. The Enumeration
Manual

Procedure

* Take time only to instruct in the ,.
use of the Enumeration Manual, Show
trainees your copy and have them
find theirs in the Portfolio.

Explain that this Manual is the most important .source
of . information regarding the Census,

Have trainees note that it is divided into the follovf-
ing sections :-

Introduction - v/hich, as you have mentioned, gives
important and interesting data about the Census
generally. Enumerators should study this care-
fully as they v/ill find here much that will help
them to answer questions concerning the Census,

Population and Housing - which in turn is divided
into two sections,

(a) basic instructions (Sections 1-11 on coloured
Pages 12-18) vfhich must be committed to
memory,

(b) detailed instructions which must be studied
and used as a reference guide.

Agriculture - divided in the same manner as the
Population and Housing Section (Sections 76-86,
Pages 77-80 and Sections 87-189, Pages 81-101.;

Appendices - divided in three sections -

(i) Appendix A - contents of the Statistics Act

which apply to enumeration.

(ii) Appendix B - tables for use in checking

Population and Housing docu-
ments. These tables are an
excellent basis for review
' and trainees should be
impressed with their usefulness.

(iii) Appendix' C - conversion tables for Agricultural

calculations. Enumierators in areas
where there are farms will need
these for ready reference.

Index - alphabetically arranged and covering all
topics in the Manual.

- 5 -

Points to cover

Procedure

Explain briefly how to use the Index,

* Using "secrecy"' as your guide word,
have trainees hunt up references.

Indicate the reason' for the use of dashes

* Have trainees hunt up the more
difficult reference for "Procedure
on return of enumerator's supplies,"
It v/ill not be necessary to read
these references. The intention is
to make certain trainees know how. to
use this Index.

Stress the importance of .usin.^^ the Index constantly.
It will point the way to a quick solution to many
problems .

Impress trainees with the necessity of carrying the
Manual at all times, so that it may
be available for easy reference.

- 6 -

II. MAPS AND COVERAGE

Points to cover

Procedure

1, Introduction

2« Use, of maps

(a) Method of coverage
(i) Must be complete
{ ii ) Must be orderly

Hi The Master Map of your area should be hung
where it may be seen by the whole group be"
fore the session beginSo

A Have the individual Sub-district maps ready
for distribution at the stated time in the
discussion^

A Field Supervisors in wholly urban areas will
ignore instructions for rural areas o

Introduce your subject by emphasizing again that the
Census will be a success only to the degree that each
enumerator covers his whole area and enumerates every
person and dwelling as required.,

Explain (a) that the whole of Canada is divided into
large areas called Electoral Districts «
A Commissioner has been appointed to look:
after the Census in each of these districts.
(Name your local Commissioner) o ,

(b) that these large areas have been sub-divided
into smaller areas called Envuaeration Areas
or Sub-districts o Each enumerator is re-
sponsible for the taking of the Census in
one Sub'-districto

A Point out the Enumeration Areas bounded in
colour on your Master Map«

State that most enumerators will be supplied with a map
covering their own particular areas. They
must carry this map with them always. It
is their guide «

k Display a typical Sub-district map.

Emphasize (i) that for complete coverage, - every street,
lane or alley in urban areas and every road
and lane in rural areas must be gone over,

(ii) that each enumerator must plan a systematic
course, so that his area may be covered in
orderly fashion,, He must not jump here and
there within his Sub-district. If he does
he is bound to miss someone and the count
for his area will be short,,

- 7

Points to cover

(b) Plan of visitation

In urban areas

Procedure

In rural areas

k Advise trainees that sometime before the start
of enumeration you will meet with each enumer-
ator individually to go over the map of his area
and plan the route which he should follow - also
to assist him with any individual problems he
may have, relating to his duties as an enumerator,
In wholly urban areas you will arrange this by
meeting each enumerator sometime between May 26th
and May 31st at a place convenient 'to you both.
In areas where the six-hour instruction period
prevails, you should arrange an individual
appointment with each enumerator at some conven-
ient time during the four day training period -
either during the noon hour or in the evening.
Classroom training time must not be used for
this purpose.

In arranging the route, the following rules should be
observed, -

In urban areas -

(1) Start at one corner of a block and proceed
around and through it in a clockwise direc-
• tion until the starting point is reached,

A Have trainees examine the diagram on Page 19
of the Enumeration Manual,

(ii) Number the blocks on the map in regular order
and enumerate, them in that way,

k Refer to the map on Page 20 of the Enumeration
Manual,

(iii) If dwellings are strung out along streets or
roads rather than in blocks, enumerate street
by street and road by road until all have been
covered.

In rural areas -

(iv) Start at one corner of the Sub-district and go
back and f<t>rth along the roads in such a way
that the area is covered with the minimum of
travel .

(v) The order along the route of enumeration deter-
mines the Greneral Farm Schedule Number for each
farm. This order is of utmost importance,
since there is to be sample enumeration of cer-
tain farms, and the farms which fall into the
sample will depend upon the numbering.

- 8

Points to cover

Procedure

The plan of visitation in rural areas is outlined very
clearly in the Enumeration Manual,

4 Have trainees turn to Page 20 in the
Enumeration Manual, Read carefully
the following, taking time to study
the chart and making certain that
the general plan is understood.

_ jj. yQ^j come to a farm on the

route and for some reason cannot enumerate it
immediately, give it the next number in order,
and obtain the agricultural information at
some later. time.

You must not number farms otherwise than in the
order in which they lie on your pre-arranged
route, except as provided for in the following
paragraph. Only if Enumerators throughout the
country adhere to this consecutive numbering
system will a representative sample - one inr
eluding farms of all types and sizes - be
assured.

If after your plan is made out your enumeration
will be speeded by covering a part of the route
(say that near your home) earlier than it would
be reached by following the plan, you may num-
ber this part before it is reached on the plan,
provided that when you break the order of num-
bering, you assign the numbers in groups of
five to the farms that lie consecutively on your
route, (See chart below which illustrates how
this would bte done. It represents a farming
area of 4.4 farms with the sample farms circled.
The black squares represent farm dwellings.)

(See map on Page 21 of the Enumeration'
Manual )

Note that the Enumerator , after visiting- seven
farms along his route, breaks the order of num-
bering in order to visit a few farms convenient-
ly located near his home, that is, those shaded
on the diagram. He is careful to number five
adjacent farms (Nos, 8-12) before resuming his
regular route. By so doing, he does not upset
the -design of the sample. That is, the same
farms remain in the sample.

- 9 -

Points to cover

Procedure

(i) Keep within
boundary lines

(ii) Cover all the area
within boundaries

(iii) Boundary line falls
on centre of river,
road or street

(iv) Check, boundaries
carefully

(d) Correction of maps

State that the boundaries of each Enumeration Area are
established so that they will fit exactly
together with no overlapping,

A. Point this out on your Master Map,

Explain that (i) since the totals of each area, when
added together, will give the total
population of the country, it is
important not to go beyond the
boundary lines outlined » Otherwise
there will be duplication,

(ii) it is just as important to cover all
the territory within those boundary
lines, or the totals will be short,

(iii) boundary, lines usually follow natural
lines, such as rivers, creeks, roads,
etc., in rural areas, or streets in
urban areas. Vftien this is the case
the centre of the river, road or street
will be the boundary,

(iv) each map carries a description of the
boundaries for that particular enumera-
tion area,

A Point out description on a Sub-district
map.

This description must be checked carefully
with the map and both must be checked with
the actual area 9

Emphasize that enumerators must notify you immediately
if they discover any major discrepeuacy
in their maps. All maps should be^
correct in every detail before enum-
- eration begins.

(1) Enumerators must
not change bound*
aries

Make it clear that (i)

no enumerator must change a bound-
ary on his map. If his map does
not follow the description given,
or if he has reason to believe
that the boundaries as stated are
incorrect, he must report the
matter to the Field Supervisor
immediately.

- 10 -

Points to cover

(ii) t'lark new streets
or roads

(iii) Delete road or
street not now
in existence

(iv) Correct road or
street names

(e) No map available

Procedure

(ii) if a new street or road has been
opened up since the map was drawn,
the enumerator should mark it in,
when he is certain that he has the
correct details, thus,-

A BB

"/jjuur J^ASUi:i:

(iii) if a road or street is indicated on
the map vAiich is not now in exist-
ence, it should be crossed off the
map, thus,-

± BB

(iv) if a road or street, etc, has been
renamed, the incorrect or old name
should be deleted and the new one
written in, thus,-

k. BB

J^^y'oe^ /CU\JU^

7/fjcUMjUiU -7^

Enumerators may find, in a few cases, that it has been
impossible to procure a map for an area. In such cases,
the enumerators affected will have to be doubly care-
ful to cover the proper area as outlined by their des-
criptions.

- 11 -

Points to cover

(f ) Distribution of maps

Where to look for
dwellings

(a) in urban areas, -
i.e., cities,
towns, villages

Procedure

± Distribute the individual maps to the
trainees according to the Sub-district
which they are to enumerate,

A At this point you will allow a very
short interval for each trainee to
study his map. Do not prolong this
study and do not, at this time, answer
quesTions regarding individual areas.

Suggest that, in urban areas, trainees should start
right away to make an actual check of
their areas on the field, so that any
discrepancies may be caught immediately
and the enumerators may become familiar
with the area well in advance of actual
enumeration.

Not only is it important for an enumerator to know how
to use his map, he must also know exactly where to look
for dwellings, ,

Emphasize again that this must be done in orderly

fashion^

In urban areas (a) start at one corner of a block

and proceed around it in a
clockwise direction before
starting smother,

(b) do not run back and forth
across the street.

Stress the importance of watching for out-ofT:the-
way places, •

A Ask trainees to name typical
ones which might be found in
urban areas.

& List the suggestions on BB . If
all listed below are not
mentioned, add remainder your-
self.

- 12 -

Points to cover

Procedure

(b) In rural areas

(a) Alleys, courts, passageways

(b) Back yards

(d) New streets not shown on map

(e) Basements, side and rear entrances in both
residential and non-residential structures

(f ) Office buildings, factories,
garages, warehouses, stores

(g) Churches, .stations, municipal
buildings

(h)- Apartment buildings, hotels
(i) Institutions, schools, missions
(j) Houseboats, river boats, railroad
cars, tents, trailers.

) These may house
) such persons as
) janitors, night-
) tsatchmen, staff
) members and the
) like.

Enumerators in urban areas, particularly, should. watch
for such settlements as shack towns, jungles, etc.

In rural areas, enumerators should -

(a) start at one corner of the district and cover
every road, lane or path,

(b) watch for branch roads leading off main roads,

A Ask trainees to name clues to finding
out-of-the-way places in rural areas,

A List suggestions on BB, They might be -

(a) Breaks; in trees

(b) Chimney smoke

(d) Lead-in wires for telephone lines.

Certain dwellings might be overlooked in rural areas.
These might be -

(a) House in valleys or hidden by thick woods

(b) Houses on hilltops

(d) Other dwellings on farms, such as those
used by hired help, tenant farmers,
migratory workers, etc.

To avoid .missing such places, instruct enumerators to
ask, at the end of each visit, if there are other
houses nearby and how they may be reached.

- 13 =-■

III. BASIC DEFINITIONS
AND
. WHOM TO ENUMERATE

Points to cover

1 . Introduction

Procedure

2. Definitions
(i) Dwelling

Point out that, in general, all persons living in an
enumeration area as of midnight
between May 31st and June 1st must be
enumerated.

There are, however, certain defini-
tions and rule^ which modify this
statement.

Enumerators must know before proceeding further that -
' (i) the dwelling, which a group of persons

occupies, forms the basic unit of en\jmera-

tion for these persons,
(ii) the definition of a dvrelling is as follov;s:-

* Have trainees turn to Page 12, Section! of
the Enumeration Manual. Read aloud -the -defi-

nition of a dwelling.

. Dwelling — -
The terms "dwelling" and "dwelling unit" are
interchangeable. That is, they have the same
meaning. A dwelling is a structurally separate
set of living premises, v/ith private entrance
from. outside the building, or from a common hall-
way or. stairv/ay inside. The entrance must not
_be through any one else's living quarters,

Emphasize the necessity for structural separateness by
citing exam.ples of dwellings in your area, e.g., -
(i) the typical single house
(ii) the self-contained apartment
(iii) the separate sections of a double house
or row,

Mote - Two or three rooms, for example, on the third
floor of a house, may appear to be more or
less self-contained, but do not necessarily
constitute a divrelling. unless they have been
made actually structurally separate. .

Cite, again, local examples.

- 14 -

Points to cover

Procedure

(ii) Household

Point out that (i) all persons living in one

dwelling unit constitute a ■■■ ■

household..

(ii) the number of households, therefore,

in an area v;ill be exactly the

same as the number of occupied

dv;ellings. .

(iii) the members of a household may or

may not be related to each other

by ties of kinship.

* Have a trainee read the definition of house-

hold on Page 12, Section 3 of the Enumeration

Manual.

Uo Household

A person or group of persons occupying one

dwelling is defined as a "household". Every

person must be a member of some household.

3.. Whom to

Emphasize that (i) every person found in a dwelling

enumerate

at the time of the enumerator's

call will not necessarily be part

of that household.

(ii) certain persons who should be

included in the household may be

absent at the time of the enumera-

tor's call.

(a) In the house-

Set forth the following rules: -

hold

(a) In general a person should be included in

the household where he sleeps, not where he

eats or works.

This includes (i) those persons, who will

be met with most often.

who are presently living

at home (including infants

born before midnight.

May 31) .

(ii) also, persons who are tempo-

rarily absent from home on

a visit, travelling on

business, attending school *

- or university.

(iii) persons \%'ho are temporarily

confined in a general

hospital.

(iv) lodgers who- sleep regularly

in the dwelling (except

student lodgers with a usual

•

residence elsewhere) ,

- 15 -

Points to cover

Procedure

(b) Not in the

(v) servants and other'
employees who sleep
regularly in the dwelling,
(vi) persons temporarily

residing in the dv:elling
. who have no other usual
residence,
(vii) persons, since deceased,
who vrere alive as of
midnight May 31.

Where possible, local examples might be used
to illustrate -the above.

(b) Certain persons \%all be eniimerated, but not

household

4. Documents used
in enumeration

(i) Form 2

included in the household. These include
guests or lodgers who have a usual' place of
residence elsewhere, but who do not think
they will be enumerated there.

These include (i) guests or other temporary
residents who either have
been enumerated or expect
to be enumerated in their
usual place of residence,
(ii) persons who are not to be
included in the Canadian
Census, i.e.,

- persons attached to foreign
embassies or legations who
are citizens of a foreign
country.

- citizens of another country
who are temporarily
visiting Canada.

- members of the armed forces
of another country
stationed in Canada.

- infants born after midnight
of May 31.

Explain that (a) each individual in Canada will be enu-
merated on a separate card or
"document",
(b) there are two types of documents on
which to enumerate people,
(i) a v/hite document called the
Population docioment or Form 2.

* Display a Form 2,

- 16 -

Points to cover

(ii) Form 2A

Procedure

(ii)

a document which is the same in
general appearance, except for
a blue stripe .across the top,
known as the "Temporary Resi-
dent" document or Form 2A,

* Display a Form 2A.

use.

Form 2

5. "Usual" residence

is the basic document and
will be used to enumerate
every person whose usual
residence is in the dwelling,
including members of the
household temporarily absent,
and infants.

Form 2A is to be used for every

person in the dwislling or
summer cottage, etc., who
has a usual residence else-
where, and who would 'not be'
enumerated at the usual
place of residence.

* Have trainees turn to Page 23,
Section 16, of the Enumeration
Manual. Explain the chart brief-
ly and point out the need for
further study at home of this
whole section. Note, also, the
typical examples listed in Sec-
tion 17.

Before proceeding further, -trainees should have an
understanding of what is meant by "Usual" residence.

Definition - A person's usual residence is the place
where he regularly sleeps.

- 17 -

Points to cover

Procedure

Exceptions - (i) Student lodgers.

(ii) Heads of families or households
who are unable, because of their
work, to live at home with their
families except on week-ends and
holidays.

* Have trainees note Section 17, Example 2,
Page 23 in the Envuneration Manual,

Note - A family's usual residence may be even a

house they are sub-letting for a few months
or less, provided that they have no other
place of residence.

6. Practice
Exercise

* If time permits, have trainees do Practice
Exercise A. Allow not more than 10 minutes
to complete the exercise and 10 minutes to
check and discuss it.

* If you have no time, have trainees complete
the exercise at home and check it at the
beginning of the next day' s session.

- 18 -

Practice Exercise A

Directions - Following are tj'pical cases v;hich you as an enumerator
may meet. Decide whether or not 7/ou would enumerate
these persons and on x^rhich document. Express your de-
cision by ticking (v/) the appropriate colvunn.

Enumerate

on
Form 2

You call on a man with a vaf e and three
children who has lived and worked in your
enumeration area for the past 10 years.

Mr. and Mrs. Stanley are guests in a home
at v;hich you call. They have just been
visiting for the day and expect to return
to their home in a neighbouring city that
evening.

Mrs. Morton tells you her husband is in the

Air Force. He is stationed some distance

away and comes home only on frequent week- ^

ends. Mow will you enumerate (a) Mrs. . (a) ^/

Morton (b) Mr. Morton? Xb)

The respondent tells you that her son is a
travelling salesman who is on the road most
of the time. He does not stay at any one
place but returns here to his home between
trips,-

Mrs. \^Jhite is a mdov; mth one son. At the
time of your visit she is alone as her son
is away all week attending High School in
the neighbouring city. How will you enumer-( a)
ate (a) Mrs. White (b) her son? (b)

j£.

Within your eniimeration area is a large

Tourist Home. Here you find two maids (a)

Ada, who sleeps there and (b) Beth, who ^

gets her meals there, but goes home at ■ (a) V

night. (b)

A family from another province is vacation-
ing in a trailer in the yard of this Tourist
Home. They are staying only over night, but
do not intend to return home until September,

on
Form 2A

Do
not
enumerate

- 19 -

10.

11.

12.

13.

15.

You visit a home where the wife is tempora-
rily in the hospital. She is expected home
shortly with her infant daughter' born June 6, /
1951. How will you enumerate (a) the wife, (a) \i
(b) the infant daughter?

Mr. and Mrs. Taylor are American citizens.
They are staying with Mrs. Taylor's sister
for three weeks, after which they plan to
return to their home in the United States.

Mrs. Brown is staying with her son and his
family at the time of your call. She plnns
to stay here for 3 months and then go on to
her daughter's. She has no home of her own

Mrs. Barclay tells you her daughter is a
nurse-in-training in residence at the local
hospital. She is at home at the time of
your call, but is returning to the hospital
that evening.

About ten days after starting your enumer-
ation you visit a dwelling vihere a father-
in-law died a week before.

Mrs. Hanson tells you her husband works in
the city 60 miles away. He has a room
there which he uses all week, but he re-
turns home on week-ends. How will you
enumerate (a) Mrs. Hanson, (b) Mr. Hanson?

Miss Bailey is on a business trip to your
city. She is not sure how long her work
will keep her there and doubts if she will
be enumerated at her usual place of resi-
dence,

Mrs. Cross tells you her daughter, Mary,
teaches in the city all week. Mary shares
an apartment \-n.th a friend, but returns
home almost every week-end and holidays.
Mrs. Cross has her mother-in-law visiting
her for a month. Her home is in a neigh-
bouring town, but she doubt^ if she will
be enumerated there. How vdll you enumer-
ate (a) Mrs. Cross, (b) Mary, (c) the
mother-in-law?

Enumerate

on
Form 2 ■ ■ ■

on
■ Form 2A

not
enumerate ..

"(a) /

(b)

•/

(a) /

(b) /

(a) /

(b)

(c)

- 20 -

IV. VISITATION RBCQBD
(Form I)

Points to cover

li Introduction

Procedure

2, Pre-cnumeration
duties

(a) Entries on
cover

* The enlarged copies of the Population
Document should be hung where all can
see and where you may mark them with
ease.

* Have on hand j'-our Enumeration Manual,
Specimen Booklet and a copy of the
Visitation Record o

Begin the session by stating that -

(a) you .intend to discuss, now, the actual enumera-
tion forms in the order of their use.

(b) if a point is not clear, trainees should not
hesitate to ask questions.

* Display your copy of the Visitation Record
and have trainees find theirs in their
Portfolios.

Draw attention to the bilingual form of the Visitation
Record,

Explain that it has been arranged in this manner for
purposes of convenience.

Stress that,

although English headings appear on the
left hand pages and French headings on
the right, all entries, wliether made by
French or English enumerators, must be
in consecutive order, starting at dwell-
ing 001 and following through to the end.
At no time is a page or even a line to
be skipped.

Point out t?iat the follovring items on this form must be
entered prior to actual enumeration : -

(a) On the cover -
(i) Province
(ii) District. and sub-district
numbers
(iii) Municipality (i.e., city, town,
village or rural municipality)
(iv) Enumerator's name
(v) Enumerator's Post Office
address

- 21 -

Points to cover

(b) On each page

Proceduire

3. Use a ball point
pen

(b) On the heading of each page -
(i) District No.
(ii) Sub-district No,
(iii) Enumerator's Name

* Display the sample page of the Visitation
Record in your Specimen Booklet o

Explain that this Booklet contains specimens to guide
enumerators in completing certain forms
and blank copies of these forms vfhich will
be used for practice purposes during the
training sessions o

* Have trainees find the Specimen Booklet
in their Portfolios and examine the
heading on the sample page of the Visita-
tion Record,

Stress the importance of having the entries completed
correctly on both the page heaaing ana
cover.

Explain that entries on the Visitation Record are to
be made v/ith a ball point pen,

* Distribute one pen to each trainee.

* Have each trainee use his pen to make
the proper entry on the Visitation
Record cover. As they do this, you
will check to make sure that the correct
District and Sub-district numbers have
been entered.

Warn trainees that care must be taken not to lose their
pens, as one only has been provided for each,

- 22

Points to Cover

Procedure

4. Determine what

* Have trainees turn to the General

constitutes the

Instructions on the inside cover

dwelling (or

of the Visitation Record.

household) at

the beginning

Stress the importance of becoming thoroughly familiar

of the interview

with these instructions, as well

as those at the back of the

Record.

* Read the first two sentences of the

General Instructions as follows -

List every dwelling in the order of your

route. Use one line for each dwelling.

Emphasize that in any interview the enumerator must

first determine the dwelling (or

household). He must satisfy himself

that the living quarters x-/hich are about

to be enumerated meet the requirements

of the definition for a dvrelling.

Suggest that this may best be done by questions such
as:-

Hov; m.any persons live here?

VJhat is their relation to each other?

Are there other families living here?

V/hat are their living arrangements (i.e..

do they have a separate entrance, separate

cooking facilities, etc.?)

5. List dwellings in

Explain that -

the top section

(a) most dv/ellings will be listed in the top

of Visitation

(numbered) section of the Visitation Record.

Record

unless

* Have trainees note the top section of

an occupied, sum-

the sample page in the Specimen Booklet.

mer cottage, cabin.

trailer, etc.

(b) Special rules, hov;ever, apply to seasonal-type

d\\rellings, such as summer cottages, cabins,

trailers, etc.

- 23 =

Points to cover

Procedure

These are -

(i) If unoccupied
(ii) If occupied by

a household vihich
has no other usual
residence o

(iii) If occupied by a
household which
has a usual resid-
ence elsewhere o

do not enumerate,
list the dwelling
in the top
(numbered) section.

list the dxvelling
in the special
section at the
bottom of the page<

* Have trainees note special section at
bottom of sample page in Specimen
Booklet.

Read the entry in the left-hand margin.

Households temporarily
living in summer cottages,
camps, etCo, with a usual
residence elsewhere,,

Note - This is the only instance v;here the lower
section will be used.

Cite examples, e.g.,-

Suppose a simmer colony is vathin your emomeration
area. When you visit it you find:-

(i) six cottages which have not yet been opened
for the season,
(ii) one vfhich has been winterized and in which
the family has lived all winter, and
(iii) two others into which families have just
m.oved for the summer months onlyo

By questioning find out from the group, how each of
these types v/ould be listed on the Visitation Record.
The answers should be -

(i) Do not list the six unopened cottages,
(ii) List the winterized cottage in the upper
section since this household has no other
usual residence,
(iii) List the two summer-resident household.s in
the lower section, since they are occupjdng
the cottages for the sumpser only.

- 24 -

Points to Cover

6. Enter the head of
household only-

Procedure

7. The dwelling
number

Explain that - •

(a) for Census purposes, there must be a head to
each household.

(b) the person to be listed as "head" will
usually be determined from the replies to the
first questions concerning the household.
Thus, if the enumerator finds a household
with -

(i) husband and wife living together, he
will report the husband as head,
(ii) a parent and unmarried child (or
children) - the parent will be re-
ported as head,
(iii) brothers and sisters - usually the
eldest will be reported as head,
(iv) unrelated persons on equal footing -
one should be selected arbitrarily.

Note that, (i) in the case of hotels . the manager.
if resident, vri.ll be head; otherwise
a resident staff member or lodger
will be selected,
(ii) in general, the senior resident of-
ficial of an institution will be
listed as head, unless he occupies
his own self-contained quarters.
In that event, a resident staff
member or. should there be none in
the household, an inmate vdll be
selected arbitrarily as head.

(c) the name of the head of the household is to
^® printed in Column III of the Visitation
Record, - surname first, followed by the
given name and initials.

(d) one line, and one line only io to be used.
Under no circumstance is a line to be missed.

* Have trainees examine the sample page
in the Specimen Booklet.

Draxif attention to the fact that the name of each house-
hold head falls directly in line >ri.th a
printed dwelling number in Column II,

Explain that each dwelling enumerated must have a number
and that this number is determined by the
order in v;hich the dwelling is listed on
the Visitation Record, - hence the importance
of listing every dwelling in order.

- 25 -

Points to cover

3. The address

Procedure

9. Persons in
household

(i) In usual
residence

(ii) Temporarily-
residing
here

Mention briefly that the circled numbers in Column II

show which dwellings are to be
taken in the Housing Census, This
will be explained fully later.

Point out that the correct address must be ientered in

Column IV for every dwelling. This
must be the actual location of the
dwelling, rather than the Post
Office address. Thus

(a) in urban areas, enter the street
and nvimber (and apartment number
if the dwelling is situated in
an apartment building),

(b) in rural areas, enter the muni-
cipality, township, parish,
concession, etc, (In rural parts
of the Prairie Provinces enter
section, township, range and
meridian. In these areas it
will be necessary to point out
how Column IV is divided for this
purpose,)

Caution against careless entries in Columns V and VI,

In Column V - enter the total number of persons
whose usual residence is in this
dwelling. These are the persons who
really belong in this household and
for whom the enumerator will complete
a Form 2,

In Column VI- enter the nxjmber of temporary resi-
dents, i.e., persons v/ho have a
usual residence elsewhere but do not
expect to be enumerated there. These
may be guests or lodgers temporarily
residing in a household or they may
be an entire household temporarily
occupying a dwelling.

Remind the group that such a household living in a summer

cottage, etc., will be enumerated in the
lower section of the page and will have
an entry only in Column VI.

Note, also, that all persons counted in Column VI should

be enumerated on a "temporary resident
document" (Form 2A),

- 26 -

Points to Cover

Procedure

10. When should the
Remarks Column
be used?

(a) Household out
for the time ■
being

(b) No one to
give in-
formation
or complete
information
not obtain-
able ■

Explain to the trainees that Column VII is provided
for entering remarks which are necessary
as reminders to themselves, thus,

(a) if the houGehold is out for the time
being, the enumerator should fill in

■Columns III, IV and either V or VI if
the information can be obtained from
neighbours, etCo Then, he should
enter a reminder note in Column VII
to call back when the household is
at home,

* Point out typical entry, dv/ellihg 008,
on sample page of Visitation Record.

(b) If everyone is too busy, or no respon-
sible person is present to give the
information, the enumerator should make
an appointment to call back at a
specific time, and enter this' time in
Column VII. This applies also to cases
x-ihere it is impossible to obtain complete
information concerning a person from
other household members.

* See dwelling 010, sample page of Visitation
Record.

(c) In certain cases, where it is impossible
to arrange a personal interview, a Form
5 anouid be left. Explain that this is
an Individual Population Form prepared
specially for this purpose.- It vail be
discussed in detail later.

* Display a copy of Form 5, but do not waste
time at this point discussing it.

When such a form (or forms) is left, a note
should be made in Column VII, including the
date it will be picked up.

* See dv;elling 003, sample page of Visitation
Record.

- 27 -

Points to Cover

Procedure

(d) Closed
dvrelling

(e) Institution

(f) Diplomatic
residence

11, Vacant dwelling

(d) If it is found out from neighbours,
etc., that the household is living
elsewhere temporarily "(e.g.., avfay
for the summer), fill in Columns III,
IV and V and enter "Closed" in Column
VII.

* See dwelling 014, sample page of Visita-
tion Record o

(e) If an institution is enumerated, the
name should be entered in Column
VII.

■ * See dwelling 012, sample page of Visita-
tion Records,

(f) In a few areas diplomatic
residences may be found. Although
ambassadors, envoys, soldiers and
other citizens of another country
living in Canada in an official
capacity are not counted in the
Canadian Census, nevertheless their
homes must be visited. The dwelling
must be recorded on the Visitation
Record and any persons (e,g„, the
Canadian maid or gardener) who should
be included in the Canadian Census,
counted o

Make entry in the Visitation Record. ,■.
in the usual way, and enter "Diplomatic
residence" in Column VII. Leave Columns
III and V blank, if there are no 'persons
enumerated at the dwelling, ' ; ' .

Explain that if no one lives in the dx\relling and the
enumerator is sure that the household is
not just out for the time being, or away
temporarily, the word "Vacant" should be
entered in Column': III and the address in
Column IV.

* See dwelling 005, sample page of Visita-
tion Record;

Stress that the enumerator must take great care to dis-
tinguish between Vacant and Closed dwellings.

- 28 -

Points to cover

12, D»felllng "tjfld^r
const ruotion"

13 0 Unincorporated
villages, ham-
lets, etc.

lA. What to do if
more than one
Visitation
Record is
needed

Procedure

Explain that if a dwelling is under construction and

not yet occupied, the entry in Column III
should be "Under construction", followed
by the address in Column IV,

Hote - if occupied, the dwelling should be
treated as a completed dwelling.

* See dwelling 009, sample page of Visita-
tion Record,

Point out that Column I will require an entry only

in certain rural enumeration''areas within
which are unincorporated villages or ham-
lets. Data concerning these small centres
are often required apart from the rural
portion proper within which they are
located. It is important therefore that
they be kept separate,

* Show how this is done on the sample
page of the Visitation Record.

Mention that a list of places to be kept separate is
included on the description accompanying
the map of each area. If it is found
that other hamlets have sprung up since
the descriptions were written, they should
be added to the descriptions as well as
entered on the Visitation Record.

Draw attention to the fact, that provision has been made
for 300 dwellings in the top sections of
the pages. This will be sufficient for
most enumerators. Should einother Record be
needed, instruct them -
(i) to obtain one from you
(ii) to change the dwelling numbers in

the second book to read "301", "302",
etc.

* Illustrate how this should be done on the BB.

- 29

Points to oover

Procedure

15.

What to do in
the case of large
STimmer colonies,
etc.

16.

Enter date at end
of each day's work

17.

Check off completed
call-backs

18. Notes re enumeration

Certain enimerators will find themselves in areas
where there are a large nimber of households in
summer cottages, camps, etCo Instruct them as
follows:-

(1) to first fill up the spaces in the lower
sections of the Visitation Record.

(2) when the lower sections are filled, cross
off the dwelling numbers in the top section
of the final page, or pages, and use these
spaces, working from the back page toward
the front of the book.

Instruct envimerators to write the date in the right-
hand margin below the last dwell-
ing enumerated on that day.

Remind them to be sure to enter a date for each day

on which they enumerate,

* Show how this is done on the sample page
of the Visitation Record,

Explain that when a call-back has been made and the

enumeration completed, or when a
Form 5 has been picked up a tick
mark (\/) should be made opposite :
the reminder note in Column^ VII,

* See example on the sample page of the
Visitation Record,

* Have trainees turn to the "Additional
Space for Remarks" at the back of the
Visitation Record.

Explain that (i) this space has been provided for

explanatory notes regarding the enum-
eration of a dwelling in cases where
there is insufficient space in the
"Remarks" column,
(ii) where such entries are necessary a
,cppea»ref erence should be made in the
"Remarks" column, e.g., "See note at
back" ,

Encourage trainees to use this space freely to clarify
unusual entries.

Emphasize, also^ the necessity for entering the correct
dwelling number opposite any note which
may be made.

- 30 -
V. POPULATION DOCUMENTS

(Population Questions I-I9)

Points to cover

lii; Purpose of Popula-
tion documents

Procedure

2, Arrangement of
Population
documents

A Besides the enlarged documents, you should
have at hand extra copies of Form 2 and 2A,
as well as a binder and jacket of documents,
and your Specimen Booklet,

By way of introduction, point out once more that -

(a) the whole Census hinges on the Population docu-
ments, particularly Form 2,

A Display Forms 2 and 2A, Circulate extra
copies in order that trainees may see the
actual forms.

(b) every person enumerated must be accounted for
on one or other of these forms.

Canada ,
(ii) detailed information concerning that
population.

Describe briefly the arrangement of the dociiraentsr-
(a) The Population documents (Form 2) will be
serially numbered and arranged in numbered
jackets containing 100 each.

k Display a sample jacket.

(b)

(d)

Each enumerator should receive enough jackets to
cover his area. If he discovers he is going to
have too fevj, he should notify you immediately,
(c) The documents are arranged in the jacket so that
they may be placed in a ring binder before the
jacket is removed.

The empty jacket must be kept carefully and the
completed documents replaced therein.

it Display ring binder and demonstrate method
of inserting and removing documents,

(e) The ring binder has a pocket on the inside of
each cover. The Visitation Record (Form 1) will
be carried in the front pocket.
A supply of Temporary Resident documents (Form
2A) should be carried at all times in the back
pocket a

31 -

Points to cover

Procedure - ."• -

& Demonstrate manner in which these forms fit

in pockets. In so doing, emphasize the

necessity of inserting the Visitation Record

as far as possible into the pocket, to avoid

interference with the rings.

i Have trainees mark Sections 38 and 39, Pages

■32 and 33 of the Enumeration Manual for study

at home.

3. Order of use

The Population documents should be used in order as the

enuiaerator comes to them. In other words, should a house-

hold (or individual) be out at the time of the first visit,

no blank documents will be left to be filled in at a

later date. In such , an event, the procedure will be as

follows:- .

(i) List the household in its proper order on the

Visitation Record.

(ii) Mark the time for a call-back in the Remarks

column.

(iii) Proceed with the next household using the

documents immediately following those of the

household last enumerated.

. ;!

(i.e., if household OO9 is out, list household

009 on the Visitation Record, but enumerate

household 010 on the documents immediately

following household 008 )«

(iv) When the call-back is made for household 009

(say after enumerating household 023), the

enumeration will be made on the documents

immediately following household 023, but care

must be taken that the proper household number

(i.e., 009) is entered on each document.

(v) At the end of each day enumerators will check

over the completed documents and at that time

will arrange them in household order.

4. Care of documents

Emphasize that, since the documents must later be process--

ed through office machines , the greatest

care must be exercised in handling them.

(a) They must .not be folded, bent, or

, • in any way disfigured ^

(b) Special care must be taken that

the ring-holes do not become

scuffed or worn.

ed in any way, write "Cancelled"

across the. face of it and proceed

with the next one.

5. Marking the docu-

& Show the group a "mark sense^'pen.

ments

- 32 -

Points to cover

(a) "Mark sense" pen

Procedure

Explain that (i) this is the first time in the history of
Census-taking that such a pen has been
used ,

it is to be used for all entries on the
documents. " ~~ '~~~' ""

it is not lost or

(ii)

(iii)
(U)

(b) "Mark sense" entry

care must be taken thkt
broken,

it is expected that there will be
sufficient ink in the pen' to complete the
job of enumeration. If not, the Field
Supervisor will have a limited supply of
extra "cartridges" or "barrels" to re-
place the original should it run dry.

A Display cartridge and state that the method
of using pen and replacing cartridge will be
explained later.

Point out that since the marks made by the- pen on the

document are picked up and tabulated by an
intricate office machine, great care must
be taken in making entriesT .

A Have trainees exsimine the first Specimen
document in the Specimen Booklet, observing
the ovals and the care with which entries
have been made .

A. Demonstrate on an enlarged Form 2 the proper
method of making an entry, thus ^ ^

A Similarly, show that the entries must not be,

too short
too long
too light
off centre

( — 7

i. Have trainee^ practice making a few entries
in pencil on the first blank Form 2 (Bage 25)
in the Specimen Booklet,

Explain that a blotter must never be used with these

documents, A special "document separator"
has been supplied with. each binder. It is
not to be used as a blotter.

A aiow docuxuent separator in binder and
demonstrate how it is to be used.

- 33 -

Points to cover

(d) Write-in entries

6, Order and wording
of questions

(a) Order

(b) Wording

Procedure

Trainees should know that every column must be marked for
every individual, with a few exceptions.

k Indicate the following exceptions on the en-
larged Form 2,

(i) Column 1$ (Period of Immigration) will
be marked only for persons born outside
Canada .
(ii) Columns 18-29 relate only to persons 14
years of age and over,
(iii) Slanfced ovals (ite.. sections enclosed
by a broken line) must never have an
entry . They are for office use only.

it Again using the enlarged Form 2, indicate that
a "write-in" will be necessary in certain
cases where an oval has not been provided.

A illustrate, using "Chinese" origin (Column 1?)
as an example.

Stress the importance of clear, legible, entries which do
not run over the allotted space.

The order in which the questions are to be asked must
follow the order of the document. This order has been
carefully planned and must be adhered to.

7. Filling in the

Outline

document

(i)

(ii)

(a) Order of

(iii)

enumeration

(iv)

(v)

(vi)

(vii)

Enumerators will find the correct wording for most ques*^
tions on the document. This is the wording which they
must use.

Enumerators must ask all applicable questions. They are
not to assume they know the answers to any question, even
when enumerating someone they know.

the order of enumeration as follows :■=

Head of household

Wife of head

Unmarried children - in order of age firom eldest

to youngest
Married children and their families
Additional relatives
Lodgers and their families

Servants or other employees and members of their
families
Other members of the household,

A By questioning, review the method of deter-
mining the head of household.

(viii)

- 34 -

Points to cover

Procedure

A. Refer to Section 5» Page 13 in Enumeration
Manual .

5. Household head:

The head of the household is
determined as follows:

Household

(a) Husband and wife

(b) Parent and .unmarried child

(children)

(d) Other cases ^

Head

Husband
Parent

Select any one
(See Sec. 45,
Question 3,
Page 39.)

(b) Which document to.
use

Emphasize that a docuraent for the head of the household

should be completed first , regardless of the
fact that the information is supplied by
another member of the household,

k By questioning, establish again the distinction
between the Population documents, Form 2 and
2A.

A Ask: What are the two documents used to
enunierate individual persons?

Ans. Form 2 and Form 2A,

k Ask: VJhen will you use Form 2?

Ans, For every person vjhose usual residence
is in that dwelling, including members
of the household temporarily absent and
infant s .

k Ask: When will you use Form 2A?

Ans. For every person enumerated in that

dwelling or summer cottage, etc.,' who
has a usual residence elsewhere and who
vjould not be enumerated at the place of
usual residence .( i.e. , all persons
enuiaerated in Column VI of the
Visitation Record).

A Draw attention to the fact that a distinguish-
ing note appears on the left side of Form 2
and Form 2A, Enumerators should refer to these
notes constantly, until thoroughly certain as
to which document to use.

- 35 -

Points to cover

Procedure

1. NAME
(a). Form 2

(b) Form 2A

A Have trainees turn to Section 10, Pages 1^,-16
and Section 45, Pages. 38-57 in the Enumera-
tion Manual,

Explain that Section 10 gives basic instructions for com-
pleting Form 2, These instructions must be
memorized in order to do a satisfactory job.

Section U5 gives complete details for filling
in each question on the Population documents.
It is essential that enumerators become
thoroughly familiar with these instructions
before starting to work.

Impress the trainees viith. the fact that the greater their
knowledge of these sections, the easier will
be their task.

k Have trainees turn^ to the first sample docu-
ment in the Specimen Booklet. As each ques-
tion is discussed, refer to the appropriate
entry on the specimen documents, and make a
corresponding entry on the enlarged sample.
Use these enlarged copies and the blackboard
freely for demonstration purposes.

Points to be emphasized :-

( i ) The Name must be printed distinctly,
(ii) Care must be taken to obtain the correct spell-
ing,
(iii) The name listed as head of household on the

Visitation Record must alvjays agree with that
of the first person. of the household enumerated.

A Refer to the Specimen Booklet, Note the names
of the heads of household listed on the Visita-
tion Record and the corresponding entries on
the documents for dwellings 002 and 007. Make
an entry for "Irene Martin" on the enlarged
safiiple document.

Explain that, but for a few important exceptions, the

Temporary Resident document (Form 2A) will be
completed in exactly the same manner as Form
2, These exceptions will be pointed out as
each question is discussed,

i Have trainees compare question 1 on the
Specimen Forms 2 and 2A.

-36 -

Points to cover

Procedure

2. ADDRESS
(a) Urban areas

(b) Rural areas

Point out that - (i) the Name is entered in exactly the

same manner on both documents,
(ii) Form 2A. however, requires an

additional entry of the District and
Sub-district numbers for Question la
in the upper right-hand corner of
the document.

Emphasize that this entry must be made correctly on every
Form 2A,

i. Refer to Question la on the Specimen Form
2A.

In urban areas the address will include :-
(i) street and number
(ii) apartment number (where applicable')
(iii) name of urban centre. In this connection it
should be pointed out that confusion may
arise in certain areas as to the exact lo-
cality, due to the fact that an urban centre
may have the same name as the surrounding
rural Municipality, (e.g., Winchester Village
and Winchester Township), It is suggested
that, for such cases, the enumerator specify
the type of area which he is enumerating, as
"village", "town", "township", etc.

A Have trainees examine the Specimen documents
for Mrs. Martin, noting that "Greenwood tp."
has made the entry explicit.

A Make the entry for Mrs, Martin on the enlarged
copy and, where appropriate, cite other local
examples.

In rural areas, record the township, parish, or
municipality, and the concession if possible, thus,

A BB

"Concession 10
Kincardine Tp."

Note - What is wanted here is the actual location of the
dwelling, not the Post Office address. "

Example:

A household, living on Concession 10, Kincardine
tp., might have as its Post Office address
"R.R.A. Glarais". In order that this household
be counted in its proper area, "Concession 10,
Kincardine tp." must be entered on Form 2, not
"R.R.A. Glamis."

- 37 -

Points to cover

Procedure

(d) Check with Visi-
tation Record

(e) Form 2A

3. RELATIONSHIP TO
HEAD OF HOUSEHOLD

(a) Form 2

( If you are a Field Supervisor in the Prairie Provinces,
you will instruct enumerators in rural areas to record
the section, township, "range and meridian in the space
provided, thus,

M. BB "Sec. 7 Tp. 22 R, 3 W.l")

Explain that if the persons enumerated are in an insti-
tution, hotel or camp, its name must be
entered on line 3 of this question,

i. Have trainees look at Question 2 on the
Specimen Housing document, Page 17 in the
Specimen Booklet ,

Emphasize that the address in every case must check with
that given in the Visitation Record for
the head of that household.

Point out, however, that the address reported for a per-
son enumerated on Formi 2A does not agree
with the Visitation Record, but refers
rather to_ that person's usual residence.

A Have trainees examine Question 2 on the
■ Specimen Form 2A, Page 15, in the Specimen
Booklet,

Explain that persons enumerated away from home must be
counted in the locality where they usually
reside. For this reason they are enumerated
on the special document. Form 2A, and the
address on that document decides where that
person will be counted. Great care must,
therefore, be taken to see that the address
of the^ usual residence is correct and as
explicit as possible,

A Review briefly the rules for determining the
head of the household as outlined during the
discussion on the Visitation Record,

Emphasize that (i) the person listed on the Visitation

Record must be returned as head in
Question 3,
(ii) the true relationship to the head,

of all other persons in the household,
must be recorded as outlined on the
document.

- 38 -

Points to cover

Procedure

A Read the following from Q,uestion 3 on the
document 0

( — - son, daughter, ward, son-in-law, grandson,
mother, uncle, niece, employee, partner, lodger,
lodger's wife, lodger's daughter, inmate, etc.)

&. Have trainees note the various relationships
outlined on the Specimen documentSo

k Mark
sampl

"Head" for Mrs. Martin on the enlarged
e document.

Make it clear that -

(i) the wife of a married son living in the household
of which his father is head, must be recorded as

"daughter-in-law" not "wife", while their

son would be "grandson" not '!son",
(ii) the families of lodgers or employees should be
recorded as "lodger's wife", "employee's "
daughter", etCo

A Emphasize this point further, if time permits,
by asking such questions as the follow ing:-

A Ask:

What would be the relationship of a
married daughter's husband to the head
of the household?

Ans.

Son-in-^law,

A Ask:

What would be the relationship of a
married son's daughter to the head of
the household?

Ans,

Granddaughter,

t Ask:

If a hired man, his wife, and daughter
are living in the same dwelling as the
employer, how .would you report their
relationship to the head of the house-
hold?

Ans.

Employee
Employee's wife
Employee's daughter.

A Ask:

If four unrelated persons are sharing a
dwelling on an equal basis, how will
you report them in Question 3?

Ans,

Report one as head, and the other three
as partners.

- 39 -

Points to cover

(b) Form 2A

4. HOUSEHOLD NUl/IBER
(a) Form 2

Procedure

(b) Form 2A

Explain that -

(i) as in Q,uestion 2, the address for persons

enumerated on Form 2A related to the usual re-
sidence, so in Question 3» tii© relationship to
head, must be that of the person's usual resid-
ence»
(ii) if the person enumerated on Form 2A is other
than the head of the household at his usual
residence j the name of the "head of the house-
hold at that usual residence must be given in
Q,uestion 3a.

Thus, Francis C. Roland, enumerated on the
Specimen Form 2A, lives usually with his father-
in-law, in Halifax, N.S,, and is reported as
"son-in-law"; while the entry in (Question 3a is
"Gilbert Henry", the name of his father-in-law
who is head of the household,

4, Have trainees examine these entries on the
Specimen Form 2A, Page 15, of the Specimen
Booklet .

The enumerators must keep in mind the following when
marking the household number on Form 2:=

(i) This number must be the same as the one listed
for this household on the Visitation Record,
(ii) Every member of the household must have the
same number as the household head,
(iii) Each column must have one entry, e.g., the

second household enumerated should be marked
"0-0-2",

&. Mark "0-0-2" on the enlarged sample document
and have trainees examine (Question U on the
Specimen documents,

(iv) There must never be more than one entry in
each column.

No entry is to be made by the enumerator for Q,uestion J+
on Form 2A, It will be supplied by the office when the

5. &^2C

temporary resident enumerated thereon is placed with the
household at that person's usual residence.

There should be no difficulty with this question. The
only time enumerators' will need to ask it is when the
sex cannot be inferred from either the name or the
relation to the head of the household.

- 40

Points to cover

6, AGE AT LAST
BlfiTHDAY

Procedure

However, enumerators must be careful to mark this question
for every person enumerated, "~" — — -

A Mark the entry "female" on the enlarged
sample and have trainees examine the other
Specimen documents.

Note that Forms 2 and 2A will be completed in exactly the
same manner for this question, """

What is wanted here is the person's exact age at his last
birthday before the Census date, ' ~

A Emphasize this point by questions such as
the following :-

& Ask: Mrs. Irene Martin stated, when asked,
that she was born on March 17, 1892,
What age should be entered for her?

Ans, 59, Her last birthday before the
Census date was March 17, 1951.

A Enter "59" on the enlarged sample,

A Ask: If you called on Edward Smith on June
16 and he stated that he was born on
June 5, 1910, what age would you enter
in 'Question 6?

Ans, 40. His last birthday before the Census
date was June 5, 1950,

A Ask: What age would you have entered if his
birthday had been May 31, 1910?

Ans, 41, His last birthday before the Census
date was May 31, I95I,

Note that - ,

(i) both columns must have an entry for every per-
son enumerated. Thus an entry for a 5-year old
child will be "0 - 5" not just "5",
(ii) there must be only one entry in each column,
(iii) if a child is under one year of age, the entry
will be "0 - 0".
(iv) if a person is 100 years of age or over, the
entry will be "9 - 9", ' .

(v) this question will be completed in exactly the
same manner on Forms 2 and 2A. ~

- 41

Points to cover

7.. MARITAL STATUS

Procedure

8, DOES THIS PERSON
LIVE CK A FARM?

(a) Form 2

Enumerators must inquire of each person whether he or she
was single, married, widowed or divorced as of June 1,
1951.

Note that -

(i) "Married" includes "separated" but not "divorced"
persons o A person whose marriage has been
annulled, however, should be marked "single",
"Married" is to be marked for every person whose
husband (or wife) is living, unless he (or she)
has obtained a divorce or annulment,
(ii) Except in rare cases, only "single" should be
marked in Q,ue3tion 7 for persons marked under
14 years of age in Question 6, Enumerators
should check for this,

4 Have trainees note the entries for Question 7
on the Specimen documents, Mark "Widowed" on
the enlarged sample document for Mrs, Martin,

The following points should be noted ■=

(i) An entry in this question is required for
every person enumerated,
(ii) If (as in densely populated sections of

cities) the answer is obvious, the entry may
be made without actually questioning the re-
spondent ,
(iii) In rural areas, small towns, villages, etc.,

great, care must be taken to obtain the correct
information,

k Mark the oval "No" in Question 8 for Mrs,
Martin, explaining as you do so that since
she lives in a built up suburban area, it is
safe to assume that "No" is the correct entry,

A Have trainees examine the Specimen documents
for Mrs. Martin's household, noting that all
members have the same entry for this question.

What is a farm for Census purposes?

k Read the definition as found in Section 45 (.8),
Page 39, of the Enumeration Manual,

For Census purposes, a farm is a holding carrying
on agricultural operations and;

(i) is three acres or more in size

or
(in), is from one to three acres in size
with the agricultural production in
1950 amounting to $250 or more.

- 42 -

Points to cover

Procedure

Emphasize the fact that this is a basic definition and

must be memorized »

Point out that agricultural operations include -

(i) the production of field, orchard and nursery
crops grown in the open or under glass,
(ii) the production (including pasturing) of live
stock and live stock products,
(iii) the raising of fur bearing animals.

Cite local examples, such as -

(i) the florist who has only a couple of acres of
land but whose greenhouses produce an income
much greater than $250.
(ii) the small farmer who has only an acre or so
under cultivation, but whose holding is
actually 4 or 5 acres in size.

Another point to be emphasized is that, in general, all
persons who live in a dwelling situated on a farm, will

i^be marked "yes" in i^uestion 8, regardless of their

occupations. The exception to this rule is in the case

of farms operated in connection with an institution. In

such cases the rule is:=

All persons living in the institution^
except the farm manager and his house-
hold will be marked "no" in Question 8,

(Note for areas in which there are Hutterite colonies -

Persons living in Hutterite colonies will
be shown as living on farms in (Question 8,
although for Housing purposes, these colonies
will be classed as institutions. Instruction

(b) Form 2k

on this point vjill be given when discussion
of the Housing document takes place,)

As in Questions 2 and 3> Question 8 refers to the per-
son's usual residence.

Examples:"

(i) Mrs, Adams is visiting her daughter in the
city for a months Her usual home is on a
farm with her son, but she doubts if she will
be enumerated there. She should, therefore,
be enumerated on a Form 2A and the correct
entry for her in Question 8 will be "yes",
(ii) Francis G, Roland, on the other hand is stay-
ing for a time on the farm of James A, Roy,
although his usual residence is in Halifax,

k. Have trainees note that on the Specimen Form
2A, the entry for Francis Roland- in Question 8
is "no", while the entries for the other per-
sons in the Roy household are "yes".

- 43 -

Points to cover

Procedure

9. HOW WiNY YEARS
OF SCHOOL IKO HAS
THIS PERSON HAD?

10. H/kS THIS PERSON
ATTENDED SCHOOL
ANY TDJE SINCE
SEPT., 1950?

It should be noted that -

(i) the wording for this question, as vjell as iiues-
tions 8, 10, 11, 12, and 14 is printed on the
dociuaent .
This is the wording to be used,

(ii) (i^uestion 9 ^J^d the rexriulnin^ questions on the
Population docuxaent will be completed in ex-
actly the same, manner on Form 2A as on Form 2,

Years of schooling include -

(i) all the years of formal schooling (including
university, but excluding kindergarten),
(ii) the number of years of formal schooling to

which the years spent in private study or part-
time attendance at classes is equivalent «

* Have trainees note entries on Specimen docu-
ments, Mark the oval "8 yrs," for Mrs. Martin
on the enlarged sample.

A Ask: Vi/hat would the entry for a respondent be
if he reported 8 years attendance at an
elementary school, 4 years at a secondary
and 3 winters at a night school, which
have given him Ig years toward his
University degree?

Ans, 13-16 years.

Instruct enumerators to mark "yes" in (Question 10 only
if the person has, had some regular day-
time attendance at some type of formal
school or university since Sept., 1950,

i Have trainees note that Mrs, Martin has had
no day-time attendance at school, but that
her granddaughter has, Mark the enlarged
sample document for Mrs, Martin,

&. Ask: What would be the entry in Question 10

for a veteran who attended night classes
at the University from September till the
end of April?

Ans. Mark the oval "no".

Remind trainees that both Questions 9 and 10 require an

entry for every person enumerated,
but it is not necessary to ask the
question for children under 5 years of
age.

- 44 -

Points to cover

11. CAN THIS PERSON
SPEAK ENGLISH?
FRENCH?

Procedure

12, WHAT WAS -THE
LAN&UACE
THIS PERSON FIRST
SPOKE IN CHILUHOCD
AND STILL
. UNDERSTAI^'DS?

Warn enumerators not to mark an oval until a reply is

received to each part of this question.

Explain that (i) infants will be reported as speaking
the language commonly spoken in the
home ,
(ii) deaf persons unable to talk will be
reported as speaking the language in .
which they make themselves understood,
(iii) this question refers only to the
English and French languages.

Thus Mrs, Martin may speak French, Flemish
and even German fluently, but for the pur-
poses of this question the answer will be
"Speaks French only",

A Note the entry for Mrs, Martin on the
Specimen and mark the enlarged sample
docuiaent ,

A Note that her daughter, on the other hand,
speaks both English and French and is so
marked on the Specimen,

This question is really self-explanatory,

i Have trainees examine the entry for Mrs,
Martin on the Specimen Form 2,

Draw attention to the fact that, Mrs, Martin apparently
first spoke Flemish as a child and still
■understands it. However since there was
no oval for "Flemish" it was necessary to
"write-in", the entry,

A Write-in 'Tlemish" on the enlarged sample

document.

Explain that there must always be a write-in when the
answer given varies from the list printed
on the document, except when the answer
is "Dutch", This will be marked "Nether-
lands".

a. Note the Speciiaen document for "Anna Haan"
on Page 8, in this connection.

- 45 -

Points to cover

Procedure

13 . RELIGION

The following points are to be stressed in regard to the
question on Religion:-

(i) The specific religious bodyj denomination^
etc., of which the respondent is either a
member or to which he adheres or favours
is to be recorded a

(ii) Broad terms such as Christian, Catholic »
Protestant, Believer, are not acceptable „

(iii) "None" is to be written in for persons
stating they have no religion,,

(iv) The response Church of England in Canada
should be marked Anglican o

Church of Scotland should be marked Presby-
terian,

Methodist ) should be questioned
) further 0
or ) This person may or may
) not be a member or ad=
' Congregationalist) herent of the United

) Church of Canada „

(v) Members of the same family will not neces=
sarily report the same religion o

& Have trainees examine the Specimen documents,,
Note that Mrs» Martin is a Roman Catholic
and mark the enlarged sample accordingly o
Note that Mr 0 and Mrso Roy report different
religions 0

Point out, further -

(i) that separate ovals are provided for Ukrai-=
nian (Greek) Catholic and Greek Orthodox «
(ii) that if a person states his religion is

"Greek Catholic", he must be questioned as
to whether he means "Ukrainian Greek
Catholic" or some other rite^ If it is a
rite of the Greek Catholic church other
than Ukrainian, this must be written in.

in the space provided »
(iii) "Greek Church" and "Armenian Church" and

like terms are not acceptable. It is neces-=
sary to distinguish between the Catholic
and Orthodox faiths^

Draw attention to the fact that, as in the case of

"Language", the response must be written
in if it differs from any of the religious
denominations listed on the documents

-46

Points to cover

Procedure

lA, BIRTHPLACE

(In what province
or country was
this person born?)

Again stress the need to follow the wording of the ques-
tion given on the document «

Responses will fall in two groups ■=
{ i ) Persons born in Canada
(ii) Persons born outside Canada,

Enumerators must deal

with them as follows:-

PERSONS BORN IN OJmJiDA PERSONS BORN OUTSIDE CANADA

(1) Mark the province
or territory of
birth in. the left-
hand column^

(1) Mark the country of

birth in the right-hand
column, or if not list-
ed,, write in below o

(2) The coxintry of birth is
to be given according to
present international
boundaries,

(3) If uncertain of the •
country of birth as it

is now constituted, write
in the province or dis-
trict, as Alsace-Lorraine,
Bohemia, etc,, or the
nearest city, as Warsaw,
Danzig, etCa

A Have trainees examine Specimens noting
how these rules are carried out^ Mark
"Belgium" for Mrs^ Martin on the en-
larged document 0

Explain that had MrSs Martin stated she was born in-
Ireland, it would have been necessary to
ask whether she was born in Northern
Ireland' or in the Republic of Ireland,,

•

4 Have trainees note the two ovals provided
on the document for this purposeo

Explain further, that, if the respondent is uncertain
as to which part of Ireland he was born
in, he is to be asked the county of birth«

A Refer to Section U5 (1A)> Page 41, of
the Enumeration Manual and read the
following -

- 47

Points to cover

15 i PERIOD OF
BMIGHATIQN.

(If born
outside Canada)

16. • CITIZENSHIP
(Nationality)

Procedure

For your guidance the following counties are
situated in Northern Ireland:

Antrim,
Down,
Londonderry ,

Armagh,

Fermanagh,

Tyrone.

All others are situated in the Republic of Ireland »

i. Suggest trainees mark this section for
future reference.

Note, too -

(i) that Ulster cannot be accepted as six of its
counties lie in Northern Ireland and three of
them are in the Republic of Ireland,
(11)' that "at sea" should be written in for persons
born at' sea.

This question is to be asked only for persons born out-
side Canada,

Enumerators must remember that (Question 15 will have -

no entry - if an oval is marked in the left-hand
column of Question lU (Birthplace),

an entry ■= if an oval is marked in the right-hand
column of "Question 14, or if there is
a write-in,

k Have trainees check this point on the
Specimen documents, Mark the oval
"11 - 20" for Mrs, Martin on the en^
larged sample, noting as you do so
that she was born in "Belgium",

Emphasize that Period of Immigration relates only to
the first arrival of persons born outside
Canada o

Citizenship is determined by the country to which a
person owes allegiance.

Enumerators will, therefore, ask:"

"Vihat is this person's citizenship, that
is, the country to which he owes
allegiance?".

- 48 -

Points to cover

Procedure

Following are the only three

possible answers, and the

method of dealing wi

th each:

Response

What to do

(a) Canada

(i)

If birthplace Canada, accept

as given.

(ii)

If birthplace not in Canada,
check to see if 5 years
residence has been acquired.

(b) A country other

(i)

If birthplace Canada, check

than Canada

to see if citizenship has
actually been lost.

" "" ■

(ii)

If birthplace not in Canada,
accept as given.

A '

(i)

Attempt to determine citizea-

•

citizenship

ship by further questioning,
using Section 45 (16) Pages 43
and 44. of the Enumeration
Manual as a reference.

■

(ii)

As a last resort, if you can-
not determine to what country
the person owes allegiance,
enter "unknown" in the write-
in space.

i Have trainees turn to Section 45 (l6)

Pages 42

-44, of

the Enuiaeration Manual,

Suggest

that this section be marked for

- . ,

careful

study at

home.

Emphasize the importance of

becoming familiar with this

' ,

section and of referring to it

when in doubt on the field „

il Have trainees examine the Specimen docu-

ments, checking

the entries with the in-

structions just {

5iven, Note that

although

Mrs, Martin was born in Belgium

she has

acquired

her 5 years residence.

Hence her response "Canada" will be

accepted

as given, Mark "Canada" on the

enlarged

sample.

17. ORIGIN

Hake very clear the (

iistinction between "citizenship

(nationality)" and "

origin".

k Use BB to demonstrate, as below -

- 49 -

Points to cover

Procedure

Citizenship (nationality)

refers to

the country

to which the person

owes allegiance

Origin

refers to
the cultural group
from which the person
is descended

Enumerators must realize -

(1) that peoples of many origins are citizens of
Canada, (i.e., English, Irish, Scottish,
French, Jewish, Ukrainian, etc,)
(ii) that, for Census purposes, a person's origin
is traced through his father «
(e.g., - a person's father is German,
his mother is Norwegian^
he will be entered German) ,

Instruct enumerators -

(i) to attempt to establish the person's origin by
asking,

"What language did you or your paternal ances-
tor speak on first coming to this continent?"

(a) If the origin can
be determined from
the answer given

- mark the appropri-
ate oval, or write
in the answer.

(b)

If the answer is
"English" or
"Gaelic"

(ii)

= inquire further to
determine whether
the origin is
English, Irish,
Scottish or Welsh,
if the respondent does not understand the first
question, or the enumerator cannot establish the
origin from the answer received, to ask further,
"Is your origin in the male line English,
Scottish, Ukrainian, Jewish, Norwegian. North
American Indian. Negro, etc,?"

± Have trainees note that Mrs, Martin, on the
Specimen Form 2, probably had to be- questioned
further, since her origin is "Belgian" while
the language which she probably spoke when she
first came to this continent was "Flemish",

. Mark "Belgian" for Mrs, Martin on the enlarged
document ,

- 50 =

Points to cover

Procedure

18-19. WAR SERVICE
ARD FORCES
■ SERVED m

Emphasize that under no circumstance is Question 12

(Language first spoken in childhood) to be
confused with Origin^ Jt. cannot be assumed
that the answer given to (Question 12
' establishes a person's origin. A typical
example of this is to be found on the
Specimen document for "MaryR. Roy". Al-
though the first language which she spoke
was Danish, her origin is reported as
Icelandic.

k Have trainees examine the Specimen
document for Mrs. Roy.

Methods of dealing with special cases;-

(i) Persons of mixed white and Indian parentage

(a) If living on Indian reserves - mark
"Native Indian".

(b) If not living on reserves - follow
usual procedure, i.e., trace origin
through fathers

(ii) Persons insisting they are "Canadian" or
"American" - accept answer and write it in
space provided.

(iii) Persons of mixed ancestry insisting they do
not know what to reply to the question -
mark oval "unknown",.

Emphasize that it should not often be necessary to use
the entries mentioned in (ii) and (iii)
above'. Enumerators generally should not
have too great difficulty in determining
a person's origin and will, therefore,
need to use these entries only as a last
resource.

Enumerators must remember ■=

(i) to inquire in every household for war

veterans,
(ii) to mark an oval in Q.uestion 18 for every
person 14 years of age and over,
(iii) to mark one (and only one) oval in Question
19 for every person reporting service in
Question 18.
(iv) if "none" is marked in Question 18, no oval
should be marked in Question 19.

51 -

Points to cover

Procedure

Explain that -

(i) War Service means enlistment for active service
in the armed forces of any country in World War
I or World War II.
(ii) Armed forces

include

the Army,

Navy,

Air Force,

Marines, .

Nursing Corps

do not include

Merchant Marine,

Red Cross,

St. John Ambulance Corps,

R.C.M,P.,

Civilian Fire Fighters,

War workers for Salvation

Army, Knights of

Columbus, etCo,
Civilian instructors or

staff in service schools

or establishments.

A Have trainees examine the Specimen
documents. Note that since Mrs,
Martin had no war service, the
oval "none" is marked in (Question
18 and there is no entry in Ques-
tion 19. Mark the enlarged sample
accordingly a

- 52 -
VI. REVIEW AND QUESTION PERIOD

Field Supervisors vfith areas in v/hich no Agriculture instruction is given.

1. This period should be used to clear up questions ^^rhich enumerators may raise
concerning the instruction given oh the previous day. Allow time for such
discussion-, provided that the questions are of general interest. Do not spend
time on intricate, small points which may be of interest to only one enumerator.
Such discussion should be postponed for a private interview after the regular
session.

2. The remainder of the period should be used for review purposes,

(a) Where necessary, correct and discuss Practice Exercise A,
'(b) Proceed with the follovfing oral questions and v;ritten exercises
relating to the other topics previously covered. Use these as
time permits. If it seems unlikely that you will have time for
all the written exercises, complete and correct as many as possible.
■ Assign the others as hom.ewprk and correct them, in the next review
•period. Vi/here appropriate, use the enlarged samples to illustrate
correct answers.

Field Supervisors with areas in which Agriculture instruction is given.

Since additional topics must, of necessity, be covered in areas in which Agri-
culture instruction is given, less time is available in the regular training
period for review and questions. It is suggested, therefore, that the following
review questions be used v:hen and v.'here time permits. The work exercises should
be done by the enumerators at home on the first evening and corrected on the
following morning.

Oral Review Questions relating to Basic Definitions and Visitation Record

Question

1. Define a dwelling.

2, On what basis only would two
or three rooms used for living
quarters within a building be
considered a dwelling?

3. Define a household.

4. In general, where should a
person be eniimerated?

5o l^fhat is the first form used
in enumeration?

Ansvfer

1, A dwelling is a structurally separate set of
living premises with private entrance from
outside the building or from a common hallway
or staiirway inside. The entrance must not be
through anyone else's living quarters,

2, If they were stinicturally separate.

3, A household is the group of people who occupy
a dwelling unit (whether or not related to
each other by ties of kinship),

4, In general, a person should be enumerated at
the dwelling in which he sleeps.

5, Form I, the Visitation^ Record.

- 53 -

Quest ion

Answer

6, What dwellings should be
listed on the Visitation
Hecord?

7, What will you do if -
(a) No one is at home at
the time of your
call?

(b) No responsible person
is at hand to give
the information?

(d) The dwelling is "vacant"
or "under construction"?

8. What name will be entered in
Column III?

9. In the majority of cases,
how will you decide who is

. the head of the household?

10, V/hat will you do if you come
upon a small unincorporated
villa^je in your area?

6. Every dwelling, including every "closed" or
"vacant" dwelling and every dwelling "under
construction", except unoccupied summer
cottageso

7„ (a) Fill in Columns III and IV, and either
V or Vl if the information can be
obtained from neighbours, etc^ Make
a note to call back and, if possible,
the appropriate time, in Column VII,

(b) Make an appointment to call back at a
specific time and enter this time in
Column VII,

(d) Enter "vacant" or "under construction",
as the case may be, in Column III and
the address in Column. TV,

8, The name of the head of the household.

9, (a) Husband and wife

(b) Parent and unmarried
child (children) ■

- husband is head

- parent is head

- select one as head

11, In what order will you list
the dwellings?

12, What will you do if you have
more than enough dwellings
to fill your Visitation
Record?

10, Draw a short horizontal line across Colvunn I,
above the number for the first household
enumerated, and another belov; the number of
the last household head. Enter the name of
the village lengthwise in Column I between
the upper and lower lines and on each page
until the enumeration of such a place is
completed,

11, In order of route - one line for each. Do
not skip a line or a page, regardless of
the language of the heading,

12, Cet a second book from the Field Supervisor
and change the dwelling numbers in it to
read "301", "302", etc.

&. Have trainees complete Practice Exercise B,

- 54 -
Practice Exercise B.

Directions -

(a) By ticking the appropriate space, shov/ vfhether the following house-
holds would be enumerated in the upper or lower section of the
Visitation Record,

(b) Decide which persons should be included in Colunui V and which in
Column VI and enter the nimiber under each accordingly,

(i) Mr. and Mrs, Acres, their three children and a maid live in Sunnydale. Mrs.
Acres' mother usually makes her home ^^dth them but at the time of enumeration
is away for a week's visit,

(a) upper (numbered) section V^..... (b) Column V Column VI

I o o o o o

(ii) Tom Jones and Harry Smith are on a trailer trip across Canada. Their homes
,. are in the West, but they are not sure if they will be enimerated there.

(a) upper (numbered) section ...,...« (b) Column V Column VI

lower section .... •>/. ....•-....

\^ } • • • • • • • */f ••esoo*ooeoooo n

(iii) Mrs. Armstrong and her son John have sub-let a furnished apartment in the
city for the simmer, as John has secured a position there. They must move
in September, but at the moment have no other permanent home.

(a) upper (numbered) section v^. o... (b) Column V Column VI

XOW61* SCCblOn eoo«o«ooooo«eooooe oo <rVro • i

' o o o

' (c) .Tt^A^ii'^Q^vrv^^^wivi^

(iv) Helen Gordon is taking care of her aunt, Mrs, Roy, who is ill. Her own

apartment, in a neighbouring city, is closed for the time being. Her aunt
is a widow whose 15-year old son, is at present away, attending boarding
school.

(a) upper (numbered) section .."^^ooo (b) Column V Column VI

.V. /.....

lower section

oooo900ooo*o«o«9eo •ooo«aoo<

\^ C / • • • €*»^"^^^Vit a 4 o-* o •/■»

0 o o o o o o

.- 55 -
Oral Review Questions relating to Population Document Questions 1-19

Question

Answer

1. In what respects does Form 2A
differ from Form 2?

What essential points m.ust
be -remembered concerning
Question 4 on Form 2?

3. In what order should the persons
in the household be enumerated?

4« In what order should the
questions be asked?

5. What must be remembered in
asking Question 6 - Age?

6. For Census purposes, what con-
stitutes a farm?

1. (a) The correct district and sub-district
numbers must be entered in Question la
on Form 2Ao

(b) Questions 2, 3, and 8 relate to the
person's usual residence on Form 2A. not
the residence where found,

(d) Question 4 will not be entered on Form
2A, -but must be answered on Form 2.

•2, (a) Question 4 must alv/ays be the same as
the dwelling or household number in
Column II of the Visitation Record.

' (b) Each person in the household, must have
the same number,

(d) There must be only one entry in each
column.

3, Head of household

V/ife of head of household

Unmarried children - eldest to youngest

Married children and their families

Additional relatives

Lodgers and their families

Servants or other employees and their

families
Other members of the household.

4. In the same order as on the document.

5. (a) Ask for the exact age at last birthday.

(b) Mark both columns.

6. For Census purposes, a farm is a holding
carrying on agricultural operations and is

(i) three acres or more in size
or (ii) from one to three acres in size
with the agricultural production
in 1950 amounting to $250 or more.

- 56

Question

Answer

7. What will be the entry in
Question 10, if a person is
taking a course (a) at night
school; (b) if a child has
attended nursery school?

8o What procedure will you follov/
in Questions 12 to 14, 16 and
17, if no entry is provided
for the response given?

9<. What must you watch in making
a "write in"?

10 o For persons born outside Canada,
how is the country of birth to
be detennined?

11. If a person is uncertain of what
name to give the country of his
birth, due to recent boundary
changes, what entry will you
make?

12. V/hen will you make an entry in
Question 15, Period of
Immigration?

13 o What must you do if a person
states he is a citizen of
Canada but was born outside of
Canada?

14 o How will you word Question 17,
relating to origin?

15. V/hat will you do if the res-
pondent does not understand
this question?

16. If the respondent replies that
his paternal ancestor spoke
English upon first coming to
this continent what procedure

.will you follow?

17 « When will you have an entry
in Question 19?

7. (a) No.
(b) No.

80 "Write in" the response in the spaCe pro-
vided.

9. (a) That the entries are clear and legible,
(b) That the "write ins" do not run over the
allotted space.

10. According to present international
boundaries.

11. The name of the province or state or
nearest city in which he was born.

12. Only if the person is born outside Canada.

13. Check Question 15 to see if he has acquired
the necessary five years residence.

14. "What language did you or your paternal
ancestor speak on first comi.ng to this
country?"

15. Ask: "Is your origin in the male line
English, Scottish, Ukrainian, Jewish,
Norwegian, North American Indian, Negro, etc?"

16. Inquire further as to whether that person
was of English, Irish, Scottish or Welsh
descent.

17. Only if the person is a veteran of either
or both V/orld V/ars.

Have trainees complete Practice Exercise C.

- 57 -
Practice Exercise C.

1. Mrs, Esther G. Fpx tells you there are seven persons in the household. These
include her husband, James R. Pox; his vddowed sister, Mrs, Rachel S, Green and
Mrs, Green's infant son, George L.j hel* two daughters Alice K., who is 1? and
Florence M,, who is 21; and Mr, Alex Bo Sheppard, a lodger.

List, below, the members of the household as you would enter them on a document
and in their proper order. Biter also the correct relationship to the household
head.

Household Members Relationship to household head

1. . . , v'T ;*r?V.<^l'Vrr^LXj*K . .^S^ . sJ^-i.-rn^-t^i^

2 ^'f^.\.&f^y^..'^: 00 o,s^.\-V^.,,

'3. ...uf!P!^.'.,r.<iT^C*'?i^..J??.'.., iDa^toHAMy .

2. An enumerator found the following persons living in a household: -

Arthur A, Stoneman, the head of the household

Gladys N, Martin, " his elder daughter

Harry L. Mart in ,^ Gladys' husband

Isabel C. Martin,. the Martin's infant daughter

Mary J, Stoneman, the yo\inger daughter of Mr, Stoneman

Hattie B, Smith, Mr, Stoneman' s housekeeper.

List, below, the members of the household as directed in question 1.

Household Members Relationship to household head

2 ?fj^^,^i^<?Vt^,\^i.?l^.1^i-^,y^- ^?:i*i9^^tf^,

3 >n.<?^ry.^.,'i^n<'^..?y ¥ff:^.-..^.y,:,r^9i^..

4. ,,.,,^.^»t^;...':4:^fr^..^- ,'^,?:V^^^v^rvr

- 58 -
3. Frank H. Miirphy and Gordon R. White share an apartment as partners.

List, below, the members of the household as directed in question 1.

Household Manbers Relationship to household head
tl^AAJuoAu^. KfA.ayt<J^ Jj. \»,^h^,

■UJ-AMJ, J^oUmJ i^.

4« Mark the correct age for each of the following persons: -

You visit Mrs. A. Gordon on June 8. She states she was bom Christmas Day, 1900.
Her husband will be 54 on June 10. Her married daughter, who lives in the same
dwelling, was bom on January 2, 1925. She is not sure of her son-in-law's
actual birth date, but knows his birthday was in February and that he is about
one year older than her daughter. Her little grandson is only two months old.

-Mrs; Gordon
o o

-4

2
3

4
5

7
8
9

Mr. Gordon
o o

2
3
4

Daughter
o b

Son-in-law
o o

Grandson
o o

_8_
9

2
3
4

7
8
9

_8_
9

2
3

4
5

7
8
9

2
3

4
5
6

2
3

4
5

7
8
9

2
3
4
5
6-

_8_
9

2
3
4

7
8
9

J_
2
3
4
5
6

5. Mark the correct marital status for each of the following :-

(a) Mrs. Allan, a widow, lives with her daughter,
Ethel, irtio has been legally separated frcan
her husband for the last 15 years.

Mrs. Allan
vmi

MMHED
'(iicigois
iipumo

IDT lOT

oimc»i

Ethel

MRMED

(UltLaDIt
UMIITIB

■UT Mf
OIVOICIO)

WUWWtD

WIN»ED

OIVOICED

(b) Mrs. Hill is married, but her husband
woiics in a neighbouring city and
comes home only on week-ends. Her
daughter, Brana, plans to be married
in July. Hilda, her housekeeper,
has been divorced for 4 years.

Mrs. Hill Mr. Hill Emma Hilda

lume

(IRCLUOfS
UMUTn

■DT 101 -

uvncEoi

DIWMtO

simu

MUIED

(IKLUOtS
ItMMTED
•01 MT
DIVOKtDI

WIOOWtD

SIKEIE

HUmiEO

(IICLODII
lEPIItUO

■01 ROT
DIVORCIO)

WMWEO
' >

DIVOBCEO

SWGU

MRRIEO

(IRCIODII

UNRjtns

lOT ROT
OIVOItEOt

- 59 -
5. Mark the correct marital status for each of the follovdng:- Con.

but has not been living vdth her single

husband for the past 3 years. She '^^^^

has recently started divorce proceed- S"
ings.

■UT 101
OlVOICtO)

WIDOWED

DIVORCED

6. Mark the oval ( ^=i ) opposite the entry which you would mark in Question 9, for
each of the following:-

(a) Mrs. Jones staites that her da\ighter, Julie, has attended kindergarten for 2
years and grade school for 8 years. However, she is now just completing
Grade Vll, having spent 2 years in Grade VI,

5-7 years CZZ) J 8 years f=i j 9 years c — ^ j 10 years c ) .

(b) Sidney Carpenter attended Cornwall, Ontario, elementary and secondary schools
for 12 years, obtaining his Senior Matriculation. He has been working for 5
years in a textile mill, but by extra mural study during that time, he has
completed his first two years in Arts at Queen's University.

12 years < > j 13 - 16 years ^==> j 17 f years i )

7. Mr. and Mrs. Lafrance have an infant daughter Annette, who has not yet learned
to talk. Mr. Lafrance speaks both English and French fluently. Mrs. Lafrance
spesdcs only French,

(a) Which of the following wovild be the correct answer for Annette in Question 11 ?

Speaks both English and French CZD j Speaks French but not English <=> j

Unable to speak English or French ( 1 .

(b) Which of the following would be the correct entry for Annette in Question 12 ?
English CZD J French g=» ; Write in "Unable to talk yet" (— ) .

8. Mr. Svenson was bom in Sweden and Swedish was the only language he had ever heard
until he came to this country at the age of three. He has since forgotten his
native tongue and speaks English, which he learned soon after his arrival and
German, which he picked up later,

Mark the oval ( F==) ) opposite the entry which you would mark in Question 12 for
Mr, Svenson,

Swedish ciZD j English f==» J German c 1 ; English and German i )

- 60 -

9. Mrs. Gorrie states that she is a Pi^jtestsiht. She has previously given her hus-
band's religion as Pentecostal. Which of the follovdng would you do in comple-
ting Question 13 for Mrs. Gorrie ?

(a) Mark the oval "Pentecostal" c — ~) .

(b) Write in "Protestant" in the space provided CZD .

10. Mr. Malinski states that he belongs to the Catholic Church. Which of the fol-
lowing would you do in completing Question 13 on his docimient ?

(a) Mark Roman Catholic . t 1 .

(b) Mark Ukrainian (Greek) Catholic t ) .

11. Mr. Saunders is an Englishman iirtio took up residence in Canada in 1929. He has
been home to England twice since his first arrival, once in 1935 on a 6 weeks
visit and again in 1947 when he spent a year there on business for his firm.

(a) Which of the following would you mark as the correct entry for Question 15 ?

1921 - 30 ^ J 1931 - 40 CZD ; 1947 - 4B CZD,

(b) Which of the following would be the correct entry in Question 16 ? .

Canada <=^ or Other British ( ) •

12. Ernest Lane was bom in Canada in 1919. In 1923 he moved with his parents to
the United States vrtiere he resided for 10 years. His parents did not take out
citizenship papers, however, and returned to Canada in 1933.

(a) What procedure would you follow in marking Question 15 for Mr. Leuie ?

(i) Mark the oval 1911 - 20 CZZ>.

(ii) Mark the oval 1931 - 40 CZD.

(iii) Mark no oval at all

(b) Which of the following entries would you mark for him in Question l6 ?

Canada <=> ;, Other British i — ) ; Onited States cZD •

13. Mr. Van Doom was bom in the Netherlands. He came to Canada in 1947} spent ij^
years here, after which he went to the United States for 6 months. On his re-
turn to Canada he filed papers declaring his intention of becoming a Canadian
citizen.

(a) Which of the following wovdd you mark as the coirrect entry in Question 15 ?

1947 - 48 ^ ; 1949 - 50 <=Z3 .

(b) Which of the following would be the corjrect entry in Question 16 ?

Canada ( ) ; United States ( 1 j Netherlands p=^ ,

14.

- 61 -

Mr. and Mrs. Johannsen and their small son Eric are living vdth Mr. Johannsen's
mother and step-father, Mr. and Mrs. Henderson. Anna Haas, who has recently-
arrived in this country, assists with the domestic work of the house. Mr. Johan-
nsen's own father came to Canada from Iceland and spoke Icelandic, while all
Mrs. Johannsen's ancestors spoke French. Mr. Johannsen's mother's people all
came direct from Norway and spoke Norwegian. Mr. Henderson's paternal ancestor,
however, spoke English on first coming to this continent, although he came from
the North of Ireland, and was of Irish descent. Anna had a smattering of
English when she came to Canada, but her native tongue is German.

Mark the correct origin for each member of this household ;-

Mr. Johannsen

17.

ORICrN

■S^

c?b

I 2

eitcai

VMVk

I 4

i c-

MTIW I _

imm mom ] J,

I _
uam wMOTi ! 8.

ir mi USTED, NIITE BELOwr"

Mrs. Johannsen

'17.

ORICrN

nE«tK / Q,
iininiml 1

REIIN

t WW

cncai
no»M

I 2

aiissiu ' 4--,'

twtomi

nunui I e^~^

««II»E I _

IF mr LISTED, WaiTE BEIOW.

Eric

ORIGIN

nttm fKiicM

UEMI

I 2

I
" ' I C>^

arna nmui

■ELSN

lug!

IWEOItll

MTIVE

IF mr IISTEO, WMTE ttiow.

JljuAam.dicJ

Mrs. Hendeirson

17.

ORIGIN

FUEIICH

!C.

I ^— '"''^

VKm nunui I 2^

C=) ^ c^

WEISN I _

cnwi I

nam »utii«ii '. 4,

FimmH tWEDUM I _5^ ^

»E«iiw miatu I 6^^
umi I '_

JEWISH ■Mill I 8,,

IHLUII

§.

IF HOT IISTEO, WniE BELOW.'

Mr. Henderson

17.

ORIGIN

E»niS» FIEMH /' Q,

uTimiiw! 1,

vtxmsk ynwu

WELSH

t mm

I 2

CZECH t

SLOVM

BEiiiM nMitm i

6^.

I f ;,,-
H«mi I _

IHOUH ' 7.-

I ■

JEWISH BHIUBH

IF HOT LISTED, WHITE BELOW."

§-,

Anna

17.

ORIGIN

$cinin

WCLSN

\^ &>\^

CZECH!
SLOm

«»SSI«H I 4.--,

i'C=^
I 2

FIHHISH

tEHWH

IT«LI<H
( )

JEWISH

MTin

IHOUH

I I ,-■-'
I ■— -

IF HOT LISTEO, WHITE Be'lOW.'

15.

- 62 -

Mr. Storms, vrtio is 85, is a veteran of the Boer War. He received a leg injiory
at that time vrtiich prevented him from any further seirwice.

(a) Which oval would you mark in Question 18 ?

None

Both Wars ( > j World War II

World War I ( )

(b) Which oval would you mark in Question 19 ?

Canadian ( 1 j Other ( — ) j Canadian and Other

16, Mary Guest was a C.W.A.C. in World War II while her husband, ^ohn, served with
the Merchant Marine.

(a) Which oval would you mark in Question 18 (i) for Mary ?
None c — ) J Both Wars ( ) j World War II ^^

World War I CU

(ii) for John ?

None

Both Wars

J World War II ( ) j World War I c ) .

(b) Which oval would jrou mark in Question 19 (i) for Mary ?

Canadian <=^ ; Other c ) ; Canadian and Other ( > •

(ii) for John ?

Canadian ( ) ; Other ( ) ; Canadian and Other (ZZD •

- 63 -
VII. Fills? PRACTICE NARRATIVE

(Visitation Record and Population Questions 1-19)

The Practice Narratives are designed to give trainees practical experience in •
enumerating. They vdll simulate, as nearly as possible, typical interviews, thus
allovdng the trsiinees to ask (or hear asked) the questions on the document, to hear
typical responses, and to gain experience in marking the documents.

You will ask one trainee to act as "Enumerator", reading the parts so marked.

Be careful to choose a trainee who reads well and will suitably portray the part of
a good enumerator.

You will take the part of "Respondent".

The "Enumerator" will record your replies on the first blank forms in his Specimen
Booklet ,

Instruct the remainder of the group to record your replies also, as if they, them-
selves, were conducting the interview.

When the Narrative has been completed, go over each question, having each trainee,
in turn, supply an answer. If the answer agrees with that given on your "Key", enter
it on the enlarged sample of Form 2 or, in the case of the Visitation Record, oh the
blackboard. If it differs, explain why it is not correct, and make the correct entry
on the enlarged sample. Satisfy yourself that the group understands the reason for
the correction.

The Visitation Record

Instruct the trainees to fill in the heading on the Visitation Record, as if for
their o\-m areas.

Pausing after each item of information so that trainees may have time to enter it,
state that -

(a) The first call in this area v/as made at the home of Harry Larson.

(b) His address Airas 43 Fifth Avenue.

(c) The only person at home at the time was an elderly grandmother.
She asked the enumerator to return that evening at 7 p.m. to
enumerate the household.

(d) She stated there were 5 persons living in that dwelling.

(e) The next call was at the home next door. The enumerator inttKJduced
himself and was invited in to complete the enumeration.

k Proceed with the Narrative.

Enumerator: First of all I want to be sure I have yo\ir correct address. This
is 45 Fifth Avenue, is it not?

Respondent: Yes, it is.

Enumerator: How many persons live here?

- 64 -

Respondent: There are just 3 of us - my husband and myself and our little girl.

Enumerator: You have no lodgers or guests staying \^dth you then?

Respondent: . Oh, my Mother is here on a visit, but she doesn't live here.

Enumerator: I see. Does she have a home of her own somewhere else?

Respondent: Oh yes. She keeps house for my brother who works in Marysville.
He is away travelling this summer, though, so she is spending the
next two months ;\dth me.

Enumerator: Then she will hardly be enumerated at her own home. To make sure
she won't be missed I think I should enumerate her here.

Respondent: I think that would be vdse.

Enumerator: There are no other families here then?

Respondent: Oh no, there wouldn't be room for any others.

Enumerator: Nov;, what is your husband's full name?

Respondent: John Frederick Wilson.

Enumerator: Thank you. Now I must fill out a separate card for each member of
your household. I vail start vdth Mr. Wilson. You have already
given me some of the information vfhich I vd.ll transfer to his card.

± At this point pause to allow time for trainees to complete the
first 5 questions on Form 2 for which they have already gained
the necessary information.

The Population Documents

Enumerator: Now, will you tell me please, how old was Mr. Wilson on his last
birthday?

Respondent: He was 41 on the 24th of May.

t Pause in order that trainees may complete Questions 7 and % explai-n--
ing that it is unnecessary to ask these questions since Question 7 has
already been answered and Question 8 is obvious as the Wilson home is
situated in the centre of an urban area.

Enumerator: How many years of schooling has Mr. Wilson had?

Respondent: About 6 or 7. He had to stop v/hen he was just a boy and go to work.

Enumerator: Did he have more than 7 years?

Respondent: No, I don't think so.

Enumerator:
Respondent:
Enumerator :
Respondent:
Enumerator:
Respondent :

Envimerator:

Respondent:
Enumerator:
Respondent :
Enumerator:
Respondent:
Enumerator :
Respondent :
Enumerator :
Respondent:
Envmierator:
Respondent :
Enumerator :
Respondent:

Enumerator:

- 65 -
Has he attended school at any time since September, 1950?
Oh, no.

Does Mr. Wilson speak English?
Yes.
Does he speak French?

Well he doesn't speak French very well, but he says he can make
himself understood at work if he- needs to.

What vras the language he first spoke in childhood and still un-
derstands?

Oh, he grew up speaking English.

What is your husband's religion?

He belongs to the Church of England.

Now I have to know in what province or country Mr. Wilson was born.

John was born in England.

When did he come to this country?

He came to Canada just after the first war, I think about 1919 or 1920.

To what country does your husband owe allegiance, Mrs. Wilson?

V/hy to Canada, of course.

What language did Mr. Wilson speak on first coming to this continent?

English. As I said, he grew up speaking it.

Is he of English, Scottish, Irish or Welsh descent?

Well, his father was English, but I've heard him say his mother was
Welsh,

Did your husband serve in the armed forces of any country during
World Wars I or II? ■ .- ■ • :

Respondent: John was with the R.C.A.F. in the last war. He v/asn't in the first one.

* At this point the Field Supervisor should explain to the trainees
that, normally, you would complete all the questions on the document
for Mr. Wilson before proceeding to enumerate another member of the"
household. Hovrever, since instructions for Questions 20-29 have not
yet been covered, they will be omitted for the time being and you
will continue with the enumeration of the other members of the'

■ household.

- 66 -

Enumerator: Now, Mrs. Wilson, I'd like some information about yourself. What
is your full name, please?

Respondent: Marjorie Ann Wilson,

Enumerator: I already know your address so I'll enter it here.

* Pause, once more, explaining that enumerators at this point may
complete Questions 2, 3, U and 5, for which they have already
gained information.

Enumerator: How old were you on your last birthday, Mrs. Wilson?

Respondent: I was 38,

Enumerator: How many years of schooling have you had?

Respondent: Let me see now - I finished High School, that's 12 years, - and I
went to Normal School for one year. I also took a business course
at night school for one year - do you count that?

Enumerator: Did you complete the course?

Respondent: Yes, I have my diploma.

Enumerator: Then that will be counted. Night school counts for the number of
years of formal schooling to which it's equivalent. That vrould be
14 years of schooling, wouldn't it?

Respondent: Yes - that's right.

Enumerator: Did you attend school at any time since September, 1950 Mrs. Wilson?

Respondent: Oh no, - I'm much too busy for that now.

Enumerator: You speak English, of course. Do you speak French too?

Respondent: No, I only speak English.

Enumerator: Is English the first language you spoke in childhood and still
understand?

Respondent: Yes - I've never spoken anything but English.

Enumerator: What is your religion, Mr^. Wilson?

Respondent: We all go to the Church of England.

Enumerator: In what province or country were you born Mrs. V/ilson?

Respondent: Oh, I was born in British Columbia but we moved to Ontario when
I was quite young.

Enumerator: To what country do you owe allegiance?

Respondent: I'm a Canadian.

- 67 -

Enumerator: Yes I thought so since you were born in Canada. We have to ask
the question though because there is alivays a possibility that a
person has renounced or lost his or her citizenship.

Enumerator: What language did your paternal ancestor speak on first coining to
this continent?

Respondent: Do you mean my grandfather? He was the first of our family to
come to this country and I know he spoke English. I've often
heard my father speak of his broad Scottish accent.

Enumerator: Was he your father's father?

Respondent: Yes, my mother's father was born in Italy.

Enumerator: Would you say your father's father was of English, Irish, Scottish
or Welsh descent?

Respondent: Oh, he was Scottish. His name was McLeod.

Enumerator: Did you serve in the armed forces of any country during World Wars
I or II?

Respondent: Well, I was in the St. John Ambulance Corps in World War II,

Enumerator: Thank you Mrs. Wilson. I'll enumerate your daughter next. I have
most of the information now but there are a few questions I must
ask.

Enumerator: What is your daughter's name Mrs. Wilson?

Respondent: Mary Jane,

* Pause to allow time to complete the first 5 questions,

Eniimerator: How old was your daughter on her last birthday?

Respondent: She'll be six to-morrow.

Enumerator: How many years of schooling has your daughter had Mrs. Wilson?

Respondent: Mary has just finished Kindergarten and will be going into Grade I
in the Fall.

Enumerator: Can your daughter speak English?

Respondent: Yes.

Enumerator: French?

Respondent: No, she has never spoken anything but English,

Enumerator :

Respondent :
Enijmerator :
Respondisnt :

Enumerator:

Entiraerator :.
Respondent:
Enumerator :
Respondent :
Enumerator :

- 68 »

Tha,t means English was the first . language she spoke and still under-
stands, and you have already told me you all go to the Church of
England. . . .'

That's right.

In vrtiat province or country was your daughter bom Mrs. Wilson?

Mary Jane was born in. Ontario..

♦ The enumerator will not' need to question concerning Mary Jane's
citizenship and origin, but an entry must be made for each. .

Well the only person left is your mother Mrs. Wilson. - I'll enumerate
her on a special form to make sure she is counted with the population
of her ovm home.

* Pause to allow time for enumerator to complete Question la. Stress
the importance, of this entry.

What is your, mother's name. Mrs. Wilson?

Mary Catherine McLeod.

And what is her address in Marysville?

.32.4'. Princess, St. , '

I believe you mentioned that your mother kept house for your brother -
is he single?

Respondent: Yes, I doubt if he'll ever marry.

.♦Explain to the trainees that this question is necessary in this
case, to properly answer Question 3. Also mention that no entry
should be made in Question 4.

Enumerator:
Respondent:
Enumera^tor:,
Respondent :
Enumerator :
Respondent :
Enumerator:
Respondent:

Hov/ old was your mother on her last birthday?

Mother is 68.

Is your mother married, vddowed or divorced Mrs. Wilson?

Oh, mother is widowed. Dad's been dead for nearly ten years.

Does your mother live on a farm in Marysville?

No - Princess Street is in the heart of town.

How many years of schooling has your mother had Mrs. Wilson?

I think mother went to school about the same number of years as
my husband, I'd say six years. Certainly, no more than seven.

- 69 -

Enumerator: Has she attended school any time since September 1950?

Respondent: Oh no.

Enuunerator: Can your' mother speak English?

Respondent: Yes.

Enumerator: Can she speak French?

Respondent: No, She did when she v;as a child, but she has forgotten it.

Enumerator: V/hat was the language she first spoke in childhood and still
understa.nds?

Respondent: English,

Enumerator: liVhat is your Mother's religion, Mrs. Wilson?

Respondent: Mother goes to the United Church.

Enumerator: In what province or country was she born?

Respondent: Mother was born in Quebec,

Enumerator: To what country does your mother owe allegiance?

Respondent: Canada,

Enumerator: What language did her paternal ancestor speak on first coming
to this continent?

Respondent: Italian - Grandfather Bartolini - that's my mother's maiden
name - came to this country from Italy,

Enumerator: Did your mother serve in the armed forces of any country in
World Wars I or II?

Respondent: Oh, no.

Enumerator: Thank you very much, Mrs, Wilson. That is all I need to know
for the present.

=- 70 =
Key to 1st Practice Narrative

Visitation Record
District NOo- - -

-Sub-district NOo- - - - - ~ -Enumerator-

Col. 1

II •

III

IV V

'VI

VII

■

001

002

LARSOW, HARRY
VJILSON, JOHN F„

43 Fifth Avenue
k5 Fifth Avenue

Call .Back
- 7 p.nio

Population Documents

Ques-
tion

Form 2

. Form 2

.Form 2

Ques-
tion

Form 2A

WILSON
JOHN FREDERICK

VJILSON
MARJORIE ANN

VJILSON
MARY JANE

McLEOD
MARY CATHERINE

la, ..

Dist. -S,D„

45 Fifth Aveo

45 Fifth Ave,

2„

324 Princess St,
Marysville

Head ,

, vafe. .

Daughter

•. 3o
3a o

Head

No entry

0 » 0 .. 2

0 .= 0 =, 2

0-0-2

No entry

-Hale ■'

Female

4 " 1 . .

3^-8

0 ^ 5

6-8

Married

Single

Widowed

. 8o

5^1 yrso

13 - 16 yrSo

None

5-7 yrso

10,

10.

11 o

Speaks both English
and French

Speaks English
but not French

11 0

Speaks English
but not French

12.

English

12 0

English

13 0

Anglican

13-

United Church

14.

"England and Wales

B„C„-

Onto

14 0

T'Queo ^ _.

15o

1911 - 20

No entry

15o

No entry

16 0

Canada

16 0

Canada

17 »

English

Scottish

English

17 0

. Italian

18 0

Vfor].d V/ar II

None

No entry

18 0

None

19 0

Canadian

No entry

19 «

No entry

- 71 -
VIII. POPULATION DOOUMENTS

(Labour Force Questions 20-29)

Points to cover

1 . General remarks

Procedure

A You should have on hand the enlarged copies
of the reverse side of Form 2.

k Trainees should have their copies of the
Enumeration Manual and the Specimen Booklet „

Explain that (i) Questions 20-29 are a very important
part of the Census,
(ii) detailed instructions concerning them
are to be found in the Enumeration
Manual p Pages 45 to 57,, These must be
studied carefully at home, as well as
followed closely during the instruction
period.

A Have trainees open their Enumeration Manual
at Page 45 „

(iii) these questions deal only with persons
14 years of age and over and should not
be asked of anyone under that age„

A Have trainees examine a Specimen Form 2,
noting the instruction "Ask these
questions for persons I4. years of age
and overo"

(iv) as was done in the first half of the
document, questions must be asked

(a) in the same order, and

(b) as worded on the document,

(v) Questions 20-25 and 27 "all refer to the'
week preceding June 2, 1951. not to the
week preceding the date of enumeration,,

(vi) Questions 26 „ 28 and 29 refer to the
12 months prior to June, 1951 »

Remind trainees that questions 20-° 29 will be entered
in exactly the same manner on Form 2A
as on Form 2o ~~

- 72 =

Points to cover

Activity during
week ending '
June 2, 1951
(Questions 20-22)

(a) ilrrows, brackets
and asterisks
are guides

(b) Question 20

IVHAT DID THIS
, PERSON. DO
•MOSTLY DURING
THE. WEEK .

' ENDING

JUNE 2, 1951?

Procedure

>■>

Explain that these three questions classify all persons
14 years of age aind over according to what
they did (their "activity") and the hours
they worked during the week ending June 2,
1951 o

Point out that each enumerator must follow carefully the
arrows, brackets and asterisks. They are
guides to simplify his work. Thus if he
marks -

(i) A W (Worked) in Question 20, he will not ask
Question 21, but will skip to Question 22,

(ii) /iny one of the following in Question 20 j

k J (Vifith a job but not at work)

A L (Looked for work)

H (Keeping house)

3 (Going to school)

R (Retired or vol, idle)

0th (Other)

he must have an entry in Question 21,,

(iii) A. Yes in Question 21, he must have an entry in
Question 22 <,

(iv) U (Perm» unable to work) in Question 20, no
further entries are needed on the document,

(v) No in Question 21 and an entry in H, S, R, or
Ofch in Question 20, no further entries are
needed on the document 0

k Have a trainee read Question 20 from the
document o

Emphasize again that this is the wording which must be
used, ~~ ~"

Explain that the enumerator must mark the oval which

best describes the person's chief activity
during the week ending June 2, 1951^

One (and only one) oval must be marked in Question 20,
'If a person reports two or more activities, he must be
asked at which one he spent the most time.

In order to understand the terms describing the chief
activity, enumerators must study thoroughly the
Enumeration Manual, ~~ ~~

-,73 -

Points to cover

Procedure

Worked..- AW,

k. Have trainees turn to Page 45 iii the

,, Enumeration: Manual and follow as you read^,.

A. Worked: This includes persons who worked for
pay or, profit,- or worked without pay in an enter-
prise owned, and operated by a related member of
the household.

Examples of whom to classify as "worked"

(1) worked for wages, salary, at piece rates, on
commission, for tips, for board or lodging,
or for piayment in kind in private or govern-
ment- employment,

(2) worked for profit or fees in his own business
or profession, or on his own farm. This in-

" eludes a person who worked for profit or fees
in her own home, such as a woman who took in
laundry or sewing,

(3) worked without money wages or salary, at tasks
. (other than home housework) which contributed

to the operation of a farm or business owned
and operated by some member of the household,
related by blood or marriage, such as a
grocer's wife who worked in the store without
wage So

(4'') worked in connection with renting rooms or
providing meals for boarders,

(■5) spent time in the operation of a business or
profession even though no sales were made
nor professional services rendered, such as a
lawyer. spending his time in his office wait-
ing for clients,

(6) spent time at a military camp as a member of
.,a reserve unit.

Explain' that- Such persons as are listed in the next
section will not be included in the
class worked, ;

) ;

ivU'

A'Read as-'lfbllows from Page 46 'of "•t'he
Ehumerat'f on Manual, ■,-••.', - ■

■1,-

- 74 -

Points to cover

Procedure

With a Job
but not - A J
at Work

Do not include the following in "Worked" -

(1) worked without money pay for a related member
of the household at tasks which did not con-
tribute to the operation of a farm or busi-
ness, e.g., home housework, cutting the
lawn, painting the garage, weeding the
kitchen garden,

(2) worked without money pay for a related member
of the household who does not own and operate
a farm or business, but who is himself an
employee,

(3) worked without pay either in cash or kind for
a member of the household to whom he is not
related by blood or marriage,

(4) worked without pay either in cash or kind for
a related person who is not a member of the
seune household.

(5) worked without pay either in cash or kind as
a volunteer worker for organizations of all
types (Red Cross, charitable organizations,
church groups, etc.).

k Ask: How would you mark Mary Smith, who helps her
husband all day in the store?

Ans, "Worked" (See Section 3 above, under
"Worked" ) ^

&. Ask: Mrs. Johnston works without pay for the Red
Cross. Would you mark her as "Worked"?
Why?

Ans. No, For Census purposes, voluntary work of
this nature is not included in the category
"Worked".

(See Section 5 above, xinder 'Do not include,
the following in "Worked".')

A Have trainees follow this section in the
Enumeration Manual (Page 46) as you briefly
sumznarize it.

A Use the enlarged Form 2 to point out how each
of the various activities are classified.

- 75 -

Points to cover

Procedure

Looked for Work - A L

Explain that the oval A. J will be marked for persons who
had a job or business, but were absent from
it during the week ending June 2, 1951, for
any of the following reasons :-

(i) Illness

(ii) Bad weather - e.g., fishing, fruit picking

(iii) Vacation - e.g., school-teaching (Includes
vacations with or without pay,
provided the job is being held
for the person ) .

(iv) Labour dispute - e.g., strikes, lockouts

(v) Temporary layoff - i.e., persons laid off with

definite instructions to re-
turn to work in 30 days,

(vi) Had a new job to go to - i.e., a definite job to

report to within 30 days after
June 2nd, 1951,

(vii) Any other reason - e.g., death in family, fire,

quarantine, etc.

JL Have trainees follow this section in the
Enumeration Manual (Page U7) while you
summarize the following points.

Looked for work - includes persons who "actively looked
for work during the week ending June
2nd, 1951".

Explain that "actively looked for work" includes persons
who made efforts to obtain a job, or estab-
lish a business or professional practice.

Examples - registration in a government employment
office

- meeting with prospective employers

- placing or answering advertisements

- writing letters of application

- working without pay in order to gain
experience

Point out that this category also includes persons who
would have actively looked for work except for -

(i) temporary illness of the person concerned

-76 -

Points td cover

Procedure

- - ^rj . . . .

Keepiiig House - H

(ii) indefinite lay-off - i.e., with no definite
instruction to return to work within 30
days, but expecting to be recalled at some
time.
Note - This does not include persons who work only
off and on of their own volition,
(iii) belief that no work was available in their
community, suitable to their particular
skill o

Note - This does not include persons not actively
looking for work because they are too old,
too young, or handicapped in any way.

it Have trainees follow while you read this

section from the Enumeration Manual (Page U7) »

Gk>ing to school - S

irx-'.di ': '■ i.co i-'

Keeping House - Mark this oval for persons who -

(1) were occupied with their own housework

(2) were helping another member of the house-
hold with the housevjork, such as an un-
married daughter assisting her mother

(3) would have been keeping house except
for temporary illness

(4) were engaged in the. management of their
. own homes or children, even though the

actual housework was done by servants
under their directions

Point out that this category does not include "paid"
housekeepers or other "paid" domestic
helpers o These should be marked as
, • "Worked",,'

A Have trainees follow Page 48, in the
. Enumeration Manual vjhile you summarize
the section, thus -

Going to school includes, persons who during the week
ending June 2, 1951 » attended -

(i)' any public or private school
(ii)' any university
,( iii) any trade or vocational school in which
students do not receive compensation' in
money" or kind, ■ ;

- 77

Points to cover

Procedure

Retired or - R
Voluntarily
Idle

Note - Include as "going to school" -

(i) vetereins receiving maintenance grants while
attending school or university
(ii) persons who would have been at school, ex=
cept for temporary illness or short vaca-
tion during the school term

Do not include as "going to school" =

('i) nurses- in-training - they should be marked
"Worked"
(ii) students on extended vacation - they should
be marked in the oval which describes their
chief activity,,

Summarize the points in the Enumeration Manual, Page 48,
as follows:"

Include as Retired or. Voluntarily Idle =

(i) Persons retired on pension
(ii) Persons with independent incomes
(iii) Young persons, not working (and who are
hot looking for work)
(iv) Persons in the "off-season" for a

continuous period of 30 days or moreo

Do not include as Retired or Voluntarily Idle -

Other = 0th

School teachers or proifessors on sumtaef vacation - if
they have made definite arrangements to resume teach-
ing in the Fall„ These should be marked "With a job
but not at work'^^

Explain that these are persons whose chief activity
does not fit into any of the previously
mentioned classifications. Most of
these have been mentioned as being ex-
cluded from the class "Worked^ o

Cite such examples as f

(i) volunteer workers for such 'organizations
as Red Gross, church, etc«
(ii) persons working without pay

(a) ;fof a household member who does
not operate his own farm or
business

(b) for a relative or other person not
a member of the household

(iii) prisoners and patients enumerated in
institutional households o

- 78

Points to cover

Procedure

Perjnaaently

Unable to

work

- U

Explain that this group includes persons who are perman-
ently unable to work because of -

( i) old age
(ii) physical or mental disability
(iii) chronic illness

Note - (i) The person interviewed, not the enum-
erator, must decide whether or not a
disability or illness is of a perman-
ent or temporary nature,

(ii) A person who is unable to do the work
himself, but who owns a business and
hires others to do the work, should
be classified as "Worked",

If time permits ask .the following questions,

± Ask: Which oval would you mark in Question 20 for
Allan Thompson, a recent graduate from
university. He did not work during the week
.ending June 2, 1951 » but had agreed to start
work on June 15th for the Ontario Tool Co?

Ans, Mark "With a job but not at work". He had a
job to go to within 30 days of June 2,

± Ask: What oval would you mark for Monica James

who kept house for her husband sdl week, but
also worked three nights as a waitress in a
local restaurant?

Ans, Mark "Keeping house" as this was her major
activity-,

A Ask: Jack Johnson and Greorge Brown were laid off
by the Supreme Tool and Die Corporation on
May 25, 1951, Johnson was told to report
back on June 15th, but Brown was given no
definite instructiono He expected to be
called back at some time however. What
oval will you mark (a) for Johnson? (b)
for Brown?

Ans. (a) Mark "With a job but not at work"
since he was to return within 30 days,

(b) Mark "Looked for work", since although
he did not actively look for work, he ex-
pected to be called back to his old job.

- 79 =.

Points to cover

Procedure

(d) (Question 21

IN ADDITION

DID THIS PERSCK

DO ANY WORK

FOR PAY OR

PROFIT?

± Ask: What oval will you mark for Jack Smith? He
is a farmer who directs the operation of the
farm, but does not do much active work on it
himself o

Ans» "Worked", since he still directs the manage-
ment of his farmo

± Ask! Sister Mary Frances is a nurse in Notre Dame
Hospital, a home for incurableSo What oval
will you mark -

(a) for Sister Mary Freuices?

(b) for the patients?

Anse (a) Mark "Worked" - she is a part of an
institutional household, but not a
patients
(b) Mark "Othel*" - since patients in
institutional households are to be
thus marked o

Emphasize again that Question 21 is to be asked only if

an oval other than "Worked" or
"Permanently Unable to Work" is
marked in (Question 20 „

Trainees must remember that this question, too, applies

to the week ending June 2, I95I9

A Have trainees examine the reverse side
of Form 2, noting the ovals in (Question
20 enclosed by the bracket with the
arrow pointing to Ciuestion 21,,

A Point this out on the enlarged Form 2p

Note - (i) If one of the ovals thus bracketed is
marked, there must be an entry in
(Question 21 - either "± Yes" or "No"»

(ii) Female unpaid family workers on farms, who
are marked "Keeping House" in Question 20,
will be marked "A Yes" in (Question 21 ^
only if they devoted one hour or more dur=
ing the week ending June 2, 1951 to farm
work other than home housework and house°
hold chores,

± Cite examples of whom to mark "4 Yes" in
Question 21, as found in the. Enumeration
Manual , Page 49 ,

- 80 -

— .

Points to cover

Procedure

(i) a hou'sewil'e - marked Keeping House

helping her

in Question 20

husband in
his business

(ii) a student - marked Going to School -

working

in iqluestion 20

after school
hours or on
Saturday

(iii) a retired - marked Retired or Vol. -

working part

person Idle in Question 20

time

(iv) a person - marked Looked for Work -

who did some

or With a Job but Not

work

at V/ork in Question 20

(e) Ciuestion 22

A Have trainees examine this question on

the reverse side of Form 2, noting that

HOW IIANY HOURS

it, too, applies to the week end

ing

DID THIS PERSON

June 2, 1951.

WORK?

By questioning the trainees, establish which

I persons will

have an entry in Question 22,

A Ask: From your observation of the document,

what persons will require an entry in

Question 22? ■

Ans, (i) Persons marked "Viorked - i W" in

Question 20.

(ii) Persons marked "A Yes" in

Question

21,

A Verify these answers by pointing out

the arrow

guides on the enlarged Form 2^

Emphasize that enumerators must -

(i) obtain the actual hours worked during

the week

ending June 2, 1951,,not the usual or

average

hours worked.

(ii) count time worked to the nearest hour,

(iii) count the total hours worked, if more

than one

job held,
(iv) exclude time off for lunch.

(v) exclude time spent on home housework.

and house-

hold chores such as cutting lawn, painting the

garage, etc,
(vi) estimate hours worked, if impossible t

io obtain

a precise answer.

- 81 -

Points to cover

(f ) General remarks
concerning
(Questions 23-2?

(i) When to ask these
questions

Procedure

k Have trainees turn now to the entries for
Questions 20, 21 and 22 in the Specimen
Booklet,

k Mark the enlarged Form 2, as indicated on
the Specimen document for Mrs. Martin, As
you do so, point out that -

(i) Mrs, Martin had apparently stated that she spent
most of her time during the week ending June
2nd, "Keeping House",

(ii) Therefore, in (Question 20, the oval "H" is marked,

(iii) Since "H" is bracketed, (Question 21 was asked.

(iv) Mrs. Martin stated "Yes" she did some work for pay
or profit during that week in addition to Keeping
House ,

(v) Since "A Yes" was marked in (Question 21, an entry
was needed in (Question 22, Her response resulted
in "15-24" being marked,

A Have trainees examine the Specimen docuraent for
Jeem Martin, in the same household.

Point out that (i) she spent most of her time that week

"Looking for Work",

(ii) since "± L" is bracketed, (Question 21
was asked,

(iii) since her answer in (Question 21 was
"No", Question 22 was not asked,

± If time permits examine the entries for these '
questions on the other apeciraen documents. If
not, suggest trainees study them at hpke.

Explain that the asterisks in Questions 20 and 21 are
the guides as- to whether or not Questions
23-27 should be asked o

i. Show trainees on the enlarged Form 2 that
these asterisks appear before "A Vi^", "4 J",
and "A L" in Question 20 and "4 Yes" in
Question 21,

Emphasize that i.f_ any one of these ovals is marked ,
(Questions 23-2? must be asked, as is
indicated on Form 2 above this section.

Points to cover

(ii) Employment to
which they
refer

Procedure

{ iii) Care must be
taken with
' written''
entries-

(g) Question .23,

NAME of' FIRM ..
OR BUSINESS

(For whom did this-
person work?) ' :

Explain that (Questions 23-25 and 2? refer to this per-
son's employment during the week ending
June 2 . 19$1 ,

except (i) if the person is not working
■ ' that weeks, questions refer to

"' his most recent employment.

'" . -('ii) persons who have never worked,
but are looking for work. These
will have no entry in Q,uestion
23, 2U and 27, but will have an
entry "None" in Question 25,,

Emphasize that Question 26 refers to the person's usual
occupation or activitya

&. Have trainees note that this instruction
is printed on the document for their
constant references

Warn trainees to be very careful in writing in the en-
tries in Questions 23-260 At no time
must they run over the allotted space,

& Using the enlarged Specimen, show how
careless entries might run into a col-
umn 'containing ovals, (eogo, careless
entries in Questions 23-26 running in-
'• ■ to Question 22 or 2?), If this hap--
pens, the machine will be affected in
such a way that the document will not
be accurately punched,

Explain that the entries for this question will be made
'[ , ' according to the following rulesj-

Entry in Question 20 or 21
,{i) "i Worked" in Question; 20

"± Yes" in Question 21

Entry in Question 23

The name of the.. firm ".or
business in which the
work- was done,,
(Note - If the shop,
store, etc, is. not
operated under a firm
name, enter the name of
the person who operated
it, e,g,, a carpenter
working for J, A, Brown
would report "J, A,
Brown", as would J. A.
Brown himself) ,

- 83 -

Points to cover

Procedure

(ii) "With a Job, but not
• at Work" in (Question
20 ■
• ■ " ' and
'■■ ■ "No" In question 21

(iii) "Looked for Work" in
(Question 20 and "No"
in i^uestion 21 •■^-'-'

The name of the firm or
business in which he had
a joba

(a) The name of the firm
or business in which
the person last work-
ed/

If the person never
worked before (e.g.,
a recent graduate
from school ) , leave
Q,uestions 23 and 24

(b)

blank but enter
"none" in Question 2$,

Instructions for dealing with difficult cases

(i) For persons who have - Enter the name of the firm

had more than one or business in which he

job during the week ; worked the greatest number

. ending June 2, I95I of hours ^

(ii) For persons employed
in government ser-
vice

(iii) For persons employed -
in government ■ com-
mercial or other
enterprises, Crown"
companies or corp-
orations (including:-

- transportation
companies or
services,

- electric light and
power utllitl'es,,

- telephone and water
. . works utilities,

- street railways or
bus lines)

Enter "Federal Grovernment",
"Provincial Government",
or "Municipal Government",
as required.

Note - "Municipal govern-
ment"includes persons em-
ployed by local school
authorities, i.e., school
boards, districts or corp-
orations, or boards of edu-
. cat ion « , .. ; -■ ?•. :

Enter the name of the enter-
prise, company or organiza-
tion. . r, .

- 84 -

Points to cover

Procedure

4 Have trainees note the section on Page

50 of the Enumeration Manual which gives

typical examples of the names of such

enterprises etc., as are mentioned above.

Remind them to use this list for reference

purposes.

Bank of Canada

■

Polymer Corporation

Kova Scotian Hotel

Alberta CJovernment Telephones

Canadian National Railways

Toronto Transportation Commission

Windsor Utilities Commission

•

Eldorado. Mining and Refining Company Limited

Canadian National Steamships Limited

Ontario Hydro Electric Power Commission

Pacific Great Eastern Railway

Ottawa Hydro Electric Commission

Sandwich, Windsor and Amherstburg Railway (bus

lines)

(h) (Question 2U

± Have trainees study Question 2^ on

iihe document,

■

INDUSTRY

Emphasize again that the correct response will be

(What kind of business
or industry is this?
- e.g., rubbet shoes

obtained much more readily,
if the wording on the docu-
ment is always used.

manufacturing, drugs -
retail trade, grain
farming, etc.)

Point out that -

(i) Question 24 requires a separate and different
entry to C^uestion 23,

In Question 24, the enumerator must indicate

the product produced, the service rendered.

etc., by the firm reported in Question 23,

- 85 -

Points to cover

Procedure

::i

(ii) Two words, at least, are required to correctly
answer this question,, One word entries such as
"factory" 5 "construction", "manufacturing'', "store",
etc . , are not acceptable, norr are general terms
such as "shop", "mill", "foundry" j "mine", "farm"j,
"trade", "public utility", etCa Such terms need a
qualifying word or words, e»ge, "railway car shop",
"brass foundry", "gold mine", "grain farm", etCo

(iii) The entry will have two parts ==

(a) the main division of industry, as farming,
manufacturing, construction, service, trans-
portation, wholesale or retail trade, etCo

(b) the type of industry p

Explain manner of deciding type of industry as follows;-

(i) If the main division of industry is farming, the
type of farm as determined by the principal product
grown must be shown, eogo, dairy farming, grain
farmings

(ii) If the main division is wholesale or retail trade,
the product principally handled must be shown, Oogo,
retail meat„ retail hardware „ etCo, or wholesale
fruit, wholesale drugs, etCo

(iii) If the main division of industry is a type of

service, either professional or personal, the type
of service performed must be shown, eogo, domestic
service, restaurant service, medical service,
religious service, etCo

A Have trainees note the examples of "complete
entries" in the Enumeration Manual, Page 5I0

A Point out that both the main division and
type of industry are indicated in these
entries^

Examples of complete entries, with the main
division of industry underlined, ares

telephone communication

automobile manufacturing

building construction

wholesale grocery

retail hardware
restaurant service

auto repair shop
iron foundry
gold mining

public library
service

salmon fishing
copper smelting

86 =

Points to cover

Procedure

steam railway
transportation

dairy farming

retail department
store

domestic service

Explain that certain firms carry on several types of busi-
ness in one or more establishments ^

± Have trainees follow in the Enumeration
Manual , Page 51 , as you read the explana-
tion of how to handle this problem^

Kind of business; In reporting the kind of
business or industry it is necessary to dist-
inguish between single and multiple establish-
ment businesses a

A single establishment business conducts
its entire business in one location only. In
answering Q^uestion 24 you must describe the
major business or industrial activity. For
example, a factory whose out-put is 60 per cent
furniture and 40 per cent toys should be re-
ported as a furniture factory. If a person
works in the drug section of a department
store J, enter retail department store in (Ques-
tion 24 and not retail drugs^ In the case of
an establishment doing both wholesale and
retail business, report according to the bulk
of the business done^

A multiple establishment business is one
where business is conducted in different plant
locations^ These may be in the same town or
city or in different towns or cities. In the
case of these, enter in Question 24, a precise
description of the major business or industrial
activity carried on by the establishment in
which the individual being enumerated was
employed. Examples of multiple establishment
businesses are: Canadian Industries Limited,
Canadian National Railways, Canada Packers
Limited, T, Eaton Co., Imperial Oil Ltd.,
Hudson Bay Co^, Winnipeg Electric Co., Forest
Products Can.Ltd., etc

- 87 -

PoijJts to cover

Procedure

(i) Question 25
OCCUPATICM

(What kind of
work did this
person do in
this, industry?
e.g., office
clerk, sales
clerk, auto
mechanic, iron
moulder , gra-
duate nurse,
etc.)

Point out further, that for persons employed in -

(i) Government Services (whether federal, pro-
vincial or municipal) the name of the branch
or service, bureau, agency, board, commission,
etc., and the name of the department of the
goverimient concerned must be entered, e.g.,
Experimental Farm Service, Department of
Agriculture',

k Refer trainees to Page 52 of the Enum-
eration Manual for further examples,

( i i ) Government commercial or other enterprises.
Crown companies or corporations, etc, , the
major business or industrial activity of
that particular establishment must be en-
tered, e,g,, steam railway transportation,
hotel service, railway car shops, etc,,
(for the Canadian National Railways),

A Refer trainees to Page 52 of the Enum-
eration Manual for further examples.

Explain that the entry, required for this question is a
description of the occupation at which
the person worked in the industry or
service reported in (Question 2^,

This description -? should be brief, but

- should clearly indicate the duties
. performed on the job, and thus

- will mostly require two or more
■'words to indicate the occupation

correctly.

A Read examples of the type of entry
required from the Enumeration
Manual, Page 53,

- 88 -

Points to cover

Procedure

mine foreman

radio repairman

carpenter

registered nurse

practical nurse

sewing machine
operator

farmer

bellboy

auto mechanic

j telephone operator
i filing clerk
! sales clerk

bank teller

lawyer

clergyman

music teacher
civil engineer
locomotive engineer
farm labourer
iron moulder

Per persons who have never worked but are
looking for their first job, enter "none".

Warn trainees not to accept vague, incomplete terms
such as "clerk", "operator", "foreman", etCo
If such answers are given, question further to dis-.
cover the iezact nature of the person's work,, Typical
examples and the method of dealing with them are
outlined on Page 53 of the Enumeration Manual, These
must be studied carefully,

A Have trainees follow the Enumeration
Lilanual while you summarize these
special cases as follows ;~

Do not accept
labourer

Accejpt

farm labourer
construction labourer
rock digger
sewer digger
garden labourer, etc.

- 89 "

Points to cover

Procedure...

clerk

file clerk

shipping clerk

time clerk

sales clerk, etc,

(Note - typists, accountants,
bookkeepers,
cashiers, etc,,
should be classified
as such, not as
clerks) e

nurse

registered nurse
nurse- in-training
practical nurse
nursemaid

engineer

civil engineer
locomotive engineer
stationary engineer
chemical engineer, etc.

agent

insurance agent
real estate agent
advertising agent ,
purchasing agent, etc.

civil servant

" the specific occupational
duty, as economist
office clerk
stenographer
administrative officer
architect, etCo

nun or brother

- the specific type of
work performed, as,
school teacher
registered nurse
nurse- in-training
au8i«. teaohec
cook
farmer, etc.

the trade or occupa-

-■ the rank of these persons

tion to which persons

in the Active Armed Forces

in the Active Armed

Forces are assigned

the usual occupation

the rank of these persons

or the trade or occu-

in the Reserve Unit

pation to which per-

sons in a Reserve Unit

at a Military Camp are
assigned

- 90 -

Points to cover

Procedure

Explain that (i) farmer is the term to be used for the

person who owns or operates a farms

(ii) farm labourer or farm hand should be
entered for farm employees or unpaid
family workers »

(iii) farm manager is to be used for the
person hired by the owner to manage
a farm,

(iv) farm foreman should be entered for
the person who directs the farm work
under the supervision of the manager
or owner o

Point out that certain occupational terms which have
different meanings must not be used
interchangeably ,

Bo not confuse "

painter and decorator

executive secretary

machinist

canvasser

physicians and surgeons

with interior decorator
" clerical secretary
" machine operator

: " osteopaths
dentists
chiropractors
veterinarians

i Refer trainees to Page 54 of the
Enumeration Manual for the detailed
distinctions concerning these terms.

Remind trainees that

(i) "None" will be entered in
Question 2$ and Questions
23 and 24 left blank, for any
persons 14 years of age and
over who have never worked.

(ii) persons who were unemployed

during the week ending June

■ 2, 1951 should report their

. last 'occupation in Question

25. .

- 91 -

Points to cover

{ j) Question 26

' USUAL OCCUPATION

(Is the occupation
reported in Ques-
tion 25 this per-
son's usual
occupation or
activity?)

Procedure

Emphasize that

(i) this question refers to the full year
ending May 31, 1951.

(ii) it must be asked for any person re-
porting an occupation or "None" in
Question 25,

Define "usual occupation or activity" as the occupation
or actitrity at which a person spent the greater part of
his time during the 12 month period prior to June 2,
1951.

Instruct trainees to -

Mark "yes"

Mark "no"
and

write in usual
occupation

Mark "no"
and
write in the
usual activity

followed
(as "Keeping
house", "Going
to school", etc,)

if a person's usual occupation is
the same as that reported in
Question 25,

if a person's usual occupation
differs from that reported in
Question 25,

(i) i£ a person does not usually
work for pay or profit, or as
an unpaid worker on a farm or
in a family business.

(ii) if a person is reported as
"None" in Question 25,

A Ask:

What entries would you make in Questions 23-
26 for Jack Jackson, who has been working
as a clerk in the shipping department of T,
Eaton Go. Ltd. For 8 of the past 12 months
he v;orked for a local cartage firm, helping
a truck driver.

Ans,

Question

Entry

T. Eaton Co, Ltd.

retail department s

shipping clerk

No - truck driver's

helper

- 92 -

Points to cover

Procedure

A Have trainees study the Specimen document for
Michael J« Petigorsky, noting the entries made
in questions 23-26«

A Ask: What entries would you make in questions
23-26 for a young girl who has just
finished school. She is looking for her
' first job, :

■ ■ ■

• Ans, question Entry^

23 Leave blank

24 Leave blank

25 ] None

26 ' No - Student

'.'; ■.'■-.■'.'• ■■,.'::;:',

A Have trainees study the entries on the Specimen
document for Jean Martin, noting that questions
23=26 have been filled in, in accordance with
the rules above.

A Draw attention also to the entries for Mrs, .
Martin and fill in these questions on your
enlarged document accordingly 0

(k) question 2?

CLASS OF
WORKER

Emphasize again that this question is to be asked if
"AW", "AJ", or "AL" is marked in
■ question 20 or "AYes" in question 21.
The only exception to this will be
when the entry "None" is entered in
question 25,

Point out the following:"'

"' ■■ ■';■■■ ' * ■ . "

(i) Position on the document = there is a possi-
bility that question 27 may be missed because
of its position. Trainees must take special
care to make an entry for this question when
required 0

(ii) question' 27 refers to the week preceding

(i) Wage or
Salary
Earner

June 2, 1951.

Explain that this oval will be marked for all persons
who worked for -

(i) wages or salary

(ii) piece rates

(iii) commissions or tips
(iv) payment in kind or board and room

- 93 -

Points to cover

(ii) Own- Ac count

Procedure

A Have trainees study examples given in
the Enumeration Manual, Page 55 „

(a) insurance salesman working on commission,

(b) waitress working for tips,

(d) salaried manager of a bank,,

(e) university professor, or school-teacher^

(f ) executive of a Hydro Electric Power
Commission,,

(g) person on jury duty«

(h) store clerks

(i) cleaning woman who works for different
people each day^

Point out that to be classed as an "own=accouht", a
person

(i) must have worked during the week
ending June 2, I95I in a business
or profession owned and. operated
by himself
and (ii) he must not have had any paid
employees in that business.

Examples of such persons are listed in the Enumeration
Manual ,

i. Have trainees follow as you, read the
excerpt below from Page 55 of the
Enumeration Manual,

(a) farmer who has no paid help (may have,
unpaid family workers) »

(b) proprietor of a grocery store who does
not hire anybody to assist him.

- 94

Points to cover

Procedure

person who works for fees and hires no

assistants, receptionists, nurse,

secretary, etc, (He may hire a maid

in his own home, but since this is not

in connection with his business he would

still be classed as "own-account").

(d) TNoman who operates a boarding or rooming

house and does not hire anycae to assist

her a

(e) partner in a business in which no salar

ried persons are employed ^

(f ) huckster who neither employs any paid

workers, nor is employed by another

persono

(g) retail oil agent who buys oil in bulk

from an oil company and resells ito

(h) a skilled tradesman who does not hire
any person to work for him, and who
does aub-contract work for larger
contractors »

(For the occupation of such a person
enter his skilled trade, e.g., "car-
penter") o

(iii) Employer .

Explain that to be classed as an employer, a person

(i) must have operated his own

business, farm or profession

and (ii) have employed paid helpers or

workers in connection with

that business, during the

week ending June 2, 1951.

Emphasize that enumerators are not to include as em-
ployer any superintendent ^
manager,
foreman or

executive hired to manage an
establishment or business.

- 95 -

Points to cover

Procedure

(iv) No Pay

A person employed by a company, may hire or fire other
people, but since he does not operate his own business,
he cannot himself be considered an "employer".

A Read the following examples of "employers"
from the Enumeration Manual, Page 56,

Examples of employers;

(a) farmer who hires a man to help on his
farm for money \vages, room and board,
or payment in kind, or who pays regular
money wages to his son or other relative
to work on the farm^

(b) a partner in a business which employs
wage or salary workers,

(c) physician, dentist, or other pro-
fessional person who works for fees,
and hires one or more paid workers
in the operation of his profession,

(d) a contractor who hires one or more
helpers.

Enumerators will mark as "No Pay" workers, any person
who worked without pay on a farm or in a business"
owned and operated by a member of the household to
whom he is related by blood or marriage^

Note - The work done must have contributed to
the operation of this family enterprise,
Thus - a grocer's son who helps run
his father's store with no fixed wages
will be classed as "No Pay",

A Read the following examples from
the Enumeration Manual, Page 56,

- 96 -

Points to cover

Procedure.

Examples of no pay workers;

(a) a farmer's son who helps his father
on the farm without pay during his
vacation from school or after
school hourse

(b) a -woman who works in her husband ♦s
grocery,, store without wages or
salary ^ •

(c) the wife of a physician with his
own medical practice who keeps her
husband's books and other records
without wages or salary,

(d) a fisherman's son who works without
pay in a fishing boat owned by a
member of the family.

Do not include as "unpaid family
workers" the following;

(a) the son of a school caretaker who
helps his father without pay,

• ( Reason !• the father is himself an
employee and it was not his own
business in which his son was
helping -him) ,

(b) a son working in the family's
vegetable garden (non=commercial) ,

(Reason; such work has no direct
connection with the family's farm
or business).

- 97 -

Points to cover

Procedure

(1) bluest ion 28

Emphasize

that Questions 28 and 29 are to be marked onljr
for persons reported as wa^e or salary

WEEKS WORKED

earners in Question 27 0

FOR WAGES ANB

SALARY

A Have trainees note the heading over

(During 12

these two questions on the document,

months prior

and the arrow leading from the wage

to June, 1951)

or salary earner oval in Question
27,

Stress al

so -

(i)

That the weeks worked as a wage or salary
earner are for the 12 month period prior
to June, 1951. The oval to be marked, is
the one which contains that figure.

(ii)

Time worked as an employer, own account,
or no pay worker is to be excluded.

(iii)

Include time for holidays and sick leave
with pay.

(iv)

School-teachers and professors who teach
a full school term should be marked in
the "50-52'* weeks oval.

(v)

Part-time employaent should be converted to
a full-time weekly basis, e,g,, if a person
worked three days a week for 26 weeks, the
"IO-I4" oval should be marked.

(m) Question 29

Emphasize

the. f ollowing:-

WAGE AND.

(i)

The money earnings to be reported in this

SALARY EARNINGS

question are only for the weeks worked as
Wage or Salary Earner , Do not include

(During 12

money earned by a person as "Employer* or

months prior

"Own-Account",

to June, 1951)

(ii) Miark the oval "None" for persons who

worked solely for room, board, tuition or

payment in kind.

» 98

Points to cover

Procedure

i. Have trainees turn to Page 57 in the
Enumeration Manual and read the
following:-

Include;

(1) Money received as wages, salary, com- ,
mission, tips, and piece rate payments^'

(2) Money deducted from pay for income tax,
unemployment insurance, bonds, medical
plans, union dues, insurance plans or
any other similar deduction.

Do not include:

(1) Income from investment, unemployment
insurance benefits, workmen's com-
pensation, or from other similar sources.

(2) Income from operating a business, i.e.,
income from working on own-account or
as an employer,

(3) Money equivalent Xop room, board,
tuition, or- payment in kindo

1 ' ■ ■

- i. Have trainees examine Specimen documents,
noting how the above instructions have
been followed «

A If time permits give an opportunity for

trainees to ask questions on points
which may not be clear to them.

Note for Field Supervisors in areas in which there are Institutions - The
chart which follows on the next two pages is for your use^ It will not
be necessary to use it in the general training sessions, but you will find
it a useful guide when advising enumerators in whose areas there are
Institutions* Study carefully the method of reporting the typical cases
listed, as respect to Questions 20-29,

Application of Labour Force Questions to, Persons living in Institutions

Situation

Activity
(4.20, 4.21)

Name of Firm
(4.23)

Industry
(4.24)

Occupation
(4.25)

21ass of
Worker
(4.27)

Weeks

•Worked

(4.28)

Earn- '
Ings

A nun living in a convent
dnd employed without pay
as a teacher a

"Worked"

Name of
school

Educational
service

Convent

school

teacher

Wage-
earner

50-52 or
other appro-
priate group

None

A nun living in a religious .
convent £ind performing only
her. religious dutieSo'

"Worked" "

Name of
convent

Religious
service

Nun '■

Wage-
earner

50-52 or
other appro-
priate group

None

A nurse-in-training receiv-
ing no money pay and living,
in a nurse's residence.

"Worked"

Name of
hospital

Health
service

Nurse- in-
training

Vifage-
earner

50-52 or
other appro-
priate group

None

A prisoner in a reformatory
employed, in "making automo-
bile license plates

•0ther''(4.20)
•No" (4.21)

-■

A patient in a convalescent ;
'hospital who spends a few
hours a week at shellcraf t
from which she derives
some profit.

♦0ther"C4.20)
•No". (4.21)

• -

Application of labour Force .i^uestions to Persons living in Institutions - Con,

. Situation . .

'' Activity
(q,20, q.2i)

Name of Firm
(Q.23)

Industry
.(^.24)

Occupation
■ {■^.25)

Class of
Worker
{Q.27)

V/eeks

Worked

(Q.28)

Eara"

iBgS

(Q:29)

A patient in a mental V
in'stitution who does a
fe^ odd jobs' about the
institution. .".';,

"Other" & "No"
;;.' .. , or
"Permanently
unable to work

J , ■

An elderly resident

in an Old Folks

Home,

^Permanently
L unable to
work"

■ -

•

A blind man living in
/ah institution for the
blind and employed
making brooms and
baskets.

"Other" (^,20)
"No" (q.2l)

■-

-■

A member of a Hutterit^
colony employed as a farm,
labourer within the
colony.

■

"V/orked"

Name of
colony

Grain
farming

Farm
labourer

Wage-
earner

50-52

None

An orphan I5. years old,
living in an orphanage and
attending school.

"Going to

School"

tQ.20)-

"No" (Q.21)

An inmate in an industrial
school or farm.

"Other" (q,20)
"No" (ft,21)

o
o

- 101 _

IX. REVIEtf AND QUESTION PSilOD

Note.- The instructions given concerning the 1st Revievj- and
Question Period (Section VI, page 52) should again
be followed.

Oral Review Questions relating: to Population Document Questions 20 - 29

Question

Answer

1. For what persons should Question
20 be asked?, ■ ,

2. \ifhen should you ask Question 21?

3, Wien should you ask Question 22?

4. When should Questions 23 to 27
be asked?

5. What is the only case where you
may have an oval bearing an^ .
asterisk marked in Question 20

and still have no entry in Questions
23 and 24?

6, When should you ask Questions 28
and 29?

7. What should you do if the respon-
dent gives you two or more
activities in reply to Question 20?

8, \\fhat conditions are necessary for
a person who worked without pay in
cash or kind to be classified as
"Worked" in Question 20?

1. All persons 14 years of age and over.

2. Question 21 should be asked Whenever
an oval other than»"*W" (Worked) or..
"U" (Permanently vinable to work) is'
marked in Question 20, i.e., whenever
an oval inside the bracket in Question
20 is marked.

3. l^fhenever "*W" (Worked) is marked in
Question 20 or "*Yes" is marked in
Question 21. '

4. You should ask Questions 23 to 27 if
"*W", "*J" or "*L" is marked in
Question 20 or "*Yes" is marked in
Question 21.

5. When "*L" is marked in Question 20 and
the person has never worked. In this
case Questions 23 and 24 should be
left blank and "None" entered in
Question 25 «

6. Questions 28 and 29 should be asked
only if Wage or Salary Earner is
marked in Question 27.

7. Ask him at which activity he spent the
most time during the week ending

June 2nd,

8. The farm or business in which the
person worked must be operated by a
member of the household to whom he is
related by blood or marriage. In
addition the v/ork performed must have
actually contributed to the operation
of the farm or business.

- 102 -

Question

9. Many school teachers work for 8 or
9 months and are on vacation for
the rest of the year. Usually they
have definite arrangements to resume
teaching in the fall. In this case

(a) What oval would you mark
in Question 20?

(b) In Question 28?

10, V/hen should female unpaid family
workers on farms who are princi-
pally engaged in keeping house be
marked "*Yes" in Question 21?

11, What persons does the term "Looked
for work" include?

Answer

12. Is it possible to have more than
one person in a household marked
as "Keeping House"? If so give an
example.

9. (a) "With a job but not at work",
(b) 50 - 52.

10. Only if during, the week ending
June 2, 1951, they devoted one hour
or more to farm work as distinct from
home housev/ork and household chores,

11, Persons who actively looked for work
during the week ending June 2nd or
who would have actively looked for
work except for temporazy illness,
indefinite layoff or the belief that
no work was available.

12^ Yes - there may be more than one

person in a household marked as "Keep-
ing House". If a daughter spent most
of the week assisting her mother with
the housework, both the mother and
daughter would be marked as "Keeping
House".

* As time permits, have trainees complete the following
Practice Exercise D, either in the class or as an
assignment to be done at home.

- 103 -
Practice Exercise D»

In the space provided enter a complete answer to Question 23 (Name of
firm or business) for the following cases:-

Question

Answer

(a) A person who worked for the American
Optical Co. Canada Ltd. during the
week ending June 2nd,

CirynjiMva^ Of^^ckt Co- Ga^rutcU. X^

(b) Jack Johnson who tells you he worked
on his own account during the week
ending June 2nd and did not operate
\inder a firm name, . '-

^JJv- i^ac^ ,3«>-Ao ul-ir-ri^

(c) A person who was ' vinemployed during
the week ending J\ane 2nd but formerly
worked for the Canadian Commercial
Corporation - a Crown compemy.

■&ay/iec,Uia^rx^e-?ri/7txe/ltA.ix^ Ctr-U^.^^atLrny

(d) A person who worked for the city as
• a conductor for the Toronto Trans-
portation Commission,

<:yV'\<-}xAO '^UX^XyCAix^^A^^Ctce-rx/ io Crfrun-u/y^fyj

(e) A person who tells you he worked for
the Canadian National Railways in the
Chateau Laurier Hotel,

^'fxaZcexM^ A^MJUJUU jl-^ljL^

(f ) A government employee who worked for
the Province of Ontario,

fhJT\yxrr\jU^€>JL- 'J'trv^y'i/nyyyui.'^ Jo

(g) A person who was on vacation during

the week ending June 2nd from his
position with the Department of
Trade and Commerce in Ottawa.

^JzUiLyU^ -^fe/L^r,^.-ylJ:

(h) A person who works in the waterworks
department of the V/indsor Utilities
Commission,

/Vorvd^Ayiy^ UttA,iylUAy -^ 0-^/w>-u*«U^na/

- 104 -

2. In the space provided enter a complete answer to Question 24 (Industry)
for the following cases:- -

Products made, sold, etc.

Correct entry for
Question" 24 (Industry)

(a)"A store which sells drugs to the
public and also handles a small
quantity of photographic equipment.

(b) A small store which handles both
, . . meat and groceries *

(d) A firm which makes rubber shoes.

,..(e)... A„woiiian.wh.o works ., by. the. day. doing
housework for neighbours.

(f)*A factory which produces farm
_ ,mac,hin,ery but occasionally turns .
out some ammunition.

(g) A firm which sells groceries in

.la.rge...quantit.ies.to...stores.. which

in turn sell to the public.

Shl.A.J^ctqrj, which. makes paper boxes..

ly^^^::^ WM-^'f ^/-i-f^'oU^' '•

'jjjeaZ' ^ 'H'i^cjL/u.e^ - f(^u.i£^ il//ia.cU^

^WUUy^ro J" '<^0>ilUyyi

f^u^<f€/u .JAj^cd, - >>t^ rxAx/-a.cJziAi^ta,

n/^yt-nji^c'z^ AlAyirt

CJL.

JtLh/rrt/ h)(X.x>4u/njtAju^ nj (UnU.iJ^

i^Jx.^trh^^Jji' ^^-C^i^

Xi'txt-tsU-'

^^^^^ S^^ yy] c^ ^^U^^iAA^if^

- 105 -

3. In the space provided enter a complete answer to Question 25 (Occupation)
for the following cases:-

Description of duties
or work performed

Correct entry for
Question 25 (Occupation)

(a) A person who said he was a farmer
during the week ending June 2nd
and reported 52 weeks worked and
wage and salary earnings of §1020 „

'^/'■dt^t^^^yxy J[^\yv-t>~uj\^y-ty

(b) A person who looked for work during
the week ending June 2nd and has
never worked.

1 l-Sn-uL^

S rLAjo,p..on L^ /(o Lytyky

(d) A person who was employed as an
agent for the Mutual Life Insur-
ance Co.

- J\lfJi^ i/->'L-<J.-W tO^H m, ^^Gj^ryJ^

(e) The respondent tells you her son
worked in the accounting department
of an insurance company. She be-
lieves he is an accountant. During
the 6 months he was employed he
earned $840,

y^/OCOTvC^ c^' ^ ^ "tiAyf^

(f ) A person who was employed by
Woolworths, at the ;Jewellery
counter.

^cxAJLd/ As) ^jp/tyB'

- 106 -
4. Answer Questions 20 to 29 for the following cases.

(a) During the week ending June 2nd Patrick Brown worked ^0 hours as a bus driver
for the City Transportation Commission, For 7 of the 12 months prior to
June 2nd he worked on his own account as a tail driver but for the remainder
of the year was employed at his present occupation, Mr, Brown earns $50 a
week but has $3 deducted weekly for retirement fund and unemployment insurance.

■UN

»»»5-

WOIIO
W»»ll

WOILD
Mil

^ASK QUCSTIONS 28 AND 29 FOR>
WAGE AND SALARY EARNERS

FORCES
SERVED

20. WHAT DID

THIS PERSON 00

MOSTLY OURING

WEEK ENDING

JUNE 2, 1951 T

VOKUD I

WITH

tJOI »J ^

BUT HOT '

n WOM

(EEPIIIG
HOUSE

SOmB TO,
SCHOOL ^

lETIBED

01 VOL (

lOLE

ASK THESE QUESTIONS FOR PERSONS 14 YEARS OF AGE AND OVER

" ^ IF "Wr "J" OR "L" IN 20, OR "YES" IN 21, ASK QUESTIONS 23 TO

ACTIVITY OURING WEEK ENDING JUNE 2, 19S1

21. IN tODITION,
DID THIS PERSON

DO UT. worn

FOR PAT OR
PROFn?

PEIIII.
UHtBLE

Vjowom

22.UW

NUT IIS.

in Tilt

PEisn

niK!

♦ YES

1»4

^28. WEEKS WORKED
-__^~N FOR WASES
27. ) I AND SAIART

28M

35 OR
NORE

23. NAME OF FIRM OR BUSINESS -fob whodi oio this kbsoh »onT

„.« ..n .1 .mt Tn tms wisnrs EIIPLOTIIE.T DURING WEEK ENDING JUNE 2. 185l\
IF HOT WOKWS THAT WEEK. THESE OOESTIOHS BEFEB 10 HOST BECEHT EUPIOTHEHT
IF -l- IH JO AHD THIS PEBSOH HEYEB «OBUD. EHTEB "HOHE" IB ii «HB USUAl ACTIVIIT IB W.

27. CLASS

OF WORKER

24. INDUSTRY - WHn bibo of busihess ob woustbt is thisi

(I.O.. MIUI Sntt ■MUMCTDIWa, DRUGS lEUIL TRADE, DRAIR ruamR, ITC.)

25. OCCUPATION -wHti BIBO OF »ob< oio this kbsoh oo ih ibis woiistbtt

ll.>.. DFFIU ClIRR. um CURR. >DtD UCXnt. HDD aDnilR. UIDUTI RDRSI. IIC.I

-/SW jOam/Cu

ffUt CB

ausi una

DURING 12

NDNTRS prior

TO JUNE, 1951.

29. WAGE AND
SUART EARN
DBS OURDIG

12 NORTHS

PnOR TO

IDNt, 1951.

(26 " '"' '"'""'"" «'"""" IH OUESTIOH J! IMS PEBSOB'S USOBt OCCOPHIOBI

jf 'rF'-HO'SPtCIFT USUtl OCCOPAIIOH 0« JICIIVITY

25-29^

2,00D2,499

3D.M

2,5002,999

35-39

3.0003,999

4049
50-52

4,000.5,999

6,000
AND OVER

I I

(b) Mary Jackson's parents operate the Jackson Beauty Parlour, During the week end-
ing June 2nd and every week for the past six weeks she did the housework at home
and worked three evenings from 7 p,m, to 10 p.m, as a hairdresser in the beauty
parlour. Her parents pay her $5 a night for her services at the beauty parlour,
Mary spent most of her time during the 12 months prior to June 2nd attending
school ,

ASK QUESTIONS 26 AND 20 FOR>
WAGE AND SALARY tARNERS

ASK THESE QUESTIONS FOR PERSONS 14 YEARS OF AGE AND OVER

OTBEB
I )

ACTIVITY OURING WEEK ENDING JUNE 2. 1951

20. WHAT DID

THIS PERSON DO

MOSTLY DURING

WEEK ENDING

JUNE 2, 10517

HOBBED

<nn

• Ml
BUT ROT
AT WOBB

LOOIEO ,
FOB WOIB^

BEEPIHS <

HOOU *

COIBt TO
SCHOOL

BETIBED
01 YOL I

nil

PEBM.
DHUIE (
JO WOBB

21. H ADDITION,

no THIS PERSON

DO ANT WORK

FOR PAT OR

PROFIT?

*i-.-\

22.n«

lUTIIS.

Ill TIU
PEISII
nil!

♦ YES

15-24

J«l,

35 OR

(* IF "Wr "J" OR "l" IN 20, OR "YES" IN 21. ASK QUESTIONS 23 TO 27. J
nMimw n.n ua n iiffb to this hbsohs EWPLOrilEHT DURING WEEK ENOING JUNE 2. 195i\

23. NAME OF FIRM OR BUSINESS - fob whom did this pebsoh woibt
dahcJ^ltnu f^JLCUilu^ 'PmxJUuAJ

IF HOT WOBIIBO THAI WEEB. THESE OUESTIOHS BEFEB 10 HOST BECEHT EUPIOTWEHT.
IF -l- IB JO ABO THIS PEBSOH REVEB WOIBEO. EHTEB -HOHE" IB » AHD OSOtL ACTIVITT IBM.

28. WEEKS WORKED

FOR WAGES

AND SALARY

DORINO 12

WONTltS PRIOR

TO JUNE, 1951

27. CLASS
OF WORKER

24. INDUSTRY- WHAT BIBO OF OUSIHESF 01 IHOUSTBT IS THIST

|f.R., RNttl SROII KMOfMTDRIRa, DtlBt RITHa TRADt, UA» FAtaiM, ITC.)

^jLtUjZu^ P/UiLhjIAJ

25. OCCUPATION -WHAT BIBO OF WOBB OIO THIS PEBSOB DO IH THIS MOUSTBTt
(E.B., OrriCE CLERR. SAUt CURR. ADTD UCURIC, IRDB unHR. SRADBRTI RWU. [TO

J^CU/LciAjM'thJ

< 3

msia

BO PIT

29. WAGE An

SALARVEARN-

IKS oomn

12 MONTHS
PRIOl TO
WHE. 1951.

HONE

DHOtR 11

10T4

15-19
(~~-)-

20-24

OR IS THE OCniPATIOH BEPOBTED IH OUESTIOB 29 THIS PEBSOH'S USUAl OCCUPATIOHt

HO «— 4 »." ■ Ff'-ho" spiaFY'osiiir occumiioh" OB'icmrTf

HONE

UNDER 500

soojn

l.lBO-1,499
CZZD

1,900-1999

2,«Si4?,

30-34^

vrn^

35^39

X00OJ,l99

< :

4049^

4,000-5,999

6,000
ANMVE,

n aai to
ru an A

FWI t FOB
UT PEBSOa

■ IBIS
ORUOB

no B
TOTAUI

lUND
OR

DEAF

'r I

- 107 -

(o) Jack Smith spent most of his time during the week ending June 2nd looking for
work. He was unable to find satisfactory employment and did no work at all
during this week* For 11 of the last 12 months he had been employed by the
National Paper Box Co. as an operator of a folding machine. His salary while
he was employed was $^0 a week.

^ASK QUESTIONS 28 AND 39 FOR>
WAGE AND SALARY EARNERS

ASK THESE QUESTIONS FOR PERSONS 14 YEARS OF AGE AND OVER

WOBIO

mil II

I >

UTIVITT DURING WEEK ENDING JUNE 2, 19SI

20. WHAT DID

THIS PERSON DO

MOSTLY DURING

WEEK ENDING

JUNE?, 19517

WITH

« JOl

BUT HOT

<T DOM

Lomto

HIPIIIG ,
HOUSI

SOMG TO
SCHOOL

■!TI>ED

on VOL.

IDLE

PHI.
UMBLE

TO won

♦ l

M UDITIOH,

DID THIS KBSm

DO Ur WOM

FOk PIT 01

PMmr

22.I0W

NMT III

III TIIS
PEISM

nil?

*YES

114

ISM

8H4

' '

19 01
JOH
' 1

(* IF "w: "J"

OR "L" IN 20, OR "YES" IN 21. ASK QUESTIONS 23 TO

23. NAME OF FIRM OR BUSINESS -fob whoi oio this peisou wout

niiKTimit M.H m » »m la this pebmns euployiieiit DURING WEEK ENDING JUNE 2. lOSJN

IF HOT WOIURS THM WEES. THESE QOESTIOHS REFEB 10 MOST BECEHT ENPLOTKHT.
IF -I- n n UO THIS PEBSOH HEVEB WOBIEO. EDTEB -HOHE- M 23 UO OSOU UTIVITT IH 20.

28. WEEKS WOMED .
FOI WtGES

•NO suuy

DURING 12
MONTHS PRIOR
TO JUNE. 1991.

27.0^*55

OF WORKER

24. INDUSTRY - WHH KiHO of busihess o> ihdostbt is thist

([.«.. iDtlu imfs MAHgrjicTulriis. OBU«s ktail tmdi, wm amiM. lie.)

25. OCCUPATION— WH«T sno of wom oio this pebsoh oo ih this ihoustbti

([.B.. OFFICI CLEH. ULES clerk. MTO HCHMIC. IBM HOIllBER. BBBDUBTE lUBIE. ETC. I

K^oldA^^*^ 7?7£u:A<;K.ey ^a.t\-cj^

■UE OB

suAiT una

r 26 " "" OCCUPtTIOH BEPOBTEO IH OUESTIOH 25 THIS PEHSOH'S USUAL OCCUPATIOHT
' Ff'-HO "SPECIFY"ulu'«r OCCUPiflOH" oB'icmrTT

29. WtGE AND
SALtRT EtRN-
IRGS DORmi

U MONTHS

PRIOR TO

lOXE, IBI.

NONE

UNDER 10

ll-M

is-n

20-24

25-28

M-34

35-39

40-49
50-52

JOHE

UNDER 500

500999

1.0110-1,499

1.500-1.999

2.000-2,499

2.500-2.999
( )

3,000-3.999

4.000-5.999

err"

6000
AND OVER

- 108 -

' '.■■:■■''■'. X. 2nd PRACTIOE NARIIATIVB

(Population Questions 20-29)

This Narrative will complete the enumeration for the Wilson household.

Proceed with it in exactly the same manner as for the 1st Practice Narrative,
choosing a different trainee, however, to act as "Eniunerator" . As for the first
Narrative, chooae your trainee carefully. Much of the success of these Narratives
depends upon the manner in which the "Enumerator's" part is taken.

Explain that you are proceeding with Questions 20-29 for the Wilson household, al-
though, as has already been stated, under ordinary circumstances, a Form 2 would
be completed in its entirety for each person of the household«bef6i*e proceeding with
the next person.

Population Documen-te (Questions 20-29)

Enumerator: ^fliat did your husband do mostly during the week ending June 2nd,
Mrs, Wilson?

Respondent: John was working all that week.

Enumerator: How many hours did he work in that week?

Respondent: Well - he worked every day and he usually works eight hours a day.

Enumerator: Does that include Saturday?

Respondent: Oh, no. John works a five-day week now.

Enumerator: For whom did your husband work Mrs.. Wilson?

Respondent: John has his own business - "Wilson's Hardware Store" „

Enumerator: Is that a retail or v/holesale hardware store?

Respondents Oh it's a retail store. John doesn't do any wholesale business.

Enumerator: Is managing his own store your husband's usual occupation, Mrs.
V/ilson?

Respondent: Yes it is. He started up the store when he got out of the Air Force
and he hasn't worked at anything else since »

Enumerator: Does your husband employ anyone else to help him in the store or is he on
his own?

Respondent: The only help he has is a boy to deliver orders.

Enumerator: And now, what did you do mostly during the week ending June 2nd, Mrs.
Wilson?

- 109 -
Respondent: 'Well -■. I spent most^^of my time looking' after the house.

Enumerator: In addition to keeping house did you do any work for pay. or profit?

Respondent: Yes -J: did.. .Since my mother has come to live with us I've been- '
vrorking three afternoons a week at Johnson's Department Store,

Enumerator: How many hours did you work during the week ending June 2nd, Mrs,

Wilson? - ■' '• ■• ■'■ • ■ ' ' ■■'-■' '■ ':

Respondent: I usually v.'ork from two to six.

Enumerator: Two to six for three afternoons - that would be 12 hours, wouldn't it?

Respondent: Yes, I guess you're right.

Enumerator: What kind of work do you do at Johnson's?

Respondent: I'm a clerk.

Enumerator: What type of clerk - an office clerk, sales clerk, invoice clerk ?

Respondent: I'm a sales clerk.

Enumerator: Is this occupation your usual occupation?

Respondent: Oh no. I've only been working for; the past month. Keeping house usually

keeps me quite busy, but since Mother has come to live with us I have
time to spare.

Enumerator: Then the only work you have done for wages or salary is three afternoons
a week for the past month?

Respondent: That's right.

Enumerator: V/hat v/ere your total money earnings for the v«eeks you worked as a wage-
earner?

Respondent: My pay is ten dollars a week. Of course I don't get that much.
They take off ;s;i.75 in deductions.

Enumerator: W\at did your mother do mostly during the week ending June 2nd?

Respondent: She helped me with the housev;ork and looked after the house on the
afternoons that I vrarked.

Enumerator* In addition did she do any v/ork for pay or profit during this week?

Respondent: No.

Eniunerator: Thank you very much Mrs, Wilson, I think, those are all the questions
I have to ask about the persons in your household.

Respondent: What about my daughter? Do you not need to knoiir more about her?

- 110 -

Enumerator: No/ she is under 11+ years of age, so I have all the reqtiired informa-
tion for her. However, I must ask if there are any blind or deaf
persons in this household.

Respondent: No. Mother doesn't hear as well as she did, but I don't think you'd
call her deaf. We tell her she doesn't miss much.

EnxMerator: Thank you very much.

- Ill -

Key to 2nd Practice Narrative

Population Document

Form 2

Form -2

Form 2A

Question

Wilson
John Frederick

Wilson
Marjorie Ann

V/ilson
Mary Jane

McLeod
¥sr^ Catherine

Worked

Keeping House

No entry

Keeping House

21 •

No entry

Yes

No entry

No ■

35 or more

1 = 14

No entry

Wilson's Hardware
Store

Johnson's Dept.
Store

No entry

Retail Hardware
trade

Retail Department
Store

No entry

Owner

Sales Clerk

No entry

Yes-

No- Keeping House

No entry

Emploj'-er

V/age or Salary
Earner

No entry

Under 10

No entry

Under 500

No entry

- 112 -

XI. THE INDIVIDUAL POPULATION FORM
(Form 5)

Points to dover

1, V/hen to use

2. How to use

Procedure

3. Enumerator's
duties before
leaving Form 5

* Have at hand your copy of Form 5 and

■ display it before the group, ,

Explain that the Individual Population Form (Form 5)
.is to be used .only vrfien it is impossible
to get the required information concern-
ing a member of the household -

(i) by personal interview (including
call -backs) or
(ii) by some other member of the house-
hold supplying the -information.

Such persons might be boarders or lodgers, etc, who
possibly vrork on shifts or are temporarily absent and
cannot be contacted by call-backs and about whom other
members of the household can supply little or no
information.

Emphasize that it is to be used only as a last resort
when no other means of obtaining the
information is available,

* Have trainees find their copies of the
Form 5 in their Enumeration Portfolios
and allow a minute or two for study of it.

Point out that (i) it provides for written ansv;ers to

all essential questions on the
Population documents (Forms 2 or 2A).
(ii) it is bilingual in form and may be
completed in either English or

. ■ French..- -. .

(iii) instructions for the proper method
of completion are contained on the

- form. ...

(iv) it is self -sealing, so that all
entries may be kept confidential,
(v) upon being completed it is to be
sealed and given to a responsible
member of the household, to be
picked up by the entmierator at a
specified time.

Explain that before leaving. a Form 5, the enumerator must
make certain entries.

* Have trainees follow their copies as you
point out that they must enter in the
space provided:-

-113 -

Points to cover

4. T - Enumeration

Procedure

5. Remarks on
Visitation
Record

(a) the province

(b) the District number
(c).the Sub-district number

(d) the dwelling number where
the form is left

(e) the name of the person by
whom the form is to be

. completed

(f) the earliest date on which
the form can be picked up

Note -. In studying the form at this point trainees
may wonder about the section marked "For
Special T - Enumeration only,"

Explain that T - Enumeration is a special enijmeration
of large hotels, boarding-houses, ;, etc,,,. ■
with which most enumerators will, notj: be
concerned, , -. t r-..-

However . should it be necessary, to.
leave the occasional form in the smaller
hotels, etc., the required information
concerning that hotel should be entered
in the space provided under "For Special
T - Enumeration only." Further instruc-
tion regarding the enumeration of hotels
will be given later.

Emphasize. that (i)

(ii)

an entry must be made in the
"Remarks" column of the Visitation
Record, each time a Form 5 is left,
a tick-mark must be made opposite
this entry when the form is picked
up.

6. Enumerator's
duties on
picking up
Form 5

* Have trainees note entry for dwelling
"003" on the Specimen page of the
Visitation Record,

It is most important . that this entry be made, since it
is the enumerator's only way of remembering where and
when to call back and pick up the completed Form 5.

Instruct enumerators, on picking up Form 5, -

(i) to examine it before leaving the dwelling,
(ii) if information is missing, or appears to need
clarification, question the head or some
responsible person.

- 114 -

Points to cover

Procedure

7. Transcribe
information
on to a
Population
dociment

(iv)

(iii) if he cannot supply the missing data or clarify

the entry, leave a new fonn. Mark the particular
items which need attention with an (x) and attach
a note stating that the second form is being left
for reasons of secrecy and that further informa-
tion is required only for the marked questions.
In cases where the respondent has obviously mis-
understood the question, explain clearly what you
want.

for your own reference, attach a note on the
first form, as follows, - "Incomplete - second
form left". On the return of the second Form 5,
transcribe the information to the proper doc\jment,
attach the two Forms $ and file as indicated
belowo

Explain that after receiving a properly completed Form 5,
the enumerator must -

(i) transcribe the information correctly
either to a Form 2 or Form 2A. as
is required,
(ii) file the Forms 2 with their respective
households and the Forms 2A, with the
other completed Forms 2A.
(iii) tick-mark the Form 5 to show that the
Population document has been completed,
(iv) file until returned with other Census
forms to the Field Supervisor.

Note - The transcription of this form to the Population
document should be done at home, not at the time
the form is picked up.

- 115 -

XII. BLIND AND DEAF SCHEDULE

(Form 3)

Points to cover

1. IVhen to use

2. Definition of
blind and deaf

(a) Blind

Procedure

* Have a copy of Form 2 and Form 3 at hand.
Instruct each enxomerator -

(i) to inquire y after completing the last population
document for each household, whether there are
any blind or deaf persons living in that household.

(ii) to make an entry on Form 3 for every blind or
deaf person found.

* Point out, on the enlarged Form 2, the
reminder found on the reverse side of
the docioment in the lower right-hand
section. Have trainees note this on
their own copies.

Be sure to
fill out a
Form 3 for
any person
enumerated
in this
dwelling
who is
TOTALLY
BLIND

OR
DEAF

Explain that a person who simply cannot see or hear very
well is not necessarily included on Form 3.
The method of deciding who are to be enumera-
ted as blind or deaf is outlined at the top
of the schedule.

* Have trainees find their copy of Form 3
in the Enumeration Portfolio,

* Point out and read the definition of
■ Blind thereon.

- 116 -

Points to Cover

Procediire

(b) Deaf

Blind and deaf
in institutions

How to complete
the form

(a) Heading

Blind . - Include as blind any person who
cannot see to read the letters in the
centre block of this schedule at a
distance of one foot, with glasses on,
if worn. Give the test in good light..

For children under school age and
for illiterate persons, the test must
be whether they can identify the images
in the centre block at a distance of
one foot.

Do not include persons who are
blind in one eye only.

*Read the definition for the Deaf as
follows':-

Deaf a- This refers to persons who are
totally deaf, i.e., persons who have no
usable hearing. Do not include persons
who are partially deaf, such as those
who can hear vrith the help of a
mechanical aid.

Instruct enumerators not to eniimerate blind or deaf persons

who are away from home in institutions
or schools for the blind and deaf.
These persons are to be enumerated at
the institution.

* Have trainees note that the above instruction
is also on the Form 3o

Tell trainees to use the ball point pen in completing this
form.

Remind them, again, that entries must be clear and legible.

* Have trainees follow their copies of the
Fonn 3 as you explain how the various entries
are to be made.

Explain that the first entry is to be made at the top of
the schedule and includes -

(i) Province
(ii) District No,
(iii) Sub-district No,
(iv) Municipality

- 117 -

Points to oover

(b) Schedule
entries

Column 1,

Column 2.)

and )

Column 3#)

Colximn 4».

Column 5»

Column 6,

5 • Form 3 is
bilingual

6, Carry Form 3
in ring binder

Procedure

It is most important that these entries be made or^ every
schedule- and that they be correct. Whether there are any-
other entries on the form or not, this heading must be
completed and the schedule returned with your other forms,

'Instruct trainees to use one line, and one line only for

each person emm?ierated.

The entries will be made as follows:-

Household Nrmiber - This must be identical with the number

entered for Question 4 on Form 2.

Name of person)

and ;

Address )

These entries must be exactly as on the
Population document.

State whether - Enter whichever term is applicable,
blind, deaf, or
blind and deaf

Age at last
birthday

The age must be identical with the age
entered in Question 6 of the Population
document ,

Age when person - Enter the age at which the infirmity >>.
became blind or began. If it began in infancy, enter
deaf "At Birth".

When you arc satisfied that you have reported all cases of
blindness or deafness in your area, check Form 3 to make sure
your entries are complete and sign the form in~the specified
space at the lov;er right-hand corner of the schedule.
This signature must be entered v/hether there are any entries
on the form or not.

* Have trainees note that Form 3 is bilingual.

Explain that should an enumerator need more space than is
provided in the language in which' he is
enumerating, he must use the reverse side and
draw attention to this fact in the margin.
Should an extra form be needed, he should
. contact the Field Supervisor.

Instruct trainees to carry Form 3 in the inside back pocket
of the ring binder throughout the enumeration.

* Demonstrate the manner in which the folded
Form 3 fits into the pocket of your ring
binder.'

- 118 -

LIVE STOCK AND GREENHOUSES
ELSElf/HERE THAN ON FARMS
(Form 7)

Points to cover

Procedure

1, When to use
. Form 7

* Have trainees find the copy of Form •
7 in their Enumeration Portfolios and
follow it as you instruct.

Point out that the instruction as to when Form 7 is to
be used is printed on the upper left-
hand corner of the form for ready
reference .

* Read the following from Form 7.

This form 'is- to- be' used for reporting
live stock- and'-greenhouse production on;

(1) All plots under 1 acre .

(2) Other plots under 3 acres, _
if., the agricultural produc<»»
tion in 1950 was less than
$250,

Emphasize that-- . .• ■"'■\

(a) Agricultural operations on places of 3
.acres or more must be reported on Form
'i^TrHSA (Newfoundland), not on, Form 7.

(b) Every household not living on a farm
(particularly in cities, towns and
villages) must be asked v/hether they .
have any of the items listed on this

• schedule . '

2, How to complete
Form 7

Explain that
(a)

(b)
(c)

(d)

The ball point pen is to be used in com-
pleting Form 7o

All entries must be clear and legiblOt-c
On every form used, the first entries to
be made will be those in the upper right-
hand corner for -

(i) Province
' (ii) Electoral District No.
(iii) Enumeration Sub-district
(iv) Municipality

is the owner or person in

Mo.

The
charge

"occupier"

- 119 -

Points to cover

Procedure

(e) The "Name of Occupier" should be entered in the
saiae laanner-as the name of the -household head on-
. the Visitation Record, i.e., surnauie printed first,
followed by the given name and— initial Si ^

(.f) One line only is to be usted for each "occupier".

Emphasize the following details :-

(a) Area of Plot (Golmnn 1)

' ■' ' (i) Report the area to the nearest tenth acre,
(ii) If less than one-tenth acre, report one-
..■■.'. . tenth. acre.

(iii) Never make entries on this schedule for
plots of 3 acres or more.

(b) Horses, Cattle, Poultry, Goats, and Swine

(1) Re Dort these' classes of live stock
■'where found, regardless of ownership.
Do not forget horses found in bakeries,
■ ' • dairies, etc,

(i) Report in Column 13, the number of hives
owned by the person enumerated, regard-
less of where the hives of bees are •
located.
■' Example - Roger White owns 6 hives of
bees which are located on
Paul Bernard's farm,
Roger White not Paul Bernard
. will be reported on Form 7
as the occupier,
(ii) Report in Column l^., honey produced by
bees owned in 1950,

'.. .(d),CattlG, Poultry, and Swine Sold Alive or

• . ■ ■•' . •

Slaughtered for Sale in 195O
• Exclude (i) animals sold by drovers or
live stock dealers, unless
such animals or poultry were
kept for some time and fat-
tened for re-sale,
(ii) animals slaughtered for sale
immediately after purchase.

(e) Cows' Milk, Butter, Eggs, and Gtoats' Milk
Produced in I950

(i) Report only the products of this plot,
(ii) Quantities purchased for re-sale are
not to be included.

- 120 -

XIV/ CffllSUS OF DISTRIBUTION
(Form 10)

Points to Cover

Procedure

The purpose of
. Form. 10

When to use .
Forms IDA, lOB
and IOC

* Have trainees find Form lOA in their
Enumeration Portfolios and follow it
closely as you instruct.

Explain that Form 10 (the Enumeration Folio for the Census
of Distribution) is, in reality, a record of
all retail, wholesale and service establishments
in the country. It will provide a list of
establishments to which forms will later be
mailed to complete the Census of Distribution,

Tell trainees that this Folio has been printed in three
different sizes -

Form IQA - (the form which is in the Enumera-
tion Portfolio) - has space for
recording 24 establishments.

Form lOB -has space for recording 48
establishments.

Form IOC - has space for recording 96
establishments.

Explain that (a)
(b)

the size varies with the type of area to
be enumerated,

in certain areas the only Folio required
will be the one which is already in the
. Enumeration Portfolio, Care should),
therefore, be taken during the training
sessions not to mar it in any way,

(c) in .other areas, one or more larger Folios
will be needed. These vri.ll be found in
the boxes of enumeration supplies which
will be distributed before the end of the
training. In such areas the enumerator
should use the larger Folio(s) first,
keeping the training one as a spare.

(d) should further spare copies^ be needed, they
may be obtained from the Field Supervisor.

(e) xmder no circximstances should a Folio
contain listings for more than one sub-
district.

- 121 -

Points to cover

3 . General

instructions

4. Definitions

(i) Retail

Establishment

Procedure

Remind trainees that the same rules regarding > .

(i) completeness of
coverage
(ii) legibility
(iii) accuracy and

secrecy pertain
equally to this
form as to other
Census forms.

* Have trainees turn to Page 1 of the Instruc-
tions on the inside cover of the Folio, Read
as follows:-

1, COMPLETENESS - It is important that your list-
ing be absolutely complete.

List every establishment (place of business) .
which could possibly be placed within any of
the classes defined on the next page of these
instructions. Include establishments even
though their sales may be very small. If there
are office buildings in your enumeration area,
canvass all of them thoroughly in order that
no establishment may be overlooked.

* Suggest that the remaining general Instruc-
tions be read by the trainees at home,

* Have trainees turn to Page 2 of the Instruc-
tions on the inside cover of the Folio and
read the following definitions :-

An_^_establishir.ent which sells merchandise at retail
prices directly to the public.

In addition to the ordinary kinds of retail estab-
lishments easily recognized, there are also many
which may be overlooked because of their nature.
Chain and department stores; gasoline filling
stations; retail lumber, coal and wood yards j
restaurants; retail florist shops; optometrists;
co-operative stores and appliance stores operated
by public utility companies are all examples of
these special kinds of establishments.

= 122

Points to cover

Procedure

(ii) IVholesale

Establishment

(iii) Service

Establishment

(iv) Concessions

(v) Not to be
listed .

All distributors of merchandise between the' manu-
facturin/?: plant or primary producer on the one
hand and the retailer or industrial, commercial.
professional or other large user on the other.

Included, in addition to regular wholesalers and
jobbers, are such kinds as manufacturers' sales
branches (apart from plant); suppliers of indust-
ry, commerce, professions, governments and
institutions; agents and brokers; importers and
exporters; petroleum bulk tank stations; co-
operative marketing associations; grain ielevators;
buyers of farm or primary products; brev/ers'
warehouses; and film exchanges o

An establislrmient which provides some form of
sei'vice directly to the public.

There are six main groups of establishments :-
(l) Personal Services; (2) Repair Shops; (3) Busi-
ness Services; (4) Entertainment Services; (5)
Hotels and Totirist Camps; and (6) Other Services,

Emphasize the two following Instructions particularly.

A number of stores, hotels and other establish-
ments contain departments, concessions or busi-
nesses, which are operated independently of the
main establishment. Since these concessions are
often very difficult to identify, you are advised
to inquire whether or not any department of the
establishment is leased to an independent operator
on all occasions. Any such concessions should be
listed immediately following the main establish-
ment o

(a) ANY ESTABLISHMENT ENGAGED PRINCIPALLY OR
ENTIRELY IN MANUFACTURING,

(b) Professional services such as doctors, den»
tists, lawyers, accountants, etc.;

(d) Public utilities- such as electric ' light,
telephone, gas, railroad and airline com-
panies;

- 123 -

Points to cover

Procedure

Partial list of
establishments

Complete forms
in duplicate,
using a ball
point pen

(e) Financial houses such as insurance companies,
real estate brokers and dealers, stock
brokers, bond houses and banks.

A Have trainees turn to Pages 3 and 4 of
the Instructions.

k Allow time for a brief study of these
lists.

Emphasize that (i) these are partial lists and, therefore,

not necessarily complete
(ii) these lists should be studied carefully
by enumerators before beginning
enumeration.

Instruct trainees to use their ball point pens when filling
out these forms. This is necessary since

carbon co

£163

must be made.

Enumeration
procedure

(a) Entry on
cover

i Have trainees examine the manner in which
the carbon fits between the paper and card
pages. Point out that the carbon is at
present protected by a full-length sheet
of paper. Instruct the trainees at this
point to tear this off half way, so that
it will not interfere with future enumera-.
tion. Demonstrate the method in front of
the class, using your own copy;

Emphasize that enumerators must (i) write clearly on the

paper. page, which is
the original,
(ii) press hard enough to

give good carbon copies,
(iii) make certain the carbon
is always in the proper
position before starting
to write, so that the
entries will be dupli-
cated on the following
card page.

Mention the fact that the largest Form 10 (i.e,. Form IOC)
will contain an extra carbon, which
should be used where necessary,

A Have trainees look at upper right-hand
corner of the Folio cover.

Emphasize that it- is of utmost importance that these entries
be made on every Folio used.

- 124 -

Points to oover

(b) Method of
approach

Procedure

instructions

(i) Office

space to be
left blank

(ii) CD and SD

(iii) Item 1
Name of
Firm

(iv) Items 2-5
Bus .
Address

Explain that the last entry shows the number of books used
and is particularly important. Thus if
two books are used, the entry vrould be
"1 of 2 books" or if 3 books, "1 of 3
books". If only one book is used, the
entry vdll be' "1 of 1 book".-

Instruct trainees, upon entering an establishir.ent -

(i) to ask to be directed to someone in
authority,
(ii) to introduce himself as Census
enumerator
(iii) to present his Identity Card
(iv) to proceed to ask for the required
information,

* Have trainees turn to the first page of
Instructions on the inside cover of the
Folio.

Point out that specific instructions concerning the

completing of each entry have been printed
here for their convenience. These instruc-
tions should be studied by the enumerator
and used as a reference on the field,

* Have trainees examine the first page of blank
forms and follow each item as you explain
the method of comipleting it.

Explain each item as follows:-

(i) The spaces in the box in the upper right-hand
corner are to be left blank. These are for
office use only.

(ii) The correct District and Sub-district numibers must
always be entered.

(iii), Enter as Name of Firm, the business name of the
establishment, as it is generally known,

(iv) Enter as Business Address, the complete address

of the establishment, i.e

Street number and name

- Name of City, Town or

Municipality

- County (only if in

Quebec)

- Province

- 125 - ■

Points to cover

Procedure

(v) Item 6
Name of
Proprietor

(vi) Item 7
H.O.
Address

(vii) Item 8
No. of
units

(viii) Item 9
French
Form

(ix) Item 10
Type of
Business

(x) Item 11
Kind of
Business

(xi) Item 12
Vol.

(v) The Name of Proprietor may be a

. - single individual

- two or more partners

- a limited or incorpora-
ted company

(vi) Enter the complete Head Office Address, if this
company operates two or more establishments.

If,, however, mail should be sent to an address
different from that given in Items 2-5, enter
this mailing address in Item 7.

(vii) Enter the number of establishments operated by
this company in Canada,

(viii) If mail should be sent in the French language,
place a check or tick mark ( v/) in the box in
Item 9.

(ix) Place a check or tick mark (/) in the box in
Item 10 which most closely describes the type
of business conducted.

Note - If two or more types apply, check the

one accounting for the largest percentage
of sales.

- If it is impossible to describe certain
establishments, check the box "Unspecified"
and explain the difficulty in Item 11.

(x) State the kind of business carried on.

Note - If difficulty arises in classifying the
establishment, refer to Pages 3 and 4
of the Instructions, "Partial list of
establishments".

(xi)

Item 12 describes the annual sales of the
establishment according to the respondent's
interpretation. This question must be carefully
worded and specific sales figures should not be
requested.

* Have trainees follow as you read the suggested
approach to this question set forth in Item 12
of the Instructions,

- 126 -

■ IB— ■! ■W^MIII*'*

Points to cover

Procedure

7 . General
discussion

— ,- "We would like to classify your annual
sales (or receipts) under three broad headings;
under $30,000; between $30,000 and $150,060;
and over $150,000, . Would you please tell me
in which category you beldng?"

Note -. The entry, in the box should be the letter
which best describes the response given to
the above question, thus

- "S" for Small (under $30,000)

- "M" for Medium (between $30,000 and

$150,000)

- "L" for Large. (over $150,000)

* If time permits give an opportunity for
questions and review with questions such
as the following.

* Ask: IVhile enumerating, you come upon a large

industrial plant. Do you enumerate this
for Census of Distribution purposes? Why?.

Ans. No. You do not list an establishment
engaged principally or entirely in
manufacturing.

* Ask: If you have a department store in your

Sub-district, do you enumerate it for
Census of Distribution purposes? Why?

Ans. Yes. It is an establishment which sells
merchandise at retail prices directly to
the public.

* Ask: You have a bank in your enumeration area.

V/ill you enumerate it for Census of
Distribution purposes? Why?

Ans, No. Financial houses, such as banks, etc.,
are not listed.

* Have trainees complete Practice Exercise E if
tine permits. If time does not permit, assign
it for completion at. home.

m- ' ' > ci

- 127 -

Praetloe Exerolae E.

Direct iona - Uark (x). in the box opposite the correct answer.

1« During enumeration, you come across a sales branch operated by a
manufacturing company, whose plant is located in another city.
Do you

(a) disregard the establishment? F~]

(b) list it as a retail establishment? n

(d) list it as an unspecified establishment? O

2, During enumeration, you are confronted with a building apparently

entirely devoted to doctor's offices, according to its name and office
directory. Do you

(a) check personally to make sure that the occupants are all doctors? IS

(b) list all the doctors separately? Q

(d) disregard the doctors, but list any nurses they may employ? O

3» Upon entering a hotel, you discover that it contains a restaurant -^^
operated by the hotel, and a beauty parlour emd newsstand, operated
independently. In addition to listing the hotel, do you

(a) list the newsstand, beauty parlour and restaurant separately

as retail establishments? □

(b) list the newsstand as a retail establishment and the beauty

parlour as a service establishment? |^

(o) list the newsstand and restaurant separately as retail
establishments, euid the beauty parlour ias a service
establishment? Q]

(d) list the restaurant as a retail establishment, omitting the

newsstand and beauty parlour? [~1

- 128 -

A, Upon enumerating an establishment, you ascertain that its yearly sales
are divided roughly in the following proportions: retail-305J; whole-
sale-459S; service-25^. Do you

(a) list it as a retail establishment? Q

(b) list it as a service establishment? CD

(d) list it as a wholesale establishment? |^

5» While canvassing a commercial building, you discover an office occupied
by a jobber, who buys and sells bulk goods without ever handling them.
Do you

(a) list his office as a retail establishment? D

(b) disregard the establishment? Q

(d) list his office as an unspecified establishment? □

6, ; When enumerating a small commercial building, you find that it contains
a bank, a chartered accountant's office and an advertising agency. Do
you

(a) list the three establishments separately as service ones? tU

(b) list the advertising agency only as a service establishment? Kl

(d) list the bank only as a service establishment? rn

7. Vflien enumerating, you enter a gas company store and notice that it
also sells gas appliances. For Census of Distribution purposes,
do you enumerate this particular store

(a) as a retail establishment? |^

(b) as a wholesale establishment? | |

- 129 -

XV. HOUSING DOCmiENT
(Form U)

Points to cover

Procedure

1. Why a Housing

Census

2. Nature of the
Housing Census

A Have at hand a ring binder and jacket of
documents,

A See that the enlarged Form U is hung in a
suitable place and mark it as the train-r
ing proceeds, as you did during' the in-
struction on the Population document.

In answer to this question, explain that -

(a) just as the Population Census provides for the
recording of facts about people, so the Housing
Census records facts about dwellings,

(b) these facts give a picture of the conditions in
which Canadian people live, showing -

(i) the quality of our housing
(ii) the kind of facilities and
equipment used in our homes,

(i) those concerned with town planning
(ii) the manufacturer and distributor in
analyzing markets
(iii) those who assess the fuel require-
ments of the nation
(iv) those interested in the social and
economic progress of the Canadian
people.

Explain that the Housing Census will be taken by the

sample method,- ■ Thus, Housing questio'ns' will ■
be asked only at every fifth dwelling Instead
of at every dwelling enumerated.

Point out that it should be easy to remember which dwell-
ings to enumerate aa each sample dwelling
has been marked on the Visitation Record,

± Have trainees exaxnine the Visitation Record,
noting that all dwellings ending ,-in "2" or
"7" have been circled, .t-v'.. 7':.iHA

■■;.'.:b\.',.i:
Emphasize that -

(i) every circled dwelling must have a Housing
document
(ii) the dwellings must be listed strictly in the
order in which they occiir along the pre-
arranged route.

- 130 -

Points to cover

Marking the
document

Arrangeraent

of Housing

documents

When to ask the
"Housing questions

6, The Questions

1. and 2.
NAUS MID

ADDRESS

Procedure

Stress that both of the above instructions must be adhered
to strictly. Otherwise the sample will be
spoiled.

t Display a Housing document (Form 4), pointing
out its distinguishing feature, the yellow
stripe across the top.

The Housing document will be marked in the same manner as
the Population document, with a "mark sense" pen.

Emphasize that the same care must be taken in the marking,
since every error will be multiplied five
times,

A Display a jacket containing Population and
Housing documents.

Explain briefly that -

(a) each jacket contains 10 Housing documents
arranged behind the 100 Population documents,

(b) they will be placed in the ring binder at the
same time as the Population documents«

(c) if some Housing documents are still unused
when the 100 Population documents have been
used, they are to be removed from the binder
with the others and replaced in the jacket,

(d) should an enumerator ever need more than the
10 Housing documents to go with the 100 Popu-
lation documents, he will draw on this sur-
plus supply to meet his needs,

A Form 4 is to be completed for every sample dwelling
(i,e,, every "circled dwelling) immediately after the
questions relating to the household have been asked,
or, in other words, as soon as the required number of
Forms 1, 2, 2A, 3 and 5 have been completed.

The entries for Q,uestions 1 and 2 will be copied directly
from the Visitation Record or the Population document of
the household head. They must be identical with those on
Form 1 and Form 2,

A Have trainees examine the Specimen docu-
ments for Mrs, Martin and Mr, Roy, com-
paring the entries of Name and Address on
Form 4 with those on Forms 1 and 2.

- 131 -

Points to cover

3. DISTRICT NO.
and
SUB-DISTRICT NO.

4. DWELLING NUMBER

5. DWELLINa STATUS

(a) Occupied

Procedure

A Mark the enlarged sample for Mrs, Martin,

Warn enumerators not to forget to enter the name of the
institution, hotel,, camp, etc., if such
is being enumerated,

i. Have trainees note the entry on the Specimen
document, Page 21, of Form 12,

Point out that,

since the Housing documents are not
serially numbered, it is most important
that the correct District and Sub-district
numbers be entered here as identification.
This should be checked with the entry on
the front cover of the Visitation Record,

± Mark the enlarged Form 4,

Remind trainees that -

(i) the dwelling number must agree with the circled
number on the Visitation Record and with the
household number on the Population documents
for members of this household,

(ii) the dwelling number will always end in "2'* or
"7"« For this reason only "2'» and "7" appear
in the third column of i^uestion 4, .

(iii) one (and only one) entry must be made in each
column^

i. Mark 0-0-2 on the enlarged sample.

Point out that under this heading all dwellings are

classified into the four groups listed
on the document.

Explain each as follows:-

(a) "Occupied"' will be marked for all dwellings
which are being lived in at the time of your
visit, including those not yet fully con-
structed,

A Review the definition of a dwelling as
found in Section 1, Page 12 of the .
Enumeration Manual,

- 132 -

Points to cover

Procedure

A dwelling is a structurally separate set

of, living premises, with private entrance from
outside the building or from a common hallway
or stairway inside. The entrance must not be
through anyone else's living quarters.
Each single. house; each apartment or suite in
an apartment house, duplex, triplex or structur-
ally converted single house; each flat in a
building containing flats; each half of a
double house; and each section of a row or
terrace; counts as one dwelling unit, whether
occupied or not. If occupied, other structures
such as summer cottages, automobile trailers,
tents, cabins, railway cars, houseboats, etc.,
also count as dwelling units.

(b) -Closed "^ ■'-'■..

(Household
temporarily

,;,,rej3;idijng^.;
elsewhere.;) ,-,

Point out that in most cases it will be easy enough to
decide whether the living arrangements con-
stitute a dwelling.

Remind trainees, however, that should difficulties arise
they should consult the Enumeration Manual,
where typical cases have been presented which
may assist them,

it. Have trainees turn to Section 50, Pages
61-63, in. the Enumeration Manual and
study the examples there depicted. If
time does not permit careful study,
merely refer trainees to this section
and suggest careful study at home,

.A Draw particular attention to the section
in italics, at the bottom of Page 60,

Where you find peculiar living arrangements
whloh do not fit the definitions and are not
covered in the instructions, use your own
judgment at the time, but consult your Field
Supervisor' at the first opportunity.

(b) "Glosed'rwiil" . be marked for dwellings which
. happen to. be. -Closed during the period of
enumera t ion :b'e cause the: household is tempor-
arily residing elsewhere (e.g., a household
which ha-s ..-.temporarily moved to a summer cottage).

Warn trainees not:, to confuse - \

(i) closed dwellings with vacant dwellings, or .•
(ii) closed dwellings with those where the occu-
pants are merely out for the time being,
i.e., those requiring a call-back.

133

Points to cover

Procedure

( c ) Under con- ,
St ruction
(not occupied)

(d) Vacant

Emphasize that, when in doubt j, enumerators should inquire
of neighbours to determine the true
status of the dwellings

. Instruct trainees that if they find a dwelling is really
. ^ "closed";, they must complete as many
questions on the Housing document as
possible from outside observation and
inquiries from neighbours^

Point out that the two bottom ovals are to be marked for
dwellings of a permanent type which were
not the home of any household on June 1^

Kote that this does not include such
unoccupied structures as summer cottages j
trailers and the likeo

A Using the enlarged sample p have trainees
" note the square bracket around these two
bottom ovals and the instruction to end
the enuraeration of the dwelling at that
point if either of these ovals is marked „

(c) "Under construction" will be marked for dwellings
from the time the foundation is begun until the
first occupants move inp No dwelling will be
considered as under construction which is

• occupied by a household <,

(d) "Vacant" will be marked for all dwell ings which
are fully constructed and suitable for occupancy «
but not the home of . any household on June 1^ I951,

Aids in recognizing vacant dwellings might be =
(i) "To Let" or "For Sale" signs
(ii) lack of curtains on windows
(iii) unkempt appearance of grounds ^ etc

A Have trainees study the Specimen docu-=
ment for the Martin dwelling ^ and mark
your enlarged copy accordingly^

Warn trainees not to include as "Vacant" unoccupied
houses which have fallen into such a
state of dilapidation that it is un-
likely they will ever be used for
human habitation againo

- 134 -

Points to cover

Procedure

6, TYPE OF DVi-ELLING

A You will need to budget your time very
carefully in this section. Do not allow
yourself to be drawn into lengthy dis-
cussions about unusual types of dwellings.
Stress the fact that it will be the easily
classified, normal type of dwelling with
which the enumerator will most often have
to deal,

A Have trainees examine (Question 6,

A Use the enlarged Form 4 to indicate the
following instructions.

Point out that -

(i) as in (Question 5, this question, too, is
divided into two parts.

(ii) one of the four upper ovals is to be
marked if_ the dwelling is of the
ordinary type - designed for one per-
son or a small group of persons,

(iii) the three lower ovals (enclosed by the
square bracket) are to be marked for
special types of dwellings such as
institutions, hotels and camps,

(iv) if one of the last three ovals is

marked, no further entry is required
on the document.

Emphasize that, to be able to classify dwellings by type,
it is essential to memorize the defini-
tions for dwelling and structure. The
definition for "dwelling" has already
been discussed.

A Ask: What is a dwelling?

Ans, A dwelling is a structurally separate
set of living premises with private
entrance from outside the building or
from a common hallway or stairway
inside. The entreuace must not be
through anyone else's living
quarters,

4 Have trainees turn to Section 11, (Question 7,
Page 17 of the Enumeration Manual and read
the definition for structure.

- 135 -

Points to cover

(a) Single
detached

(b) Single
attached

(o) Apt., flat,
etc.

Procedure

Definition - Each separate structure (a) is

completely separated on all sides
from any other structure or (b)
has a vertical wall or walls
extending from ground to roof,
completely dividing it from an
adjoining structure or structures.

Explain that, with these definitions in mind, it will not
be too difficult to distinguish between
the various types of dwellings,

A Define the various dwelling types as out-
lined below, indicating each oval on the
enlarged document as you speak of it,

A Illustrate each type with simple diagrams
on the BB if possible.

Single detached will be marked if -

(i) the dwelling is a single house. i,e., a house
used solely for residential purposes, and

(ii) it contains only one dwelling unit, and

(iii) it is completely separated on all sides from
any other building.

Single attached will be marked if -

(i) the dwelling occupies an entire structure from
ground to roof, and

(ii) adjoins another structure (or structures) from
which it is separated by a vertical wall (or
walla) extending fromr ground to roof.

Examples: (i) Each half of a semi-detached or
. - , Rouble house

(ii) Each section of a row of houses
(or terrace).

Apt,, flat, etc.. will be marked if -

(i) the dwelling is one of two or more located
in a structure used solely for residential
purposes, i,e,,

- in an apartment block

- in an apartment hotel

- in a duplex or triplex

- in a converted house

136 -

Points to cover

Procedure

(ii) the dwelling is located in a structure used for

both "residential and business purposes^ i^eoc ~

•■■■■•:

above or in the rear of = stores

: ■ ■ , = restaurants

"■■'..

= laundries

_ ■'. .■■:.-. ■■ ■ ■, •

■= other business premises

., •:;■'•■> ■ . •■ • - ■■ ■ •

■ .ote = One or two rooms used for business pur=

poses within the dwelling unit do not

necessarily change the dwelling from a

". -.'*: .. ■" ' ' ■ ' ' '

' "Single detached" or. "Single attached"

''■'■'

into an apartment or flat,, ThuSp rooms

' within a "Single detached" or "Single

attached" dwelling may be used by such

persons as music teacherSj, doctors^

etc op to carry on their business or pro-

■' '.

fession within the homes

A Have trainees note Case 5 on Bsige 68p of

the Enumeration Manual «

u;;.'ir' « .,''".- . •':;

Dwellings, located behind or over Chinese

o:::~ ,■■ --■'■ . '

laundries, corner groceries „ etc op willj on

'-. ^ . -■ ■- , ■%■

the other handp generally be classified as

;;fi,'.> , ■•

apartments or flats 9

r-io'il; «?;:'.;-. ^ ■ . V , •

.'i, Have trainees note Case 4p Page 68p of

the Enumeration Manual „

;••.-"";'■'. :.> j . :r- .- •. ■■■' ■ ■

In case of doubt as to the classification of

such dwellings^ the eniimerator will have to

reply on his own best judgment from on=the°

:i:.r' /.--v.. -■"•-..- :. ■ ^

■ • spot observationo ■

"!!■''- ' , '. ' ■'* .'. ' ■■ ■

(iii) the dwelling is a private dwelling in an institu=

tion„ --'Chool, warehouse;, churchy business build=

•■"■.■ ;-.•: ■■-.- ■'■ • -■■•-•

ingp ex-Co s i-'oQop' =' private quarters such as

those of superintendents or janitors within

= institutional structures

i:.--!--^---". '.i . "^ : ■■'

=■ warehouses

= business blocks

=■ schools

■'i — ^ i . ' ' f .".*■* ■ . ■■ .- ■

-. • - ■ I,-';" churchesp etc« -■"

(d) Other^-^-^' ^.... -- •

Other will be"marked If :the dwelling is of the xinusual

'",■•'■ . .'■■'.■.

typep such 'as f. = houseboat

„ = trailer

" tent

" " .„ ■= cabin

■=• shack

" railway car, etCo

- 137 -

Points to oover

(e) Institution

Procedure

Note - Sucti dwellings are mainly seasonal and designed
only for temporary or makeshift accommodation.
They will be counted only if occupied by persons
who have no other place of residence^

Institution will be marked only, if the dwelling falls in
the category of an institutional dwelling, as listed in
the Enumeration Manual,

4 Have trainees turn to Section 18, Page 2^,
of the Enumeration Manual, Gto "over Part T,
Institutions, and have them mark it for
special reference.

I Institutions -

(a) Hospitals and welfare

(i) General hospitals (including
nurses' residences)
(ii) Tuberculosis hospitals
(ill) Mental hospitals
(iv) Maternity hospitals
(v) Convalescent hospitals and
sanatoria
(vi) Hospitals and homes for veterans
(vii) Hospitals and homes for incur-
ables
(viii) Nursing homes

(ix) Homes for the aged ,and infirm

(x) Orphanages
(xi) Children's Aid Society shelters

(,b) Corrective and penal

(i) Penitentiaries

(ii) Jails

(iii) Reformatories

(iv) Industrial schools and farms

(i) Convents
(ii) Monasteries •. .-

(iii) Hutterite colonies
(iv) Boarding schools

Remind trainees to enter the name of any institution
enumerated, in the Address section of
the document.

- 138.-

Points to cover

Procedure

Explain that a- self-contained dwelling for staff, located

on institutional premises will be classi-

fied in the usual way as "Single detached".

"Single attached", "Apt,, flat, etc/'

(f ) Hotel, etca

Hotel, etCoj will be marked if the dwelling is list

3d as

such in the Enumeration Manual <,

A Have trainees study Part II Hotels, etc..

Section 18, Page 25, of the Enumeration

Manual, marking it also for special

reference.

II Hotels, etCo

(i) Hotels which accept transient

guests

(ii) Y,M,G,A,«Sp Y„W,C,A»'s, etc.

( iii) Glubs '

(iv) Missions ' '•

(v) Hostels •

(vi) Lodging houses with ten or more

rooms used or available for rent

(vii) College residences and fraternity

houses

(viii) Any residential building of the

dormitory type not heretofore

classified

(ix) Diplomatic residences

Emphasize particularly that only those lodging houses

with ten or more rooms used or

available for rent are to be

included in this category.

Smaller lodging houses will be

recorded as "Single detached"'.

"Single attached" or "Apt.,

flat, etc»," as the case may. be.

Remind trainees again that the name of the hotel must be

entered in the space provided in

(Question 2,

(g) Military

Military Gampj^ dumber Campj, etc., will be marked if

Gamp, Lumber

enumerating military camps,

Camp, etc»

luiaber camps, construction

camps, mining camps, etc.

& Have trainees mark Part III of Section 18,

Page 25 p of the Enumeration Manual, " -

- 139 -

Points to cover

Procedure

III Camps ~

(i) Military camps (Army, Navy, or
Air Force)
(ii) Lumber camps
(iii) Mining camps
(iv) Construction camps

Explain that this refers to bachelor quarters and
barracks in these camps. Separate
family quarters located in camps of
this type will be classified in the re-
gular manner, as "Single detached",
"Single attached", etc^

lit Have trainees turn to Sections I9-32,
Pages 25-29 in the Enumeration Manual,
Point out to them that much valuable
detailed information concerning the
enumeration of special type dwellings
is included in Sections I9-32 inclusive.
These. should be carefully studied at home '
and in the event of an enumerator having
to deal with any of these special types
in his area, he should discuss the
matter with you privately before the
start of enumeration,

A Have trainees turn to the diagrams of
the Special Cases on Pages 67 and 68,
of the Enumeration Manual,

Explain that although the majority of dwellings will fall
naturally into one of the seven categories
listed on the document, a few diff icult-to-
classify cases will arise. Two of these
cases have just been discussed. Others are
illustrated on Pages 67 and 68, of the
Enumeration Manual,

A If time permits study the diagrams, point-
ing out the reasons for thus classifying
the dwellings.

If time does not permit, suggest careful
study of these diagreuas at home,

A Have trainees note on the Specimen Form 4
that Mrs, Martin occupies an "Apt., flat,
etc," and mark the enlarged sample
accordingly.

- 140 -

Points to cover

7. NUMBER OF DWELLINa
UNITS IN THIS
STRUCTURE

Procedure

Explain that this question relates to the structure in
which the dwelling is located,

A Review the definition for structure as
found on Page 69, of the Enumeration
Manual ,

Each separate structure:

(a) is completely separated on all sides
from any other structure;

(b) has a vertical wall or walls extend-
ing from ground to roof and completely
dividing it from an adjoining struct-
ure or structures.

Emphasize that (i)

by definition each single detached
and single attached dwelling will
have only one unit and will there-
fore require an entry in the top
oval of Ciuestidn 7,

(ii) each "other" type of dwelling unit
will ordinarily be a separate
structure in itself and will also
require an entry in the top oval
of Question 7,

(iii) apartments and flats may have any
number of dwelling units in the
structure o Thus any oval may be
marked for "Apt,, flats, etc."

Note - Include "vacant" as well as "occupied"
dwelling units when counting the
number of units in the structure,

k Have trainees note on the Specimen Form 4.
for Mrs, Martin, that she apparently lives
in a duplex type of dwelling. Hence the
entry "Apt,, flat, etc,"^ in Question 6
and the entry "2" in Q,uestion 7. Mark
the enlarged sample document accordingly.

Point out to trainees that iiuestions 6 and 7 should

always be checked against
each other for consistency.

- 141 -

Points to cover

Procedure ;■

8. PRINCIPAL

Instruct trainees to enter this question, from their own

EXTERIOR

observation, unless -

MATERIAL OF THIS

(i) the dwelling, though occupied, is still

aTRUCTURE

under construction. In this case the

respondent must be asked to noiae the

material that will be used in the wall

construction.

(ii) it is difficult to determine the true

nature of the exterior material (e.g.,

whether or not it is imitation stone.

brick, etc.)

Point out that where one type of wall material is used

for the ground floor and a different

material for the upper stories, that

used for the ground floor will be re-

corded us the principal material.

9. IS THIS Dl'ffiT.T.TNG

Instruct trainees to enter this question also from their

IN NEED OF

own observation.

liiAJOR REPAIR?

They will mark "yes" in Question 9, if any of the

following defects are noted:-

(i) sagging or rotting foundations

(ii) faulty roof or chimney

(iii) unsafe outside steps or stairways

(iv) interior badly in need of repair.

Warn trainees (i) that one or two broken windows, or

lack of paint do not necessarily mean
that the dwelling is in need of major
repair.

(ii) not to confuse home furnishings with
the condition of the dwelling. V/orn
linoleum and shabby or broken furni-
ture are an evidence of furnishings
in need of repair not necessarily
the dwelling.

However, all such dwellings should be carefully observed
for other evidences of neglect,

± Have trainees note the entries on the
Specimen Forms for Questions 8 and 9,
Mark the enlarged sample document for
Mrs, Martin,

- 142

Points to cover

Procedure

10. IN 'rfCiAT YEAR DID

There should be no difficulty in obtaining an answer to

THE HEAD OF THIS

this question for households enumerated on Form 2,

HOUSEHOLD FIRST

OCCUPY THIS

Explain, however, that should the dwelling be occupied

DiVETJ.Il^G? •

by a household enumerated on Form 2A,

the year in which the usual residents

took occupancy should be entered. In

certain cases, it may be necessary to

consult neighbours to gain the re-

quired information.

. ± Have trainees examine the Specimen docu-

ments, noting that the entry for Mrs,

Martin is "19A.8-A9", Make the correspond-

ing entry on your enlarged document.

11, NUlffiEH OF ROOMS

Explain that this refers to the number of rooms in the

IN THIS DVffiLLING

dwelling used, or suitable for use,

as living quarters.

Include Dp not include

rooms occupied by - rooms used solely for

business purposes

- servants = clothes closets

- lodgers •= bathrooms

- members of - pantries

lodging families - halls

Include (if finished off and suitable for living

quarters throughout the year)

- summer kitchens

- sun-rooms

- rooms in basements

and attics

Include, also - kitchenettes, if (i) the normal

kitchen func-

tions are

carried out

therein.

(ii) they contain,

as a minimum.

cooking

facilities

( such as a

stove or

range ) , and
a sink or
tub.

- 143 -

Points to cover

Procedure

A Have trainees note on the Specimen Form li.
that Itrs, Martin occupies a ^-room dwell-
ings Mark the enlarged document accord-
ingly.

Draw attention to the fact that both columns must have an
entry 9

12. WATER SUPPLY

13, and 14,
BATH AND
TOILET
FACILITIES

Define the followingj-

(a) Piped water - means, for purposes of the Housing
Census, water which can be turned
on and off by means of a tap.

Note - Vfater from a hand pump located in
the dwelling is not "piped running
water",

•(b) Hot and cold piped inside (top oval) ■" applies

to dwellings equipped with se-
parate pipes for conveying hot
and cold water,

to dwellings equipped to supply
cold water only,

(d) Inside - means inside the dvjelling unit,

A Have trainees observe that the Martin
dwelling is equipped with cold water
only, Mark the enlarged document •
accordingly.

Define the following:-

(a) Installed bath and shower facilities are those
operated from a piped water source
and controlled by a tap and drain.

( b ) Exclusive use means for the use of the members
of that particular household only.
Thus, two families may use the same
toilet and bath facilities, but if
both these families are included in
the same household, the entry in
(Questions 13 and 14 will be
"Exclusive use".

- 144 -

Points to cover

Procedure

15.

PRIl^GlPiiL

■LIGHTING

FACILITIES

( c ) Shared use means shared with another household.

Examples - (i) Apartments which are

structurally separate,
but which are not
equipped with separate
toilet and bath facili-
ties. Households in
each dwelling must
"share" common wash-
rooms etc., located,
often, one on each
floor,

(ii) Certain types of
emergency housing
projects provide common
toilet and bath facili-
ties, for groups of
dwellings. In each of
these cases, each
dwelling would be con-
sidered as having
"shared use" of toilet
or bath facilities.

Stress again, the fact that "shared" with another

household must not be confused with the
use of the same facilities by one or
more families or persons such as lodgers
or servants within the same household.

A Have trainees observe how these instructions
are carried out on the Specimen documents.
Note that the Martin household has few
facilities and mark the enlarged document
accordingly, ;. '

Explain that, for the most part, this question may
be answered from the enuraerator's
own observation. This is particularly
true in urban areas. However, if
there is any doubt, the question
must be asked.

- U5 -

Points to cover

Procedure

Define the following:-

(a) Principal means the type of lighting facilities

used in most of the rooms in the
dwelling,

(b) Electricity (i»ower line source) is the method

16. aEli'RICJESATlON
FACILITIES

17. PRINGIPAL
OOOKINO
FA0ILITIB3

of lighting used in most urban homes
and many rural, i.e., the electric
lighting for the dwelling is con-
veyed by transmission lines from a
central generating source which
serves the community,

(c) Electricity (home generated source) covers all
cases where the dwelling is lighted
by electricity generated on the
property by a wind charger, Delco
plant, etc,

A. Have trainees note that the Martin dwelling
is lighted from. a power line source and
mark the enlarged document accordingly.

Explain that "Other" includes such devices or methods as •

- a spring house

- a cooler

° - a well cooler used to refrigerate

food

- an ice house with storage space
for perishable food.

Emphasize that "None" should be marked, if the only

source of refrigeration is -

- a window box in winter

- a root cellar

- an open spring

- a basement

A Have trainees check the entries on the
Specimen documents, Mark "ice-box" on
the enlarged document.

Make it clear that this ciuestion refers to the type of

ran^je or stove on vjhich the house-
hold dosa moat of its oooltln^.

Explain that if more than one type of stove is used, or

different ones in different seasons
(e.g., a range in winter and an oil
stove in summer), the respondent must
deoide which la the principal one.

- 146

Points to cover

Procedure , , ..

Point out that "Other" includes small grills and burners

- cookers

— - ' - fireplaces, etc.

and also - the occasional dwelling

with no cooking facilities

... , (such as may be found in

-■._ — ~-

•■■"■'■ apartment hotels).

A Mark "electric range" on the enlarged

docujiient for the Martin household.

ll.- !•' J-' , ■ ' -

&. Have trainees note that the Roy household

is equipped with a "gas range". Explain

: ■ .. , t . ' . ' ■ '

that "this may be bottled gas or natural

gas.

PRINCIPAL HEATINa

Emphasize that only one oval is to be marked in Question

FAGILrriES

18 and only cgae in Question 19,

. 18, E'4UIPIffiNT. . ■>

As in Question 17, if more than one type of equipment or,

19. FUE3L

fuel is used, the respondent must deci.de

in each case which is the principal one.

Explain that Central Heating Plant refers to a central

source which supplies heat to a community

■ " , ., ■

of homes, i.e., as a public utility, much

the same as electric power or gas. It

does not refer to, a furnace in the base-"

ment of a, block of apartments which heats

all the dwellings in that building.

Point out that "Other" in Question 18, includes -

- gas radiants

• : -' electric grates

-; fireplaces,

. etc. ,

'if these are the main source of heat.

- "Gas", in Question 19, includes both

utility gas (i.e., gas piped into

the dvjelling„.from '-mains

leading f ro,m a central

system) ,

and bottled gas.

It does not include gasoline.

- 147

Points to cover

SUPPLEMENTARY
'HEATING
FACILITIES ;

" '. 20. - 22.. ,

Procedure

Enumerators must ask Question 20 in every dwelling

23. LIVMO

GOI'iVENIiaJCES

enumerated' " "Is any other heating equipment used in
this dwelling?"

Explain that Supplementary Heating refers to equipment
(i) installed for heating a portion of a
dwelling
or (ii) used to supplement the main heating
unit during certain seasons of the
year.

Include cookstoves, ovens, electric grills, etc., if
used expressly as supplementary heating
■ ■ ■' equipment 9

Do -.not include fireplaces, etc., if used very rarely.

Note that. (i) Questions 21 and 22 will be answered
for every "Yes" in Question 2O9
(ii) if "No" is marked in Question 20,

Questions 21 and 22 will be skipped,
(iii) the entry in Question 22 must indicate
the main fuel used in the heating unit
reported in. Question 21,

■ . : . . ii Have trainees examine the Specimen docu-
ments noting the entries for Questions
18-22 inclusive. Mark the enlarged
Form A as indicated for the Martin dwell-
ing.

Emphasize that this is the OI^ILY question on the Housing
document for which more than one oval may be
marked .

Note the following points;- .

(i) The number of ovals marked will depend
upon the number of listed conveniences
which the household possesses,
(ii) "None of above" must be marked if the
household possesses none of the listed
conveniences,
(iii) If the household contains a lodging

family, include the living conveniences
of that family as well,
(iv) If the household is residing in the

dwelling only temporarily and its
members are enumerated on Forms 2A,
include only the living conveniences
of the permanent or usual residents.

- 148 -

Points to cover

Procedure

2k, TENUIS

(v) Washing machines or telephones, provided
for the common use of tenants in a
multiple dwelling structure must be
credited only to the owner ( in the case
of washing machines) or the subscriber
( in the case of telephones) if he re-
sides in the building. Otherwise,
they will not be recorded,
(vi) Car radios are not to be reported,

t. Have trainees examine the entries for this
question on the Specimen documents. Note
that the Martin household has none of
these conveniences and mark the enlarged
document accordingly.

Draw attention to the fact that questions 12, 13, 16,
and 23 all make provision for dwellings
having none of the listed facilities or
conveniences.

Emphasize that at no time is one of these columns to be
left blank because the dwelling lacks
that particular facility or convenience.
Rather, the oval provided to show this
must be marked ,

Explain that for practical purposes ownership by anyone
in the household makes it an owned
dwelling.

a Indicate on the enlarged Form 4 how the
answer to '4uestion ;24 determines which,
if any, of the remaining questions will
be asked.

Explain that Owner (Farm) or Tenant (Farm), as the case
iriay be, must always be marked j where
"yes" was marked in >iuestion 8 on the
Population document for members of the
household .

Note that the square bracket. indicates that if either
of these ovals is marked, no further
question on the Housing document is to
- be asked.

- 149 -

Points to cover

25. - 27. MOITl'HLY
HENT

Procedure

Point out that (i) if Owner (Non-Farm) is marked, only

i^uestion 28 need be asked further,
(ii) if Tenant (Non-Farm) is marked,
questions 25, 26 and 27 must be
asked.

Explain that

(i) to be considered owned , a house need
not be fully paid for; it may even
have a mortgage or other encum-
brances,
(ii) households in which the head is pro-
vided with free living quarters,
whether or not in return for ser-
vices rendered, are to be counted
as tenants.

Emphasize again, that these questions are to be asked
only if Tenant (Non-Farm) is marked
in Question 24.

Question 25 is to be asked in this way -

"liVhat amount of cash rent was paid or is to be
paid for this dwelling for the month of May,
. 1951?"

Point out the f ollowing:-

(i) Gash rent paid or. payable should be reported
regardless of whether it includes furniture,
fuel, electricity, water or private garage,

(ii) Only rental paid for the dwelling and house-
hold facilities is to be entered. If a com-
bined rental is paid for both dwelling and
business premises, deduct the estimated
rental for the business premises from the
total,
(iii) 'nVhere tvjo or more fafliilies or individuals are
' . living in the same dwelling, but pay renF
separately to the same landlord, calculate
the total payments made by all and mark the
appropriate oval..

(iv) The rent groups are in even. dollars. If the
rent paid involves a fraction, report it to
the nearest dollar,
(v) Rent-free is to be marked in the top oval.

(vi) Partly furnished dwellings will be marked
"yes" in Question 27.

- 150 -

Points to cover

Procedure

28. MORTGAGES

Eiriphusize again, that Question 28 is to be marked for
every dwelling having an entry in the
first oval of Question 2^ (i.e., for
each owner-occupied, non-farm dwell-
ing).

A dwelling will be considered mortgaged
if there are debts secured by mortgages,

- agreements for sale

- deeds of trust

- judgments or any other
legal instrument which
partakes of the nature
of a mortgage on the
dwelling.

Do not consider as a mortgage, debts
secured by liens on f.urniture, etc.

Explain that (i) the middle oval will be marked if any
mortgage , or unredeemed part of a
mortgage, remains against the dwelling,
the bottom oval is to be marked if

(ii)

there is also a second mortgage out-
standing.

ii. Have trainees exaraine the Specimen docu-
meiits, noting the manner in which the
above instructions have been carried out.
Mark the enlarged document for the
Martin household.

A Draw attention to the abbreviated in-
structions printed at the bottom of the
document. If time permits run over
them quickly as a brief review, using
the enlarged docuiaent to illustrate
the various points.

If time does not permit, suggest that
trainees study the points outlined at
home. Emphasize the value of these
instructions as a ready reference on
the field.

- 151 -

XVI. REVIEV/ AND QUESTION PERIOD .

1. As in the earlier Question periods, use this time to clear up questions
which may arise in connection with previous instruction.

2. Use the following review questions and practice exercises as they best fit
in with the time at your disposal. ■

Oral Review Questions relating to the Housing Document

Question

Answer

1. When will you enumerate
dwelling on a Housing
document?

2. With what other forms
should the entries in
Questions 1 and 2 agree?

3. With what will you check
the entry in Question 3?

4. What points should be
checked in Question 4?

5. How will you distinguish
between a "Closed" and
"Vacant" dv;elling?

6. If no one answers the door
when you call, will you
immediately mark the
dwelling "Closed"? Why?

1. Entimerate, on a Housing document, every dwelling
having a number circled on the Visitation
Record, i.e., every dwelling having a number
ending in "2" or "7" for which an entry has
been made,

2. With similar entries on Form 2 of the house-
hold head and the name and address on Form 1,

3. Check with the District and Sub-district
numbers on the cover of Form 1.

4. Question 4 should have -

(a) an entry in every colvmm

(b) only one entry in each column

(c) the entries in each column should agree
exactly with those in Question 4 on
Form 2 (i.e., -the household number),
for the members of the same household.

5. A "Closed" dwelling is one whose occupants are
temporarily residing elsewhere.

A "Vacant" dwelling is one fiilly constructed
and suitable for occupancy but not, on Jxme 1,
1951, the home of any household. It may be
that there will be a "To Let" or "For Sale"
sign or other visible evidences that the
dwelling is vacant, or it may be necessary to
inquire of neighbours whether the household
is temporarily absent or the dwelling is vacant,

6. No, The household may be just absent for the
time being and it may be necessary to kake a
call-back.

- 152 -

Question

7. When is a dwelling considered
"Under Construction"?

8. What entry vdll you mark in
Colimm 5 for a dwelling not yet
completed, but in which a house-
hold is living?

9 . What oval will you mark in
Question 6 for

(a) a lodging house with 15
rooms for tenants

(b) a bungalow whose owner
is a contractor and uses

■ one room as an office

(d) a county jail •

(e) a diplomatic residence

(f) an apartment in an apart-
ment hotel

(g) Salvation Army hostel

(h) a dwelling situated behind
and over a Chinese laundry

10, If orte of the three last ovals
in Question 6 is marked, what

■ further entry must be made in
Question 2 on the document?

11. What must you do if the entry
-'ih Colimih 20 is (a) "Yes"?

(b) "No"?

12;- When will- you complete Ques-
tions 25 - 27?

13. When Vdll you complete Ques-
tion 28?

14. What portion of the Housing

' document will you complete if
enumerating an occupied farm
dwelling?

Answer

7. From the time the foundation is begun until
the first occupants move in.

8. Occupied

9. (a) Hotel, etc.

(b) Single detached

(d) Institution

(e) Hotel, etc.

(f) Apt., flat, etc.

(g) Hotel, etc.

(h) Apt., flat, etc.

10. The name of the "institution", "hotel",
"camp", etc., must be entered in Question
2.

11. (a) Complete Questions 21 and 22

(b) Skip to Question 23

12 i If the answer in Question 24 is "Tenant
(Non-farm)".

13. When the entry in Question 24 is "Owner
(Non-farm)".

14. Complete Questions 1- 24 inclusive, if
enumerating an occupied farm dwelling.

± Have trainees complete Exercise P', in class if time
permits, otherwise at home.

Directions -

. - 153 =
Practice Exercise F.

Write in, in the space provided, the correct answer to the following
questions.

. Answer

1, You are required to complete a Form :4. for Apt., 7 in
the (Jlenview Court, This apartment block c.onsists
of one structure containing I5 apartments for ten-
ants, plus a janitor's suite in the basement.
Apartment I5 has been vacant for. several months..

What entry would you make (a) in Question 5;. .(bj,
in Question 6; (c) in "Question 7?

2, In the course of your enumeration you come upon
an apartment building under construction. Upon
inquiry you find that it will cpntain 30 separate
dwellings. Two are already occupied by tenants. .,
You have completed 129 households, up to this
point. - ,, .

(a) How many Housing documents .should b.e completed
for this apartment building?

•.,; ... (b) ,If you complete a Form 4 for one- of. the: occut-
. • pied apartments, what entry would you make
.■,,:. for .Question 7?

(a),

ixU

■ i^ , ■;'";■.-.■*

I p.), 6 . ■ .■ - ;

3, You are completing a Form 4 for a two-storey
dwelling finished with brick veneer on the , ■
ground floor and clapboard on the second floor. .

What would be the correct entry in Question 8?

.«..• •••••• %,,t

^'V-Couee4/.

■ • • « •-.«.« « • • • «

• •••.•••• o

You are completing a Housing document for a
dwelling with a dingy appearance in general,
owing to the need of painting and rer-decgrating
both inside and out. Otherwise, however, it,, is
in sound condition. • ,, ,

What entry would you make in Question 9? .

.«.•.«» ... ..'....««'..«...,

5, You are enumerating on a Form '4, a large
dwelling laid out as follows:-

Ground floor - a vestibule, a front hall :
with stairs leading off from it, a living-room.-
and dining-room separated by a wide arch, a
large kitchen, a pantry, an unheated sun-room
used for living purposes from May till October,

- 154 -

Answer

2nd floor - 3 bedrooms, a small den or
sewing-room, and a bathroom, (One of the bed-
rooms is used by a lodger),

Attic - 2 bedrooms finished off and suit-
able for living purposes, but used only for
storage space.

Basement - a central area containing fur-
nace, coal-bin and a work bench, a small utility
room containing facilities for washing and dry-
ing clothes, a recreation or rumpus room fully
eq.uipped, and a second bathroom.

What would be the correct entry in Question 11?

6, Mr, A,, and his family live in a well-
equipped trailer located in a trailer camp.
Water is provided by gravity flow from a
tank in the trailer kitchen. Electricity
is obtained by plugging in to a power outlet
provided for the trailer camp by the
municipality. Common bath and flush toilet
facilities are provided ;f or residents of
the trailer community.

In completing Form 4 for this dwelling, what
would be the correct entries for :-
(a) <5tuestion 12; (b) Question 13;
(c) Question 14; (d) Question 15?

( a ) , . iXiTCft^^tY!^

( d ) , , , ^'ffT^iV^fv', ....*..

7. A dwelling is heated by a hot air furnace.
Coal fs used for fuel during the winter
months'^ but wood is burned during the fall
and spring. The dwelling also contains a
fuel fireplace, which, however, is very
seldom, used.

What would be the correct entry on Form 4
for (a) Question 19; (b) Question 20;
(c) Question 21; (d) Question 22?

(a).....<r.'^?f^..

(b) /^

( c ) . . f/r. /trtip:,

155 -

Answer

8. A farm home is owned by an elderly widower who
lives there with his married son and son's
feimily. The married son assumes full responsi-
bility for the maintenance of the house and the
farm.

What would be the correct entry for (a) Question
3 on the Population document of the married son?

(b) Question 2U on the Housing document?

(a),

.^^z<zU

■ jj \ CJLui^^^sjeA/ /v^Sxt-'v,*^

9, A tenant household, living in a large apartment
block, consists of one feuaily plus a lodger. There
is a telephone in the dwelling, and the fsunily
own a radio and hand-operated carpet sweeper. The
lodger owns a radio and an automobile. There is
no washing machine in the dwelling, but three
large automatic washers are provided in the base-
ment for the use of all tenants of the building.

In completing Form 4« what would be the correct
entry or entries for Question 23?

10, A rented dwelling is occupied by Mr, and Mrs,
Richards who pay the landlord a rent of $59 •50,
and Mr, and Mrs, White who sublet three fur-
nished rooms from the Richards, and pay a rent
of $45.

What would be the correct entry for Question 25?

0^O-6f

11, A single detached house is rented to 3 families,
each of which pays rent independently to the
landlord. The rents are $24, $32, and $35,
the latter rent including payment for the use
of a private garage on the property.

What would be the correct entry in Question 25
of the Housing document?

^/4P U».>^ yO-V^yV

12, A dwelling is rented for $59,25, The tenants
supply most of the furniture, but the owner
supplies a bed and a large console radio.

What would be the correct entries in (a) Question
25 and (b) Question 27?

(a)....^^^r.<X..

. - 156 -

■ ::..v,::.,^,,; XVII. 3.rd PRACTICE NAmTIVE

(Housing Document - Form 4).,

At this point, continue the emmeratioh of the V/ilson household'. .Remind trainees
that this household, whom they have already eiiuinerated' on PdpuLation documents,
i^ras the second household listed on the Visitation Record. Since the dvfellihg'
number is;>J.',G02!'-, a Housing document .must also be completed.

Give trainees tim.e to complete Questions 1 to 9 , explaining that it is unnecessary
tQ„,,ask.%hes,e;. gue^^^ Questions 1 to. 4! can be: obtained from, the Visitation

Rfecord,' Question ■ 5'is'seif_evident and in this case ciuestiohs 6 to 9 can be ansvjered
from their o^vn observations. Explain that the Wilson home is a single detached
dwelling, occupied by one househpld; .that its exterior. material is. brick and that
it is not in need of major repair,' ' " ,■..,■■..

Choose another suitable trainee to. take the part of "Enumerator", ... .■.' '[

; •;^ „•.: , ... -. ^ .. ■. . . ..... .. ■- .. ■•.

Proceed 'v/ith the" Narrative, ,. - , " " . '

., .^ . ''■>... .......

...v..

Enumerator: ' In 'liifhat'yfear did your husband first occupy this dv/ellihg, Mrs. Vifilson?

Respondent: My husband and I came here in 1947. It was almost a year. after John,
was discharged from.the. Air Force. . . ,. :

Enumerator: How many rooms are there in this dvfelling?.

Respondent: Well - There's the living-room, dining— room and kitchen downstairs.
■?• r-Upst.a.it'S we have two bedrooms, .the bathroom and a sun-rpom.

Enumerator: Is the sun-room finished off and suitable for. living, quarters .
throughout the year?' ..' . " ., . , ., , '.. '.[,. ' '. ,,.

Respondent: Oh no. We use it as arj ektra. bedroom' in the summer. but,. it's' much
too cold to use in the winter, _ .. ' '..,

Enumerator :iv.,,,.Do.v you Have hot and cold v/ater piped inside this dwelling"? .' „ . .
Respondent: Yes, V/e have both hot and cold water.

Enumerator: Do you have an installed bathtub or shov;er, firs. Wilson?; , ■ ..;.;,
Respondent: 'We have 'an installed ..bathtub, but no shower. _

- 157 -

Enumerator: Is this bathtub used exclusively by this household or is it shared
with another household?

Respondent: Well, since we're the only persons here, I guess you'd say we used
it exclusively.

Enumerator: Do you have a flush toilet, a chemical toilet, or other toilet
facilities?

Respondent: Yes, of course, v;e have a flush toilet.

Enumerator: Is this flush toilet for this household's exclusive use or do you
share it with another household?

Respondent: As I said, we're the only persons here. Are all these questions
necessary?

Enumerator: Oh, yes, indeed, - even though they may seem foolish to you, often
the answers are not so obvious as in your case. To make sure that
we get complete and uniform enumeration, we must make the same '
inquiries of everyone,

* Explain to the trainees that if they are enumerating in an urban area
and it is evident from their observation that the dwelling is electrically""" -'
lighted. Question 15 need not be asked. However, in doubtful cases, e.g., in
rural areas or in the case of unusual occupied dwellings, such as houseboats,
trailers, box cars, etc., Question 15 must be asked. In the case of the Wilson
household, the enumerator observes that "Electricity (power line source)" is the
correct oval to mark, and does so accordingly.

Enumerator: What refrigeration facilities do you have, Mrs, Wilson?
Respondent: We have an ice box, but we only get ice twice a week.

Enumerator: On what type of stove do you do most of your cooking?
Respondent: I have an electric stove.

Enumerator: What is the principal heating equipment used to heat this dwelling?'
Respondent: We have a furnace. Is that what you mean?

- 158 -

Enumerator: - Yes, that's right. Is it a steam, hot water or hot air furnace j '•" '
Mrs. Wilson?

Respondent: It's a hot air furnace. . -

Enumerator: What fuel do you use in the furnace?
Respondent: We use coal mostly.

Enumerator: Is any other heating equipment used in this dwelling?
Respondent: Well - we have a stove in the kitchen.

Enumerator: You mean a stove in addition to the electric stove on which you do
your cooking?

Respondent: Yes, a Quebec heater. We use it in the winter.

Enumerator: What fuel do you use in this stove, Mrs, Wilson?
Respondent: We use both coal and wood.

Enumerator: Which fuel would jrou consider to be the principal one used in this
. - , stove? . , .

Respondent: Oh, I guess we use more coal than wood. It's. hard to say.

Enumerator: Do you have a powered washing machine?

Respondent: Do you mean ari electric washing machine? '

Enumerator: Yes, or any motor-driven machine.
Respondent : We have an. electric machine .

Enumerator: An electric vacuum cleaner?
Respondent: Yes.

Enumerator: A telephone?

Respondent: No - We haven't been able to get a telephone yet, although dear knows
we've had our application in long enough.

- 159 -
Enumerator: Do you have a radio, Mrs. Wilson?

Respondent: Yes, a small one.

Enumerator: Do you have an automobile for passenger use, Mrs. Wilson?
Respondent: Yes, such as it is, .

Enumerator: Is this home owned or rented by a member of this household?
Respondent: It's rented.

Enumerator: What is the amount of cash rent paid or to be paid for this
dwelling for the month of May, 1951?

Respondent: We pay ^69. 5C a month. It's really too much rent for us but
it includes a garage, I' imagine that if we had to i^nt a
garage, it would cost us at least 1^5 '00 a month,

.Enumerator: Does this rent include heat?

Respondent: No, I wish it did. .

-Enumerator: Is this rented as a furnished dwelling?
Respondent: Oh, no - ail the -furniture is ours,

Enumerator: Thank you very much, Mrs, Wilson, I think that is all, and I
certainly have appreciate^ your co-operation.

- 160 -
Key to 3rd Practice Narrative (Housing)

Question

Answer

WILSON, John Frederick

45 Fifth Avenue

0-0-2

Occupied

Single detached

. ,8

Brick or brick veneer

No ■ "

■ 1946 - 47

" 11

0-5 ■ ': '

Hot and cold piped inside

Installed bathtub or shower (exclusive use)

Flush (for household's exclusive use)

Electricity (power line source)

Ice box

Electric range

Hot air furnace

^19

Coal

. Yes

Stove

Coal

Powered washing machine, electric vacuum cleaner,
radio, automobile (passenger)

Tenant (non-farm)

. 25

$70 and over

No Entry

- 161 -

XVIII o ENUMERATION TECHNIQUE
AND
FIELD PROCEDURE

Points to cover

Procedure

1. Conducting the
interview

(a) Introduction

(b) Use of Identity
Card

* Have trainees turn to Pages 29-35 in the
Enumeration Manual, marking Sections 33-41
for careful studyo

* Have an Identity Card ready for. display
purposes o

Explain that to a large extent the success of eniimeration
depends upon the attitude adopted by the
enumerator and the manner in which he conducts
the interviewo

Point out that no set pattern of interviewing will suit
every situation, since the enianerator will
be meeting all types of people.

Following, however, are a few rules to go by:-

(a) A pleasant, courteous, introduction.

At each dwelling the enumerator should intro-
duce himself somewhat after this manner, -

"Good morning, madam, I am the representative
of the Government of Canada appointed, to take
the Census in this locality, I should like
to eniamerate you and the members of your
household."

(b) Make use of Identity Card.

An Identity Card will be provided for each -
enumerator o This is the guarantee of his
official status and must always be available,

* Show the group an Identity Card, explaining
that each enumerator will be given one at
the end of the training sessions,

- 162

Points to cover

Procedure ,

(d) Put respondent at
ease, but be
business-like

(e) Be courteous and
. thoughtful at all
times

(f) If necessary,
arrange a
call-back

(g) Avoid enumerating
before a group

(h) Interview only-
responsible
members of the
' household

(i) Closing the
interview

■J a :n:'

2« How to deal' -with
difficult cases

(d) Make an effort to put the respondent at ease.
If necessary, establish a friendly relation-
ship by briefly discussing a topic of general
interest. On the other hand, avoid being
drawn into longp unnecessary conversations.
Adopt a business-like attitude, where need be,
to avoid wasting time in idle conversation «

(e) In all circumstances, courtesy and thoughtful-
ness are essentialo Obseirve such niceties as
removing your hat, brushing your feet, etc.
Always speak in a courteous manner, even though
you may not always receive the same treatment.

(f) If the call is made at an inconvenient time
for the household, arrange to call back at
another time. If a call-back is necessaiy,
be careful to retain the proper numbering of
the dvfelling on the Visitation Record.

(g) If possible, avoid enumerating before a group.
Stress the fact that the Census is confident-
ial and ask the respondent if you may interview
him alone o Speedier and more accurate results
will be thus obtained,

(h) Do not accept information concerning the mem-
bers of the household from a child. Avoid
accepting information concerning other members
of the household from servants (although this
may be necessary occasionally) ,

(i) When the necessary documents and forms have
been completed, close the interview court-
eously. Thank the respondent for his co-
operation and leave promptly. In certain
areas, where the enumerator is not familiar
with the neighbourhood, he should inquire,
before leaving a household, as to the names
of the next-door neighbours.

Occasionally there will be persons who, for various
reasons, are difficult to eniimerate.

- 163 -

Points to ciover

Procedure

(a) The reluctant
respondent

Following are suggested methods of dealing with such
persons :-

(a) If a person is reluctant to give the required
information, due to a feeling that this is an
intrusion into his private business, it should
be pointed out that -

(i) Census information is strictly
confidential :;....•

(ii) all Census employees are bworn to
secrecy . , , ■

(iii) no use is made of any Census return

to the disadvantage of the individual.

If this approach fails, attention should be
drawn to the fact that all persons are required
by law to give the necessary information to an
authorized Census enumerator. Should the
, .enumerator, still be unable to get. the required
information ..l^e should - "'

(b) The argumentative
respondent

(i) make a note
the persons

of the name and address of
refusing, and-^ '-"■ . i'

(ii) report the matter to the,.Fieid. Super-
visor«

(b)

3. Language difficulties

(a.) Procedure in
mixed English
and French areas

Certain persons will attempt to draw an envun-
eratqr, into an argument either by questioning
the value of the Census or by bringing up some
political topic. Nothing is gained by arguing
with, such a person. Rather humour him along,
but under no circumstance become involved in
a discussion on politics » Simply explain that
as a Census enumerator you must hot 'discuss
politics.

Explain that the various forms and documents have been

printed in English'^ and in French. Enumerators
will be supplied with those in the language
which is spoken most commonly in their areas.
Thus, in areas where both languages are spoken,
it may be necessary to ask the questions in
English while making the entries on a French
language form, or vice versa.

- 164 -

Points to cover

(b) Procedure in
areas where
neither English
nor French is
spoken

4o Call-backs

(a) When to
make a
' call-back

(b) Marking
Visitation
Record

Procedure

Enumerators in such areas v;ill be supplied with
a few docioments in the "other" language. They
are to be used only at the insistence of the
person being enumerated. This, should rarely
occur since the respondent should not see the
form. On completion, these "other" documents
should be inserted in their proper place in
the binder.

Explain that should a household be encountered where

neither English nor French is spoken and the
enumerator cannot make himself understood in
the language spoken there, it will be necess-
ary to secure an interpreter.

The dwelling should be marked for a call-back
on the Visitation Record and the matter re-
ported to the Field Supervisor for advice on
securing the interpreter.

The occasions necessitating call-backs have already been
discussed.

Review these briefly -

(i) Household out for the time being

(ii) No responsible person present to give the
information

(iii) Unable to get complete information

(iv) Form 5 left to be picked up

(v) Time of first call inconvenient

Remind trainees that (i) every call -back must be noted in

the Remarks Column of the Visita-
tion Record, showing the time
when the call is to be made.

(ii) when the call-back has been made
and no further calls are necessary
to complete the enumeration of
that household, a tick-mark (^
should be made opposite the
reminder in Column VII,

- 165 -

Points to cover

Procedure

(d)

What to dp

with
incompleted
documents

Emphasize the necessity for keeping appointments- strictly
and of clearing up call-backs as quickly as
possible.

Point out that if, after repeated call-backs, it is im-
possible to get the required information, the
matter should be reported to the Field Super-
visory together with such details as the times
at which the calls were made, the mamber of
calls, the information gained from neighbours,
etc.

Explain that when a document is only partly completed and
a call-back is necessary, if the remaining docu-
ments in that jacket are filled in, the incomplete
ones should be removed and carried in the pocket
of the binder until the call-back is made and
all entries completed, A record must be kept on
the outside of the jacket of all documents thus
removed ,

*(,Have trainees turn to Page 34, Section 39,
of the Enumeration Manual and read the
following.

If the call-back is required to complete a
Population document, enter the last two digits
of the document in the column headed "Out (Card
No,)" at the time you remove the document from
the jacket. If the call-back is required to
complete a Housing document, enter the exact
dwelling number in the column headed "Out
(Dwelling No,)".

A document removed from the jacket v/ill be
carried in a pocket of your binder until the
call-back is made and all entries on the docu-
ment completed. It will then be returned to
its proper place in the jacket and the IN
column on the jacket ticked off.

* Have trainees study the accompanying
diagram to see the manner in which the
above instructions are carried out.

166 ~

Points to cover

Procedure

5, Daily ciieck
of
enumeration

6, TJie use of the
"Mark Sense" pen

liimphasize that after each daj'^s enumeration each enumerator
should check his day's work,

in Have trainees follow Section J+0, on Page 3A»
of the Enumeration Manual, as you outline
the following points,

(a) Draw a line under the last name on the Visita-
tion Record and record the date, as illustrat-
ed in the Specimen Booklet, Page 2,

(b) Re-arrange the Forms 2, if necessary, group-
ing all the documents for each household,
and arranging the households in numerical
order as in the Visitation Record,

(c) Check to make sure that the name, address
and household number of household heads on
the Population docuiaents agree with the
corresponding entries on the Visitation
Record,

•

(d) Check to ensure that each person in the
household has the saaae household number
(viuestion 4) ^s the household head,

(e) Make sure that there is one Housing document
for each dwelling number circled on the
Visitation Record,

(f ) Check quickly througii the Population and
Housing documents completed during the day
watching for any missing or incorrect
entries,

k Have trainees turn to Appendix B in the
Enumeration Manual (Page 103),

Explain that this chart will be useful in checking the
documents aiid should be studied care-
fully,

(g) Check quickly through all other forms
completed during the day, again vjatching
for missing or incorrect entries.

Remind trainees that all entries on Forms 2, 2A and 4
must be made with the "mark sense" pen,
and must not be used on any other form.

-167 -

Points to cover

Procedure

A Show the group a "xaark sense" pen and
demonstrate the method of using it,

& Have trainees turn to Page 3Ut Section
Al of the Enumeration Manual and note
the instruction there given. It will
be noted that a correction has been made
..in this instruction. Make certain that
every trainee has the corrected paragraph
inserted.

Emphasize again that the "mark sense" pen should have
sufficient ink to complete the enumera-
tion in any area.

Explain that should any pen run dry or fail to work,
every effort should be made to get it
working or to obtain a refill immediately
from the Field Supervisor « In the event
of unavoidable delay in obtaining the
refill and as a last resort, a pencil
may be used. Under no circumstance is
the ball point pen or any other type of
pen (except the "mark sense" pen) to be
used on Forms 2, .2A or 4.0 The ball
point pen is to be used -however o.n- all
other Census forms.

Emphasize also that every pencil mark thus made must be

gone over later with the "mark sense" pen.

Great care must be taken to see that no
pencil mark is missed 0 If in error a
pen other than the "mark sense" pen is
used, it will be necessary to copy the
information from that docuraeht to a new
document, using the "mark sense" pen.
Each document so recopied must be
carefully checked to make absolutely
certain that no entry has been missed
or incorrectly entered,

A Give each enumerator his pen and allow
time for practice. Blank forms in the
, Specimen Booklet may be used for this
purpose,

Vfarn traixiees that great care must be taken not to lose
or break these pens. It may not be
possible to replace them. Note that all
pens must be returned with other supplies
on the completion of the enuiaeration.

- 168 -
XIX. AIMINISTRATIVE FORMS

Points to cover

Procedure

1, Enumerators' Accounts
(Forms 15 and l6)

(a) Gteneral instructions

0.1 V.:-'

"(BTT,; Form 15
• . '(Enumerator's
Account-For
Instruction)

( i.) Headings

S.'^'i .., ,.

i Have your copies of Form 15 and Form l6
at hand,

k Distribute a Form 15 to each trainee.

Explain that all details of claims must be entered on
the appropriate account forms according
to the instructions which follow.

Emphasize that great care must be taken in completing
all account forms. Incorrect or incom-
plete entries will delay payment.

Explain that three copies of each form must be com-
pleted. The white and pink copies must be
submitted to the Field Supervisor, but first
they must be signed by the enumerator in
the space provided for his signature.
Otherwise the account cannot be accepted
for payment , The green copy is to be re-
tained by the enumerator,

&. Have trainees follow Form 15 as you
instruct.

Explain that Form 15 covers payment for time while
receiving instructions in the training
periods, and expenses (where allowable),
and that enumerators will receive a cheque
in payment of the account , as soon as
possible after enumeration is started.

Note that (i) these entries are to be printed in
block letters.

(ii) the given name (or initials) followed
by the surname are to be printed in
the upper two sections of the left-
hand box. Care must be taken to assure
that this order is used, as the name of
the enumerator to whom the cheque will
be payable will be taken from this
entry,

(iii) the complete postal address is to be
printed in the space provided,

, (iv) the right-hand box is provided for the

entry of the - Province
._■: - District name

- District number

- Sub-district number

- 169 -

Points to cover

Procedure

(ii) Services
and
Expenses

k In areas where there is no farm instruction
give time, at this point, for trainees to
complete these Cwo sections of Foini.l5e If
possible observe a few entries as they are
being made, to make sure your instructions
have been understood.

In other areas, trainees will still have
another day's instructiono Where this is
the case, they, may complete as much as
possible of the form and make the final
entries when the Training period is
finished,

A Explain the individual items as they apply to
your particular area and have trainees com-
plete the form, attaching the necessary
receipts.

Emphasize that it is in the interest of the enumerator
to complete this form before leaving
the Training period, so that payment
can be made to him as soon as possible.

Explain that (i) claims for meals and accommodation are
not allowable when half-day training
periods are employed,

(ii) transportation and living expenses are
only allowable if the place of resid-
ence of the enumerator is outside the
instruction area. This means that
the distance must be such that the
time required for transportation from
the place of residence to the place of
instruction is greater than that
normally required to attend a place of
employment. Also, such expenses will
only be allowable if the place of
residence is outside the area served
by local bus or street-car service,

(iii) receipts are required for hotel accom-
modation. The form of receipt should
be that used by the hotel or person
supplying the service. The receipt
must show the date of payment, address,
number of days of accommodation, the
rate per day, the amount paid and the
signature of the person to whom the
payment was made.

- 170

•Points to cover

(iii) Signature

' V{i) Headings ,

■:i'. :. : •.■■ ^ ::.: ~.\ T:;;'.. f '.

..Procedure

.. (iv) use of an automobile at 6 cents per-
mile will only be allowed where there
is no bus or train service available,
'lil/hen more than one enumerator travel
in the same automobile, only the
owner of the automobile will be al-
lowed mileage. The rate per mile
allowed for use of an automobile
covers all car expenses, except
bridge tolls and ferry charges,

A Allow time for trainees to check their en-
tries carefully, making certain that the
separate copies of the form agree. When
they are satisfied that everything is in
order have them enter the date and sign
their copies in the appropriate spaces,

A Collect the completed forms and put them
aside to be checked and signed by you at
the earliest opportunity (see Instructions
to Field Supervisor, Page 18).

A Have each enumerator find his copy of Form
l6 in his Enumeration Portfolio and follow
it as you instruct.

Explain that these headings are to be completed in
block letters in exactly the same manner
as Form 15, with one exception, the last
entry in the right-hemd box,

A Have trainees note that the entry for
"Sub-district" has been divided into
two parts, "Number" and "Type",

Explain that (i) the Sub-district number will be

• -' entered: as usual,

'■'/ ■ (ii) each Sub-district has been classed

■■-•' ' ■ as Type' "A" or Type "B" according

■ ' '■ ' to whether it is so marked on the

''•'•"• description of that particular

•'•' ''^'"' enumeration area. Each enumerator

'■'--^ must indicate, in the space pro-

••■■■''■■'"' vided on Form l6, whether his
area is -Type "A" or Type "B".

- 171 -

. , Points, to cover

Procedure

(ii) Items I-9
(iii) Item 10

Explain tliat(i) for each type of form completed, the

total number of units (i.e., number of
persons on population forms, number of
dwellings on housing forms, etc,) must
be entered in the appropriate space
under "Units Submitted - Number",

(ii) the number of units must be multiplied
by the rate per unit, and the amount
entered under "Units Submitted - Amount".

Examisle: If an enumerator had completed
200 Forms '2 and 5 Forms 2A, he
would enter "205"- as the
"Number" under ."Units Submitted".
Since the rate' for these forms
is 8 cents per person, he would
multiply "205" by ".08" and
enter "$l6.40" under. "Amount".

Note,- Field Supervisors in Type "A" areas will
. explain that Item 10 will be left blank-
in these areas.

Field Supervisors in :Type "B" areas will explain
• that enumerators will receive in addition to the
unit rates, an alloweuice to cover expenses.
Enumerators in Type "B" areas will charge under
Item 10(a) an amount of 7 cents per person
enumerated.

Field Supervisors for Type "B" areas in the
Prairie Provinces only will explain that the
special rate under Item 10(b) only applies to
. those enumerators whose area covers a whole
township in which the population is less than
100 persons. In such cases, an allowance of
$7.00 per township will be grantedf U5,dePpItem'
10(b) j and Item 10(a) will not ap ply .'"'"*][?,' '
, however, the enumeration area covers only a
part of a township, and that part contains less
•than the equivalent fraction of 100 persons,
.the enumerator shall, be paid that portion of
$7.00 equivalent to the fraction of the area of
,.': the township enumerated. If, for example, the
enumeration area covers only one-third of the
township and in that; area there is more than one-

;■ third of-lOO'-people'j! namely 3A» the -special .

.allowance under Itemj 10(b) will "-nof-apply and
he will-be paid at the rate of 7'Cents per per-
son. If, however, tiiere are less than 34 in

- 172 -

Points. to cover

Procedure

(iv)

Item 11
(Charges for
delivery of

completed
documents)

(v) . Sigriat'ure

(vi) , Columns
for office
use only

that part of the township, he vdll be paid
one-third of $7,00 or an amount of $2,34
and Item 10(a) will not apply. This prin-
ciple will apply wdiatever the fraction.

Be sure to point out that in any township,
or part of a tbwn^ip of more than 100
persons, the allowance under 10(a) will
apply (i,e,, 7 cents per person) and not
10(b).

Explain that under this item enumerators in Type "B"
areas only may charge for the delivery of
completed documents to the Field Super-
visor, in accordance with the regulations.
Under these regulations the enumerator in
a Type "B" area will be entitled to return
rail or. bus fare (or automobile mileage at
the rate of 6 cents per mile where train
or bus transportation is not available)
provided the return trip is less than 50
miles. Where the return trip would be 50
miles or more, the completed documents are
to be forwarded by express or by mail.

Emphasize that (i) should the documents be forwarded by

mail or express, a receipt for the
amount chsirged must be attached to
the account. The method of forward-
ing must be entered in the space for
details,

(ii) should the trip be made by train,

bus or automobile, the places "from"
and "to", together with the mileage
must be entered in the space for
details.

Instruct trainees, on completing Form l6, to carefully
check all entries before entering the date
and signing the forms. They must also
check to make certain that all copies of
the forms are identical. When everything
is in order, they will return the Forms
l6 to you, at the same time that they
turn in- their completed work for their
areas, "

Emphasize that these columns are for use by the

Dominion Bureau of Statistics offices
. only and must- not be marked in any way ,

- 173 -

Points to cover

2, Transmittal Form
(Form 29)

(a) Purpose of
Form 29

Procedure

(b) Procedure on
receipt of
supplies

A Display a Transmittal Form (Form 29)

Explain to trainees that a form similar to this will

be found in each box of supplies,
Each box together with the
enumeration portfolio contains
the supplies estimated to com-
plete the enumeration of a
Sub-district, These supplies
will be distributed to the
enumerators at the close of the
Training sessions.

Explain that the Transmittal Form contains a list of

the supplies included in each
enumerator's box and portfolio.
It is a check list of the supplies
estimated to be adequate to carry
out the assignment, and of the
supplies that must be returned
on the completion of the
enumeration.

Explain that (i) the enumeration supplies will be

distributed at the end of the Train-
ing sessions. These are not to be
opened at this time. Rather , they
should be opened at home , checked .
with the Transmittal Form to make
sure that the numbers received -agree
with the numbers entered in the
column "No, issued," ." . • :.

(ii) if there is any discrepiangy,, the
enumerator should inform, the Field
Supervisor, possibly at ,, the time
when he meets with the Field
Supervisor to plan the route of
visitation,

(iii) when each is satisfied that he has
the required numbers of each item,
he should sign th,e certification
in the lower 'left-ha'rid courier of
the f oxm,

. (iv) the Field Supervisor will sign
below.

- 174 -

Points to cover

Procedure V

{ c ) Procedure on •
return of
supplies

Explain that (i) when the enumeration of a Sub-district
is complete, the numbers of the vari-
ous forms, supplies, etc.*^ being re-
turned must be entered in the column
headed "No, returned," Care must be
taken not to overlook any item.

,-_■-' ■ -

(ii) where a space has been marked out with
several "X" marks, the item in ques-
tion need not be returned.

■■'■.■■'■" ' '" ■' ' "., ■'■.'■" •• ■'"

(iii) unused forms and schedules need not be
returned except spare jackets of Popu-
lation and Housing documents. These
must be returned whether they have
been used or not.

. _ •.. .. -..,; . , ; .. .

(iv) all Blind and Deaf schedules must be
signed and returned whether or not
there are any blind or deaf persons
enumerated.

-., ■,_._.• ,.^^,;^:- , ^ _..■..■ ■ -_

(v) before turning over supplies to the
Field Supervisor, the certification
in the lower ri^t-hand corner of
the form must be sighed, ' ' '

a- _.'/^ :'■].. ^ t^ _;.,■ ■.;; .. ■ . -

(vi) Form 29 must be included with the
supplies returned to the Field
Supervi so r ,

3;' Progress :;Report'
(Form 25) -

A Have each trainee find his copy of Form 25
(Progress Report) in his Knuraeration Port-
folio, and follow it as you instruct.

(a) ,Purpoae of
' ■ ^ ■ Prbgre ss' ',,.'.'■'
Report '.

Explain that Form 25 will enable Census officials

(i) to keep up-to-date on the progress
of the field work.

"■^ ■■■.i . . '. . • , ' ■'.: ,";.•■

(ii) to take necessary action in the event
of serious delay in any area.

(b) KKhen to complete .
Form 25

Point out that this report must be completed twice
weekly from June 1st vmtil the
enumeration is completed. It must
be in the hands of the Field Super-
visor each Wednesday and Saturday.

- 175 -

Points to cover

Procedure

(d) How to complete
the form

Explain that, where at all possible, enumerators,

: (i) must themselves deliver, the Progress
Report to the Field -Supervisor.

(ii) if this is impossible (due to long
distances in rural areas, etc.), the
.report should be mailed. The reverse
• ' bide bf the' Foria is t.O.'bei' used = for
the-Field; Supervisor's address, .ao

■ . (iii) if mailing, it will, be necessary to
use a, 3~oent stainp and the, cards
should be mailed in time to be in the
hands of the Field Supervisor by
Vdednesday " and Sa'Curday " of eacE^week . ' '

Instruct trainees to complete Form 25, as follows:-

(i) Fill in the District and Sub-district
numbers at the top of the card,

(ii) Fill in the date in the space' .'pro-
vided in the upper right-hkhd corner
of the card.

(iii) Enter the total persons enumerated
to dateo Note that this number
must include the persons enumerated
on the day on which Form 25 is
completed,

(iv) Enter the total number 'ofcail-baclcs
■ ' pending,

(v) if the Sub-district is now complete,
- 'mark the box "Yes".

If the Sub-district is not complete,
•mark : the box "No",

If the Sub-district is complete, except
for call-backs, mark the appropriate
(third) box.

Explain that space has been left at the' bottom of the
card, for any further ' explanatory re-
marks.

Warn trainees not to forget to sign the card before
mailing.

- 176 -
XX. LIST OF GCMMERCIAL FISHERMEN
(Form 9)

Note.- Each Field Supervisor must judge for himself the amount of instruction
necessary for Form 9. Every enumerator's portfolio contains a Form 9
siiitable for enumerating 10 fishermen. In many areas, few, if any,
fishermen will be found. If such is the case in the area under your
supervision, a brief outline of the instructions for completing Form 9
will suffice.

If, however, you have an area in which there are a large number of
fishermen, you should go over the instructions below, carefully and in
detail. To enumerators who feel certain that they will have more than
10 fishermen in their sub-districts, distribute, as required, copies of
the larger Form 9 with which you have been provided. Explain, at the
same time that, should any other enumerator find that he needs a larger
Form 9 or additional copies, he should apply to you at once.

Points to cover

Procedure

1. Definition of
"Commercial
fisherman"

2, Whom to enumerate
on Form '9

3. Detailed .
instructions.

* Have trainees find Form 9 in their Port-
folios and turn to the instructions
given on the inside front cover.

Define "Commercial fisherman" as follows :-

"A Commercial fisherman is a person engaged
in catching or carrying fish, v;ho earned
wages, sold fish or shared ijfi the catch."

Explain that by "carrying fish" is meant the carrying
of fish from place of catch to place of
sale or processing.

*. Have trainees note the 2nd Instruction
on the inside cover of Form 9, while you
read it.

2. Envmierate any commercial fisherman who
during the year June 1, 1950, to May 31,
1951, either

(a) spent. 15 or more days fishing;
or

(b) earned $100 or more by fishing.

* Use your copy of Form 9, to point out
the folloi\dng instructions.

- 177 -

Points- to cover

Procedure

(a) Entries on
cover

(b) Page headings

(d) Column II .

(e) Columns III,

Explain that, as on the Visitation Record, the entries
on the cover are very important and must
be entered prior to enumeration. These
entries are - (i) Province

(ii) Electoral District
(number and name)
(iii) Sub-district No.
(iv) Enumerator's name
(v) Enumerator's Post
Office Address

Exphasize that these must agree with the corresponding
entries on the Visitation Record.

Point out that the E].ectoral District No.

- Sub-district No., and

- Enumerator's name

must be entered on the heading of each
page and must agree vdtH the entries
made on the cover.

Household Number - Enter the same household number in

Column I as given on this person's
Population document, (Form 2,
question 4) .

Fisherman's Name and Address - As on the Visitation

Record, print surname
first, then given name
and initials. The
address must agree ivith
that reported on the
Visitation Record.
Again, care must be taken
•1 ■ • to make entries clear
■ ■ and legible.

During the period from June 1, 1950 to Mav 31. 1951.

IV, V and VI

how many days were you fishing.

* Have trainees follow, ivhile you read
Instruction k on the inside cover of
Form 9.

.- 178-

Points to cover

Procedure

Coliunn III is yo\:!r guide for marking
columns IV, V and VI. ' Mark "X" in the
appropriate box according to the number
of days the person spent fishing:

(a) on oxfli account;

(b) as a partner or on shares or
lay; and

Mark for each person only OME of the
four boxes in any one column. If the
answer for any coliomn is "none", that
column must be left blank.

Example ; A man who fished for 73 days
on his ov/n account and for 41 days on
shares or lay, but did not fish as a
partner or for xvages: mark an "X" in
column IV, Box 3t and in column V,
box 2, and leave column VI blank.

•(f)." Column VII

Drav; attention to the footnote of Column IV, i.e.,

"Report senior partners and managers in
this coliomn".

Explain that the purpose is to treat on the same basis

as "own account" fishermen, those v;ho, while
v/orking as partners or employees, have the
actual direction of fishing operations as,
for example, deciding when and where fishing
shall take place.

During the period from June 1. 1950 to May 31 » 1951 1 ^^'as
your total income from fishing less than $100

- ^'flOO - $999
. , -11,000..- $1,999
■■ ■• ■" ■■ - r- |2,000 or more

* Have trainees follow \irhile you read
Instruction 5 on the inside cover of
Form 9.

For each fisherman mark an "X" in one of
the four boxes in Column VII. Do not
ask for the exact amoiint of income. It
is only necessary to find out if the.
fisherman's income falls in group 1, 2,
3 or 4 as shoTrvTi on the folio.

- 179 -

. XXI. FINAL REVIEW AND QUESTION PERIOD .

It is sviggested that" this period be used by you, as Field Supervisor, in the manner
which best suits the needs of your training group, i.e.,

(i) where necessary, to give more complete instiniction on
points over which you may have had to hurry,

(ii) to invite questions and discussion on any point which
may not have been made clear,

(iii) to review, by questions and use of the Enumeration Maniial the
more important details and basic concepts",

(iv) in a wpi^f, generally to sura up the training given.

Following are suggestions for review which you may find useful. As Field Supervisor,
with a complete knowledge of your own area and enumerators, you v;ill know best which
points should be stressed.

Oral Questions for Final Review

Directions.- The follov/ing questions are based on information with v;hich the enumera-
tor must be thoroughly familiar. In most cases, the ansvrer should be
■ ■ readily given. If a trainee is uncertain of the correct answer, have
him locate it in his Manual, using the Index as a guide. In a few
cases, the answer will be found on the form itself. You should
emphasize the need for enumerators to be equally familiar with the
instructions on the forms as in the Manual. For your convenience the
correct reference to the Manual or form has been given.

Do not confine your questions to one or tvro tx'ainees who are likely to
have a ready response. Give each an opportunity, in turn, to answer a
question.

Insist on one person and one person only answering each question. ,
Over anxious trainees may want to call out the answer out of turn.
This gives you no indication of what the group as a whole knows
and gives an opportunity for slower members of the group to relax,
waiting for some one else to do the thinking.

- 180 -

Question

1. What is the first enumeration form which you
will fill out when you enter a dwelling? . . . •

2. Who will be listed in Column III on this form? .

3. What entry is to be made in Column 1 ?

4. What is a dwelling? . . , ^

5. In what order will dwellings be listed on the
Visitation Record?

6. What is a household? . . .

7. Who will be included as members of a household?.

8. On what form will they be enumerated?

9. When \idll you use Form 2A?

10. What does "usual residence" mean? .......

11. What will you do if you find a trailer, summer
cottage, etc., in your area?

12. What is the difference between a "closed" dv/ell-
ing and a "vacant" dwelling? .<,...

13. What action will you take if you find (a) a
"closed" dwelling, (b) a "vacant" dwelling? . .

14. r. How will you enumerate a dwelling "under con-

struction*?? ........

15 . Wha.t; action will you take if no one is at home
when ypu. call? .....

16. When \irili you use an Individual Form? . . . . .

17. What procedure will you follow when you leave a
Form 5? , . . . '

18. How will you determine who is "head" of the
household? .....

19. In what respects does Form 2A differ from

Enumeration Manual Reference

Section No.

7, 42
43 ,,
43
1

14, 42

4, 16

16.- (Group A)
16 (Group B)
46

32, 42

2(b,c), 51

2(c), 42(e)

2(a), 42(f), 51

12, 36, 64

37, 39, 42(c)

32, 34, 36

5, 45(Question-;3)

46(a,b,c,d)

Page No.

13, 35
37
36
12

19, 35

12, 22

29, 35, 36

12, 64

12, 36

58-59

13, 39

- 181 -

Question

20. For Census purposes, what is a farm?

21. How will a person's birthplace be determined,

if that person was born outside Canada? , . . .

22. How will you word the question on origin? . . .

23. What must you watch when marking the documents?

24. What question will you ask when you have com-
pleted the last Fonn 2 for a household? » . . .

25. When will a person be considered, (a) deaf?

(b) blind? ....

26. What group of persons are to be enumerated in
Questions 18-29?

27. To what period do Questions 20-25 and Question
27 refer?

28. To what period do Questions 26, 28 and 29 refer?

29. When should Question 22 be asked?

30. When should you ask Questions 23-27? .

31. If a person worked for more than one firm or
business during the week ending June 2, 19 5i,
what entry should be made in Question 23? ...

32. What two things must your answer to Question. 24
indicate? . .

33. What entry should be made in Question 23 for a
person vrtio had previously been employed, narked
"4L" in Question 20 and "No" in Question 21? . .

34. Hoff' should Questions 23-25 be coiiipieted if a
person has never worked but looked for work
during the week ending June 2, 1951?

35. What conditions are necessary for a person to be
classed as an "Ov«i Account" in Question 27? . ,

36. What conditions are necessary for a person to be
classed as "Employer" in Question 27? .....

Enumeration Manual Reference

Section No.

10,45,76,87

iO, 45
10, 45

48 .

Page No.

14,39,77,81

14, 41

15, 44
38

Def initiong on Form 3

Persons 14 years of age
and over

Week ending June 2, 1951
Year ending May 31, I95I

45(22)
45

45(23)
45

^5 ..

45
45
45

49
49

50
51'

. 50 '

50
55
55-56

- 182 -

Question

Enumeration Manual Reference

Section No«

Page ■ No .

37.
38.

39.
40.

41.
42.

43.
44.
45.

46.
47.

48.
49.

50.

When should you ask Questions 28 and 29?. . o o
For what dwellings will a housing document be

How will you envunerate on a Form 4 an "institut'
ion" in your area?

o o o o

o • o o •

e • •

What procedure will you follow if you find a
"hotel" in your area? .............

How would you enumerate an apartment hotel? . .

When will a dwelling be classed as an "apt., .

What will you include as "rooms" in a dwelling?

tfifhen will you consider water as "piped inside"?

What is the difference between "shared" and
"exclusive" use? ....... .

What is "supplementary" heating?

What will you do if a household has none of the
living conveniences listed? ....... . .

V/hen is a home considered "owned"?

What questions must be answered if the dwelling

In the course of your enumeration you come
upon an office building. Give two reasons why"
you should visit this building.

o • o

7(6), 49

26, 51
26

11,- 51
51

51
51

,51
51

11, 51
15

13, 60

27, 66
27

65-66
18, 70
70

70 ,
71

72
72

18, 72
21

- 183 =
XXII. DISTRIBUTION OF SUPPLIES

In areas where no agriculture instruction is given (i.e., where half-day training

sessions are held),,

1, Distribute an Identity Card (Form 14) to each trainee.
Make sure that each signs his card and puts it away
for safe-keepinga Emphasize the need for carrying it
at all times,

2, Distribute enumeration supply boxes at the end of the
Final Review and i^uestion Period, To avoid confusion
do not permit supply boxes to be opened at this time.
Instruct enumerators to open them at home and check
with the Transmittal slip. Any discrepancies,, etc.,
may be reported when you meet with him to go over his
plan of visitation,

3, Set the date for your appointment with each, enumerator
( see Page 7 ) »

In areas where agriculture instruction is given (i.e., where whole-day training

sessions are held),

Garry out instructions 1 and 2 above at the end of the
Agriculture instruction. Instruction 3 will not apply,
since you will by that time have had an individual
appointment with each enumerator ( see Page 7 ) a

- 185 -

TABLE OF GONTMTS
Agriculture

Section Page

I, The Enumeration Manual , »,. 186

II. Additional Points on Completing a General Farm Schedule

(Form 6) 192

III, Organization of the Schedule 195

IV, Location, Area, Tenure and Value 197

V. Enumerating Crops 206

VIo Condition of Land, June 1, 1951 212

VII. Irrigation, Forest Fires, Farm Machinery, Hired Workers,

Part-time Work 216

VIII. Live Stock and Live Stock Products 219

IX. Forest Products, Maple Products and Fur-rbearing Animals ... 221

X. Enumerating the Sales of Farm Products , 222

XI. Sample (Questions ^ , 22^ '

XII, The Enumeration of Certain Types of Farm;s 229

XIII, Reviewing General Farm Schedules , 231

XIV, The Use of Maps (for Field Supervisors in Manitoba,

Saskatchewan and Alberta) 233

XV. Irrigation Schedule (Form 8) (for Field Supervisors in

Saskatchewan, Alberta and British Columbia) , 23^

- 188 -

Points to Cover

Procedure

4» Maps - Manitoba,
Saskatchewan,
Alberta
(Section 78)

5. Farm Schedule
Nvunber
(Section 79)

6, How to determine
who is the farm
operator
(Section 80)

Example.- A non-resident farm which
lies partly in two or more enumera-
tion areas o

If the fanii lies partly in one
sub-district and partly in another,
and the person in charge does not
live on either part of the farm, the
enumerator must complete a schedule
covering the complete farm, give a
full explanation in the "Remarks"
section, and bring the matter to
the attention of the Field Supervisor,

Explain that each enumerator in Manitoba, Saskatchewan

and Alberta is required to complete a map of
his sub-district. Instruction oh how to
complete maps v/ill be given later,

* Have the trainees look at the upper left-
hand corner of the General Farm schedule
marked "Farm Schedule Niomber",

Explain that each General Farm schedule must be numbered

in this space in the order in which the farms
lie on the pre-arranged route. This number
is not the Household or Dwelling number,
although occasionally the same number may
apply to both.

* Read the important rules appearing in Section
80, Pages 77 - 78 of the Enumeration Manual.

(1) The General Farm schedule is to be com-
pleted in the name of the person restxjn-
sible for the day-to-day operations of
the farm, whether he is operating it as
an owner, tenant or hired manager,

(2) In the case of farms operated ,by

(3)

institutions . schools, firms, etc., write
the name of the institut'-xon, firm, etc.,
along the top of the schedule. Report as
farm operator the farm manager or the
executive officer of the institution,
firm, etc.

Do not list more than one farm operator
for each farm enumerated. If the farm is
operated by a partnership, consider one
partner to be the farm operator.

- 189 -

Points to cover

Procedure

7. Location and area
of farm
(Section 81)

B, iVhen to ask
the Sample
Questions
(Section 82)

9. Plan of visita-
tion
(Section 83)

(4) Do not fill out a separate schedule for •
members of the family or other persons ■
living on a • farm \inless that member operates
a tract of land entirely independent and
separate from the home fanii.

Remind trainees that they must report on the schedule all
the land operated by the farm operator,
including the land he owns, rents or
leases from others, or manages for others.

Emphasize -

(a) land owned by the operator but rented to someone
else must not be included'^'on the schedule of
this operator.

(b) all land farmed by the operator must be reported
whether it is all located in the one sub-district
or not.

* Have the trainees turn to Section XVII
of the Farm schedule.

Point out the following:-

(a) Questions 16? to 191 are to be asked only of
every fifth farm and are referred to as the
Sample Questions.

(b) The Farm Schedule Number (not the household or
dv;elling number) determines the farms on which
the Sample Questions are to be asked,

(c) Sample Questions will be first eniimerated on
Farm Schedule Number 2 and on every fifth farm
thereafter (farms number 7, 12, 17, 22, 27,
etc.), that is every farm with the Farm Schedule
Nvunber ending in "2" or "7"o

* Ask: James Brown is a farm operator who is

head of household Number 22. When
you are enumerating his farm on Farm
Schedule Number 19, would you complete
the Sample Questions? Why?

Ans. No. The Farm Schedule Number does not
end in "2" or "7".

* Make certain that trainees understand this
section (which has already been covered in
the Population part of the instructions)
and if necessary review it again.-.

-190 -

Points to cover

10, Important points
in filling out '
agriculture
schedules
(Section 84)

Procedure

Emphasize the following points, as they are very important
in the tabulation of the information by the Bureau of
Statistics :-

(i) Report to the nearest dollar, all questions
on value, omitting cents,
(ii) Report areas to the nearest whole acre except
where provision has been made on the schedule
to report certain crops to the nearest tenth
acre,

* Have the trainees look at Question 30

on the Farm schedule as being an example
of a question where the acreage may be
reported in tenth acres. Have them enter
on the schedule 25 3/10 acres of potatoes
■for harvest in 1951.

(iii) Where no entries are necessary, leave spaces
blank. Do not fill in dashes or zeros,
(iv) If a mistake is made -

(a) draw a neat line through the entry in
error, rewrite the new figure within the
proper space.

(b) Do not use an eraser or ink eradicator,

* Have the trainees make some corrections on
a Farm schedule and check to make sure they
understand the proper method,

(v) Report the production of the various products
in the units asked for on the schedule,

* Have the trainees look at the Conversion
tables in Appendix C, Pages 10? - 108 of

the Enumeration Manual.

(vi)

11. Enumerating
♦farms receiving
a mailed sched-
ule (Section 85)

All information written into the schedule must
be obtained by questioning the farmer or other
person supplying the information, and must not
be based on the enumerator's own views or
opinions,
(vii) Enximerators will use the special ball point pen
that is supplied them. They must hot use the
"mark sense" pen for Agriculture schedules.

Explain that many farm operators will have received an
advance copy of the General Farm schedule
by mail sometime before June 1.

- 191 -

Points to cover

Procedure

• ■ '1 . ■

12, Summary of
what to enu-
merate for
certain
questions
(Section 86)

Outline the following situations that they may encounter:-
(i) If the Farm Operator has completely filled out
a Fann schedule before the enumerator arrives,
the entunerator must carefully check the schedule
while still on the farm.

* Do not discuss these checks at this
point as they will be discussed later
in the training program. ■-^•— ..— t^.««.

(ii) If the Farm- Operator has- only partially filled out
the Farro schedule, the enumerator must complete
the schedule and carefully check every section.

(iii) If the Farm Operator has not made any .entries^ on
■ the Advance schedule, lost it, or did not receive
one, etc., the enumerator must complete a Farm
■schedule and carefully check every section,

(iv) If, in spite of instructions, the Farm Operator
has mailed the Advance schedule to Ottawa, the
enumerator must complete another schedule. .

Emphasize the follov/ing points: 7

(a) All General Farm schedules must be completed
accurately and legibly in ink before you will
accept them,

(b) If the farmer has made entries in pencil on the
Advance schedule or if the entries are not
clearly legible, the eniomerator must make a new
and readable copy in ink,

(c) Sample Questions:- Tell the trainees that, farmers
receiving Advance schedules were instructed not
to complete the Sample Questions,

The enumerator must complete, before leaving
the farm, the Sample Questions for farms with
Farm Schedule Number ending in "2" or "7".

* Do not consider Section 86 in detail but
tell the trainees that they must study
this section at home so that they will
know the points by memory,

* Instruct trainees at this point to close
their Enumeration Manuals and to follow
the questions on the General Farm schedule
as they are covered in the following
sections,.

- 192 -

II. ADDITIONAL POINTS ON COMPLETING. A. GENERAL FARM SCHEDULE

Points to oover

1, Change of farm
operator

Procedure

2.. Wood areas

3. Source of
infomiation

'.n)n

4. " Ihcbmpiete'
reports

5. Arpents (For
Field Super-
visors in charge
of certain areas
of Quebec)

Explain that =

(a) the envunerator must obtain from the present
operator as accurate a record as possible of
the crop acreage, production, sales, etc., of
this farm for the year 1950. This farm means
the farm described in question 6 of the Farm
schedule,

(b) Jthe enumerator must NOT report crops harvested
or sold in 1950 by the present farm operator on
land which he does not now operate.

Explain that -

(a) wood areas leased or under permit solely for the
cutting of forest products are not to be eniimerated.

(b) farm woodlots which are part of the farm must be
included with the farm.

Point out that the enumerator must obtain information from -

(a) the farm operator whenever possible,

(b) reliable and competent member of the operator's
household if it must be obtained from other than
the farm operator.

(c) in the case of non-resident farms, where a Farm
schedule must be completed but the farm operator
lives outside the enumerator's district, the
information may be secured from a neighbour or
from some other reliable source.

Point out that the enumerator is on the farm and in the best
position to get a report. If the respondent has
recently moved to the farm, he may hesitate to
make a report for someone else's operations.
The enumerator must encourage him to report on the
basis of stubble and other cover, the approximate
acreages and yields of crops hajrvested.

Explain that -

(a) for certain specified counties that are surveyed
in arpents instead of acres the envunerator may
enumerate in arpents.

(b) the eniunerator must write "Areas enumerated in
arpents" along the top of the schedule.

- 193 -

t Distribute Agrictilture Practice Exercises (Form 39) to the trainees.
Have trainees answer these questions on their work sheets by marking (x) in
the appropriate square or writing in the answer in the space provided. When
the exercise has been completed ask one or two trainees for their euiswers to
each question, and then give the correct answer.

Practice Exercise A.

Directions - Complete the following questions by marking (x) in the appro-
priate square or \«*iting in the answer in the space provided.
The Enumeration Manual or Farm schedule may be used for refer-
ence \Aiere necessary.

1* Mr. Jones owns 15 acres of land and has a blacksmith shop on his property.
He has a small garden, the products of which are exclusively for his own
use, but spends most of his time in his shop.

Do you complete a General Fam schedule for Mr. Jones? □ Yes ^ No
(Agricultural operations are not carried out on Mr. Jones' property so it
does not constitute a farm)

2. Mr, Tom O'Neil lives on a 1-acre tract and has a laying flock of 125 hens.

He sells most of the eggs and a number of chickens. He values the production
of poultry and eggs at $325 in 1950.

Do you complete a General Farm schedule for Mr. O'Neil? ^ Yes n No
(This tract of land is from 1 to 3 acres and the production of agricultural
products was valued at more than $250 in 1950)

3. Mr. Rice is a retired farmer and owns 10 acres of farm land. During the
last three years he has not worked his land. Apart from J acre on vdiich his
house is located he rents his land to Mr. Brown for pasturing live stocks

Do you complete a General Farm schedule for Mr. Rice? □ Yes ^ No
(The land retained by Mr. Rice is less than 1 acre. The 9| acres of pastxire
must be included with Mr. Brown's land)

4. Mr. White lives in town. He owns and operates a 50-acre farm, on which no
one is living, about 15 miles from town in another sub-district.

What enumerator completes a General Fann schedule for Mr. White's farm ?

( □ The enumerator in the town

( ^ The enumerator in the other sub-district.

5. Mr. Long owns and operates 160 acres of land, 40 acres of which are in your
sub-district and 120 acres in the adjoining sub-district. Mr. Long lives
in the other sub-district,

(a) How many General Farm schedxaes are req\d.red ? ) ^ ^ schedule

( D 2 schedules

(b) Who completes the schedule or schedules? ( q You complete it

( ^ The enumerator in
( the other sub-
( district completes it

( n You both complete
( a schedule

- 19A -

6. Two brothers ovm and operate a 320-acre faun in partnership,

(a) How many General Farm schedules are required? ( ^ 1 schedule

( □ 2 schedules

(b) What acreage shoxxld be reported ? 320

(acres)

7. Mr. Bams is a lawyer in the city and owns 150 acres of land about 50 miles
away. He has a hired manager to look after the farm but drives out about
twice a month to instruct him.

( n Mr. Bams?
Do you complete the General Farm schedule in the name of ( . mu y,j j

^ W manager ?
(The hired manager is in charge of the day-to-day operations of the fann)

8. Mr, James lives oh a 50-acre tract of land in the coxintry but works in the
city. His teen-age son looks after the live stock and crops. The father
tells the son what to do.

( J^ Mr, James?
Do you complete the General Farm schedule in the name of (

( □ His son?

(Mr. James is in charge of the day-to-day operations of the farm)

9. Mr. Smith owns 90 acres of land and his wife has inherited 50 acres from
her father. Mr. Smith operates both pieces of land,

, ... . ■. How many General Fann schedules do you ( J^ 1 schedvile

complete ( D 2 schedules

10. A retired faimer owns 100 acres of land. He rents 95 acres to a neighboox
and retains 5 acres for a garden, some chickens and two cows.

How many General Farm schedules are required ( D 1 schedule
for this 100 acres of land? ( ^Sj 2 schedules

(A schedule must be completed for both the retired fanner and his neighbour
as agricultural operations are carried out on both holdings)

11. You begin your enumeration by enumerating the hamlet of Homer's Comer.
The first fann to be envmierated is the farm of William Moore who is head
of household number ?•

(a) What Farm Schedule Number is assigned to the
Fann schedule of William Moore ? 1

(number)

(b) Do you complete the Agriciilture Sample questions? ( ^ No

(a Yes

(As this is the first farm on the enumeration route it will be assigned
Fann Schedvile Number 1. The sample questions will NOT be completed as the
Farm Schedule Number does not end in 2 or 7)

III.

- 195 -

ORGANIZATION OF THE SGHEDULE

Points to cover

Procedure

1. Know the schedule

2, Key questions

3. Asterisks

4, Using the schedule

(a) Ask the ques-
tions as
worded

Emphasize that the enumerators must become thoroughly

familiar with the arrangement and content
of the General Farm schedule,

k Point out the major subject sections of the
schedule.

Explain that -

(a) some sections of the schedule have key ques-
tions vi/hich must have a check mark (X),

(b) if the enuraerator reads the instructions be-
side these key questions they will enable him
to skip groups of questions,

k Have the trainees refer to i^uestion 6^ on the
schedule, and explain that if the respondent
answers "No" to the question "Have you 25 or
more fruit trees on this farm" the enumerator
will put a check mark (X) in the square be-r
side "No" and follow the instructions which
read "If 'No' skip to Question 72". If,
however, the respondent had answered "Yes",
the instructions are to "Answer Questions 65
to 71".

Explain that asterisks have been placed to the left of
certain question numbers to assist in
skipping inquiries when the answer to the
key question indicates that they do not .
apply, •

k Have the trainees look at Question 35 "Did
you harvest any seed in 1950 from the area
reported in Questions 24 and/or ,25?" in
Section. Ill of the schedule. If the ans-
wer to Question 35 is "No", the enumerator
skips to Question k J+l^ which has an aster-
isk to the left of the number. The aster-
isk thus assists the enumerator to skip
questions which do not apply to that
particular farm.

Emphasize that -

(a) all questions must be asked as worded and in
the order in which they appear on the
schedule. Attempts to change questions while
enumerating will probably result in omitting
some information.

-196-

Points to cover

(b) Explanatory notes

Procedure

5, Office "codes

6." Remarks

7. ..Enumerator's
record

(b) some of the questions on the schedule .have ex-
planatory notes in brackets (such as Question
19). The enumerator should read the note when-
ever the question is not understood by the re-
spondent, A good practice is to ask the ques-
tion, and while the respondent is thinking
about an answer, give the explanation.

Emphasize that all the questions must be asked unless the
instructions after a key question say to
skip. The enumerator must ask the ques-
tions even though he may not think them
important.

Example; Although a crop is not commonly grown
in the area, the enumerator must ask
the question just the saim, otherwise,
he may miss some of the information.

Explain that -

(a) Circled numbers on the Farm schedule should be
disregarded during enumeration,

(b) Figures in the "Office use" columns should also
be disregarded,

A Have the trainees look at the circled numbers in
Columns 2 and 3 of Section III of the schedule,
and point out the ''Office use" columns,

A Have the trainees look at the "Remarks" section
of the schedule.

Explain that -

(a) this space has been provided for explanations
of unusual situations,

(b) "on-the-spot" comments that are provided by
the enumerator are very important in inter-
preting replies,

A Have the trainees look at the Enumerator's record
at the e|id of the Farm schedule.

State that the enumerator must always do the following
before signing his name:-

(a) Mark whether or not the farm is in the

agriculture sa/nple and if it is, check that
the sample questions have, been completed,
.(b) Mark whether the operator received and

completed the advance copy of the schedule.

(d) Review the schedule before leaving the farm.

- 197 -

IV. LOCATION, MEAi TENURE MD VALUE

Points to cover

Procedure

1, Location of farm
(Question 6)

(a) Prairie
Provinces

A Have the trainees look at Section II of the
Farm schedule »

Outline the f ollovjing important points regarding this
question:-

(1) The enumerator must completely describe the
farm operated by the farmer,

(2) All the land operated must be listed, that is,
all the land owned, all the land rented or
leased from others, and the land managed «

(3) This land may be entirely located in the
enumerator's sub-district or part of it may
be in other sub-districts,

(4) Do NOT list land owned by the farmer but
operated by someone else,

(5) Exact descriptions of the farm land are very
important and if the operator is not sure,
the enumerator should have him check a recent
tax notice or some other reliable source,

(6) If more lines are needed to give the location
of a farm, write on a separate slip of paper
and pin it to the schedule,

(7) Municipality, township or parish must be
entered for each parcel of land. The term
•parish" refers to a governmental ,. and not to
a religious, unit of organization,

(8) The tenure of each parcel of land must be
given separately and may be designated

as follows:-

(a) "0" for owned

(b) "R" for rented or leased

Explain that in the Prairie Provinces each section
or part of a section must be listed
separately, giving the area, tenure,
and municipality for each piece of
land.

- 198 -

Points to cover

Procedure

(b) Other provinces

Explain that in the provinces outside the Prairie

(except

Provinces, the lot number, range or

Newfoundland )

concession must be given for each parcel

of land where applicable „

2, Total area

Outline the following points regarding this question:-

(Question 7)

■Area owned
(■Q.u'estidn 8 (a))

Area rented or

leased from others

(Question 8 (b,)).

Area operated for
others as a hired

manager
(Question 8 (c) )

(a) This is the total area operated by the
farmer, including lands owned, rented or
leased from others, or managed „

(b) Land owned by the operator but rented to
someone else must MOT be included on the
schedule for this operator,

(c) Large areas of timber land or other non-
agricultural leind held by a farm operator,
but conducted apart from the farm business,
must NOT be included,

(d) The area reported in this question will be
the total area of the parcels of land re-
ported in Question 6 (Col, (5) in the
Prairie Provinces and Col, (3) for the rest
of Canada ) ,

Point out the following:-

(a) This area must correspond to the area reported
as owned in Question 60

(b) Report as owned the land that the operator or
his wife holds under title, homestead law,
purchase contract, or as an heir or as a
trustee of any individual estate, or which

is more or less permanently occupied by a
squatter,

Explain that this question includes -

(a) area rented or leased from others on a
cash or fixed kind basis,

(b) area rented or leased from others on a
share basis,

(d) all tracts of land rented or leased from
others by the farmer whether located in
this enumerator's sub-district or not.

Explain the following points:-

(a) A hired manager is one who is paid to
operate a farm for a person, firm,
corporation, or institution.

199 -

Points to cover

Procedure

Check acreages
in 'Questions 6,
7 and 8

Farm value
(Question 9)

(b) If a hired manager manages farm land for
someone else, in addition to operating
his own farm, all this land that he
operates, including the managed portion,
must be enumerated on one schedule,

(c) A hired manager is responsible for farming
operations and makes day-to-day decisions.
Caretakers and hired labourers must not be
confused with managers.

Emphasize that the enumerator must always be sure that
the total of the acreages given in
Question 8 equals the total area of the
farm given in Question 7, The total
area given in Question 7 must in turn
equal the total area of land described
in Question 6,

Stress the following important points :-

(a) There must be a value given for every farm
enumerated,

(b) The value reported will be the amount for
which the farm would sell if there were a
willing buyer and a willing seller, and
not a forced sale,

(c) Do NOT report the original value, the
replacement value, or the assessed value
unless it conforms with the market
value,

(d) For institutional farms, report only the
value of the land and buildings which
are used directly for agricultural
purpose So

- 200 -

^ Have trainees oomplete the following exercises relating to Questions 6, 1 , and 8 on
the General Farm schedule. When oomplete, ask two or three trainees for their
answers to each exercise and then give the correct answer.

Note. - Practice Exercise B is divided in two sections - one for use in Eastern

Canada and one for use in Western Canada. Make sure that you use the one
which is applicable to your area.

Practice Exercise B (Eastern Canada)

Directions - Complete each of the following as if for an actual Farm schedule,
using the details provided at the side of each exercise.

Section II— LOCATION, AREA, TENURE AND VALUE, JUNE 1, 1951

6. LOCATION OF FARM (include all land operated in this sub-district or elsewhere, whether owned,
rented or leased from others, or managed}.

Range

concession

(1)

Lot

number

(2)

Area

in
acres

(3)

Tenure
(Owned, rent-
ed or leased,

managed)
(4)

Township, parish
or municipality

(Name)
(5)

Si^vyvJ^Jjt^

■ ■- f ■

■ ■ i

ICO

UyruUJL^ :

■ ■ . >

■1 ••,

— 1 ■

7. What is the TOTAL area of ALL land you OPERATE whether
OWNED, RENTED OR LEASED FROM OTHERS,
MANAGED?

(Include all land you operate in this sub-dbtrict or dsewhere. This total must
agree with area given in question 6.)

8. How many acres of this farm do you:

(a) OWN ■.••-,••-

(b) RENT or LEASE FROM OTHERS

(o) - operate for others as a HIRED MANAGER.

(The total of questions 8(a). (b) and (c) must equal the total acreage of
question 7.)

(Acres;

ISO

6
5
5

1. Mr. Edwards says that he owns
100 acres. Lot 2 in Range 9
and 100 acres. Lot 3 in Range
9. However, he rents 50 acres
of Lot 2 to a neighbour. All
the land is located in the
Municipality of Elmdale.

(Only 50 acres of Lot 2 are
included because the other
50 acres have been rented to
a neighbour and are therefore
not being operated by Mr.
Edwards . )

Section I I^LOCATION, AREA, TENURE AND VALUE, JUNE. I, 19S1

6. LOCATION OF FARM (Indude all land operated in this sub-district or elsewhve. whether owned,
rented or leased from others, or managed).

Range
or ,5
concession
(1)

^ ... ,. f

,■ Lot
number
(2) - ■

Area
. , in
acres
(3)

Tenure
(Owned, rent-
ed OE leased,

managed)
(4)

Township, parish
or municipality

(Name)

(5)

^i^yuLjiu

9 ^.

S3.

. Ur^uue^

is.ib.ir

3 00

-ib>KM^cJuLeJU^

7. What is the TOTAL area of ALL land you OPERATE whether
OWNED, RENTED OR LEASED FROM OTHERS,
MANAGED?

(Include all land you operate hi this sub-district or elsewhere. This total must
agree with area given in question 6.)

8. How many acres of this farm do you:

(a) OWN.

(b) RENT or LEASE FROM OTHERS

(The total of questions 8(a), (b) and (c) must equal the total acreage of
.question 7.)

(.Acres;
V-a.'T

3 Si

2. Mr. Hunter tells you that he
ovms 75 acres of Lot 10 in
Range 9 in the l&inioipality
of Elmdale. He rents 52
acres of Lot 11 in Range 9
from a neighbour and tells
you that he leases 300 acres
(lOO acres in each of Lots
15, 16 and 17 in Range 20)
from the Government, This
leased land is in another,
sub-distriot in the Munici-
pality of Sprucedale.

- 201 -

Section II— LOCATION, AREA, TENURE AND VALUE, JUNE 1, 1951

8. LOCATION OF FARM (include all land operated in this sub-district or elsewhere, whether owned,
rented or leu.^ed from others, or managed).

Range

concession

(1)

Lot

number

(2)

Area

in
acres

(3)

Tenure
lOwned, rent-
ed or leased,

managed)
(4)

Township, parish
or municipality

(Name)
(5)

a^^uA.

■ V - ■ • ■■ •

• "^ .;.,('

7. What is the TOTAL area of ALL land you OPERATE whether
OWNED, RENTED OR LEASED FROM OTHERS,
MANAGED?

(Include all land you operate in this sub-district or elsewher& This total must
agree with area given io question 6.)

8. H.-w many acres of this farm do you:

(a) OWN.

(b) RENT or LEASE FROM OTHERS

(The total of questions 8(a), (b) and Ic) must equal the total acreage of
question 7.)

(Acres;

, 5

. f-S

• 5

- -

3* Mr. Swanson ovms all of Lot
12 in Range 9 (95 acres).
He rents -50 acres of this
.land to a neighbour. All
land is in the L?imicipality
of Elmdale.

Section II— LOCATION, AREA, TENURE AND VALUE, JUNE 1, 19S1

6. LOCATION OF FARM (include all land operated in this sub-district or elsewhere, whether owned,,
rented or leased from others, or managed).

Range

or.

concession

(1)

Lot

number

(2)

Area

acres

(3)

Tenure
(Owned, rent-
ed on leased,

managed)
(4)

Township, parish
or municipality

(Name)
(5)

100

'ht

GJUviJ-AjiL,

10 0

'ht

ifJUyUalu

tJUvfJ^eJlt^

7. What is t
OWNED
MANAG

(Include
agree wit

8. How ma

(a) OW

(b) REl

he TOTAL area of ALL land you 0PERA1
, RENTED OR LEASED FROM
ED?

rE whether
OTHERS,

(Acres;
3lS0

ill land you operate In thls'sub-dlstrict or elsewhere,
h area given in question 6.)

ly acres of this farm do you:

This total must

6
5
5

MT nr T.F.ASR FROM OTHF

ic) ODerftte for othftfs ft.q a HIRED W

lANAGER.

lust equal the

9,00

(The tot
question

si of questions 8
7.)

(a), (b) and (c) n

x>tal acreage of

4. Mr. Martin manages Lots 6
and 7 in Range 9 (each of
which contain 100 acres) for
a business man in Montreal.
Mr. Martin rents from a
neighbour and operates for
himself 50 acres of Lot 8,
Range 9. Ke finds time to
plant and harvest wheat from
this land in addition to
managing the two lots. All
land is in the Municipality
of Elmdale. >

- 202 -

Section II— LOCATION, AREA, TENURE AND VALUE, JUNE 1, 1961

6. LOCATION OF FARM (Indude all land operated in this sub-district or elsewhere, whether owned,
rented or leased from others, or managed).

Range

concession

(1)

Lot

number

(2)

Area

in
acres

(3)

Tenure
(Owned, rent-
ed oc leased,

managed)
(4)

Township, parish
or municipality

(Name)
(5)

(,0

LLylAAJLu

7. What is the TOTAL area of ALL landyou OPERATE whether
OWNED, RENTED OR LEASED FROM OTHERS.
MANAGED?

(Include all land you operate In thlssab-distrlet or elsewhere. This total must
agree with area given in question 6.)

8. How many acres of this farm do you:

(a) OWN.

(b) RENT or LEASE FROM OTHERS

(The total of questions 8(a), (b) and (c) must equal the total acreage ol
question 7.)

(Acresj

5, Mr. Stone owns 100 aores
Lot 14, Range 9 in the
municipality of Elmdale.
He rents 60 aores of it to
Mr, Webb, This' is the
only land that Mr. Webb
farms. Complete Questions
6, 7 and 8 for Mr, Webb's
farm.

- 203 -

Praotioe Exercise B (Western Canada)

Saetlon II— LOCATION, AREA, TENUW£ AND VALUE, JUNE 1, 1961

6. LOCATION OF FARM (Indude*llliu>doperat«itnthi*Bal>-diitrii!tord«awlMn.«lMtlMron*d,
rented or leaeed from othen, or managed).

PRAIRIE PROVINCES only (Uit each seeUon or part eeparately.)

Quarter
and section

<1)

Town-
ship

(2)

Range

(3)

Meri-
dian

(4)

Area

in
acres

(5)

Tenure

(Ouned.

rented or

leaaed.

managed)

(6)

Municipality

(Name or number)
(7)

M/i a

. u

•?«

w. t

3io

JSLoAjLnvm'^

s. E. a.

3.1

w.y

1 Uo

£[^euxftl,ery\J

S. E. I 1

M. ¥

IS$

Jjlojui^^-rvi^

7. What is the T
OWNED, I
MANAGED1

OTAL area of ALL landyou OPERATE whether
lENTED OR LEASED FROM OTHERS,

(Acres)
43?

agree with area given In <iueation 6.)

8. How many acres of this farm do you:
(a) OWN.

1.21

S
6
6

(b) RENT or LEASE FROM OTI

lERS

MANAG

(The total of qneatione 8(a). (b) and (e) nuut equa
question 7.)

the total a

ereageot

Seotlon II— LOCATION, AREA, TENURE AND VALUE, JUNE 1, 1961

6. LOCATION OF FARM (Include all land operated in thia sub-district or elaewhera, whether owned,
rented or leased froin others, or managed).

PRAIRIE PROVINCES only (Ust each secUon or part separately.)

Quarter
and section

(1)

Town-
ship

(2)

Range

(3)

Meri-
dian

(4)

Area

in
acres

(5)

Tenure

(Owned.

rented or

leased.

managad)

(6)

Municipality
(Name or number)

(7)

H. MJ. 5

IV. 1^

lio

Jutuun^rw

S. £. 7

»i

w. V-

IbO

£CeyiM^^t-Y\^

an. lu

W. f

4V-0

.-CWLA-H-t'

au It

a,f

M/. V

&V-0

JL^A^^^yt'

•auL i 0

fti

■ W. H

bH-O

.-^ILO-'lt-t

7. What is the T

OWNED, F

MANAGED1

(Include aU lai

OTAL area of ALL lanclyou OPERATE whether
ENTED OR LEASETD FROM OTHERS,

(Acres)

id you operate In thla sub4liBtriet ortl^mtmrtt. Thb t,

agree with area glven'ln queetlon S.)

8. How many acres of this farm do you:
(a) OWN. ..

IkO

(b) RENT or LEAS^ FROM OTt

[ERS

A,0 $ 0

6
5
6

MANAG

(The total o( queaUona 8(a), (b) and (e) must equal
guestioa 7.)

the total a

veageol

Directions - Coiaplete each of the

following as if for an
actual Farm schedule,
using the details pro-
vided at the, side of
each exercise.

1. Mr, Edwards describes his farm as
follows: in Township 6, Range 28,
West of fourth Meridian, he owns
all of Section 2 and 158 acres
of SE-I^ of Section 11, He rents
all the SW^ of Section 2 to a
neighbour. All land is located
in the lAinioipality of Dawson.

(The SW^ of 2 is not included
because it has been rented to
a neighbour and therefore is
not operated by Mr. Edwards).

2. Mr, Hunter tells you that ho
owns M-g- of Section 5, Township
6, Range 28, West 4 in the
JAjnicipality of Dawson, He
rents the SE-|- of Section 7 in
the ssone township from a
neighbour, and tells you he
leases Sections 16, 17 and 20 in
Township 10, Range 28, West 4
from the Government. This
leased land is in another sub-
district, in the Municipality
of Grant,

- 204 -

Section II— LOCATION, AREA. TENURE AND VALUE, JUNE 1, 1951

6. LOCATION OF FARM (include all land operated in this nib-dlitrlet or elMwhen, whether owned,
rented or leased from others, or managed).

PRAIRIE PROVINCES only (List each section or part separately.)

Quarter
and section

(1)

Town-
ship

(2)

Range
(3)

Meri-
dian

(4)

Area

in
acres

(5)

Tenure

(Owned,

rented or

leased,

managed)

(6)

Municipality
(Name or number)

(7)

(Bt. s. IV. 1

W.il-

&cuM-i^eryiyi

s. £. 1

VI, H-

IttO

or ■

£Uji^'^i'erY\^

. ■

1. What is the!
OWNED, I
MANAGED

OTAL area of ALL land you OPERATE whether
lENTED OR LEASED FROM OTHERS.
»

(Acres)
57«

agree with area given in question 6.)

8. How many acres of this farm do you:

(a) OWN . .

9.10

6
6
S

(b) RENT or LEASE FROM OTI
fri oDPrate for others as a HIRElD

lERS

MAMAf!

(The total of questions 8(a), (b) and (c) must equa
question 7.)

the total acreage of

3« Mr. Swanson ovms all the S-|- of
Section 9, Township 6, Range
28, West 4. He rents 50 acres
of the 'Sil\ of this half section
to a neighbour. All land is in
the Municipality of Dawson.

Section II— LOCATION, AREA, TENURE AND VALUE, JUNE 1. 1961

6. LOCATION OF FARM (include all land operated in this sub-district or elsewhere, whether owned,
rented or leased From others, or managed).

PRAIRIE PROVINCES only (U« each section or part separately.)

Quarter
and section

• (1)

Town-
ship

' (2)

Range

(3)

Meri-
dian

(4)

Area

in
acres

(5)

Tenure
(Owned,
rented or
leased,
managed)

(S)

Municipality

(Name or number)
(7)

CUUL a.0

u/. V-

(.•f-o

/QLcx/d.#Tt^

V. w. /?

W.'f

Ibo

V?.

7. What is the!
OWNED, I
MANAGED

'OTAL area of ALL land you OPERATE whether
lENTED OR LEASED FROM OTHERS,

? .• :.

(Acres)
too

agree with area given in question 6.)

8. How many acres of this farm do you:

^n^ OWN

5
5
6

(b) RENT or LEASE FROM OTI

■lERS

1 1,0

MANAT

lER

UfO

(The toUl of questions 8(a), (b) and (c) must equa
question 7.)

1 the total a

ereage ol

4. Mr. Martin manages a Section of
land described as All Section
■20, Township 6, Range 28, Vifest 4
for a business man in Montreal.
Mr. Martin rents from a neighbour
and operates for himself Hffj
Section 19, Township 6, Range 28,
Vifest 4. He finds time to plant
and harvest wheat from this
quarter in addition to managing
the section of land. All land
is in the Municipality of Dawson.

- 205 -

Saotlon 11— LOCATION, AREA, TENURE AND VALUE, JUNE 1. 1961

6. LOCATION OF^ FARM (Include all land operated In tbiinib-dlstriet or ebawhen.whstliero«D*d,
rented or leased from others, or managed).

PRAIRIE PROVINCES only (U>t each sscUon or part separately.)

Quarter
and section

(1),

Town-
ship

(2)

Range
(3)

Meri-
dian

(4)

Area

in
acres

(5)

Tenure

(Owned,

rented or

leased.

managed)

(6)

Municipality
(Name or number)

(7)

^. N.w.as

u/. y

1.0

/I.

MibClrt.C*^y

7. What U the T

OWNED, F

MANAGED1

(IndudeaUbi

OTAL area of ALL land vou OPERATE whether
;ENTED OR LEASED PROM OTHERS,

(Acres) .

agree with area given In question 6.) -

8. How many acres of this farm do you:.

(a) OWN.

6
6
6

(b) RENT or T.KASE FROM OTl

lERS

k,0

MANAG

must equa]

ER . .

(The total of
question T.)

question

1 8(a), a

>) and (e

the total acreage ol

5, Mr. Stone owns all NVV^ Section
28, Township 6, Range 28, West
4 in the Municipality of Dawson,
He rents 60 acres to Mr, V^ebb,
This is the only land that Mr,
Webb farms. Complete Questions
6, 7 and 8 for Mr. Webb's farm.

- 206 -

EITOlffiRATING CROPS

Points to cover

Procedure

1, Crop section

2, Review of import-
ant rules .
applicable to
crops

3. Field orops

(a) Crop areas sown

or to be sown

for harvest in

1951 (Col. 1)

(b) Crop areas har-
vested in 1950

(Col. 2)

(d). Fall sown crops

& Have the trainees look at Sections III, IV. and
V of the General Farm schedule.

Review the followiilg important rules applicable to the

crops sections:-

(a) Whole numbers are to be reported unless
fractions arel called for on the schedule.
Fractions are alvmys to be reported in
tenths of acres.

(b) Report values to the nearest dollar,
omitting cents,

(d) Report the production of crops in the units
asked for on the schedule.

Explain that the total area of the different crops for

harvest in 195I must be reported in Column 1,
. whether already planted at the date of the
Census or intended to be planted later.

Explain that the total number of acres of each crop
harvested on this farm in 1950 must be
reported in Column 2. If the farm or
any part of it was operated by someone
else in 1950, the best estimate of the
crop areas must be given.

Note the following point sr-

(i) Total production from the acreage harvested
in 1950 must be reported in Column 3,

(ii) VVhenever there is an entry in Column 2, there
must be an entry in Column 3,

(iii) Entries must be made in the units given on
the schedule.

State the following rules :-

(i) Report in Column 1 the area of crops
seeded in the summer or fall of I95O
for harvest in I95I,

- 207 -

Points to cover

(e) Crops go with
the farm

Procedur.e.

(f ) Prairie hay or
marsh hay
(Question 29)

(g) Other field crops
(liuestion 3U)

(h) Seed harvested
((Questions 35
to 43)

(ii) Report in Columns 2 and 3 of Section III the
area and production of crops harvested in I95O
but sown in the summer or fall of 1949,

Point out that (i) the enumerator must report the area and

production of crops harvested in I95O
from the farm described in Question 6,
regardless of who grew them,
(ii) the person who grew the crops in I95O
on all or part of this farm may have
quit farming or he may have moved to
another farm,
(iii) the I95O area of crops is to be re-
lated to the farm and not necessarily
to the person who grew them.

Tell trainees that wild hay (i.e., prairie hay or marsh

hay) may be either cut from the natural
pasture land of the farm, or cut by the
farmer from land outside the farm.

Explain that -

(i) any field crop grown on the farm and not

specified on the schedule must be included in
this question.

(ii)

"X" is to be marked in the box beside the
proper crop and the acreage and production
entered in the proper column if the crop is
sunflower grown for seed, rape grovm for
seed, mustard grown for seed, or flax of
fibre varieties.

(iii) if it is some other crop than those mentioned

"X" is to be marked in the box beside "Others",
and the acreage and production entered in the
proper column,

(iv) field roots other than potatoes, sugar beets
for sugar, turnips, swedes or mangolds (for

1 lexa roots ocner cnan pot
for sugar, turnips, swedes or mangolds (for
instance, carrots for feed) will be recorded
;ion 34 with an "X" mark opposite

in (Question 34 with an "X"
"Others".

(v) seeds of field roots must be recorded in
(iuestion 34, with an "X" mark opposite
"Others",

Note the following points:-

(i) The production of seed must be. reported in
these questions, but the acreage of hay from
which the seed was harvested must be report-
ed in (Question 24 or 25,

- 208 -

Points to cover

Procedure -

4. Vegetables
(Questions 47
to 63)

(ii) If the hay froin v^hich the seed was taken was
used as feed, the production of hay will be
shown in Column 3 of 'Question 24 or 25,

(iii). The seed must be reported on a cleaned basis.
If the seed was not cleaned, the enumerator
must obtain an estimate of the weight of the
seed on a cleaned basis.

5. Tree fruits
. (Quest ions.. 64

Explain that -

(a) the acreage and value of production apply
only to farms growing vegetables mainly for
sale,

(b) vegetable sales may be made by the farmer on
the fresh market, to canners, freezers, de-
hydrators,' or other processors,

(c) if vegetables are grown on the farm, but are
mainly consumed by the farm household, with
possibly a small portion sold, then Ques-
tions 47 and 49 must be marked "No" and the ■
rest of the section skipped,

(d) if more than one crop of vegetables are to be
planted on the saiie piece of land, then the
acreage of each crop must be reported,

(e) vegetables grown on institutional farms and
consuiiied by the members of the institution
are considered to be sold and the questions
in this section will therefore be completed,

it Have the trainees look at the note on the schedule
under the heading of Section IV which says "Do not
include potatoes and turnips". Point out that
these crops are covered by Questions 30 and 31,

Emphasize that Question 64 will be asked on all farms,
but if there are less than 2$ fruit
trees on the farm"] then Questions 5$ to
71 will be skipped.

Field Supervisors in fruit growing areas -

(a) must- explain the use of the tables given in
Appendix G, Page 108 of the Enumeration
Manual on determining the approximate
acreage and the number of trees in an
orchard, ■

- 209 -

Points to cover .

Procedure, •,.. • . ,.,;,,.;■

6. Small fruits * ■
(tiuestions 72 ' ■
to 77) -^

(b) must point o.ut that if other .crops (such as
cultivated hay cut for feed, or .vegetables)
are grown between the rows of fruit' trees,
the area of the fruit trees and the areas of

"the, other crops must all be reported as if
' . they were grown alone,

■' ■ ' be included, • ■ ' : ^

Explain the following points:-

■ (a) The acreage and value of production of small
fruits apply only to those farms which re-
■' port these products grown mairily for sale,

■ • ' (b)- If- these products are grown on the farm, but
■ are mainly consumed by the farm household,
with possibly a small portion sold, then
-• - - ■ Quest i oh 72 will be marked "No" and- 'Que s-
- ■-'■'■ t'ions' 73 to 77 skipped, ;.■■■.■' ::■:

Oreenh'ouse and
Nursery products,
■ Mushrooms
(Questions 78
to 82) •■ '

' ■'.-'^'tcii^ ^

Explain that -

(a) these questions refer only to products
grown mainly for [sale,

(b) plants started in greenhouses and trans-
"... planted in the fi-eld of thl-s' farm are 'not

'■ to -'be included,

A Have. the. ..trainees look, at the schedule and
read carefully what greenhouse and nursery
■ products include, ; '.!••■:■ ;;i,;.i..i ;i;..

Crreenhduse products include vegetables,
vegetable plants, flovjers, etc,, grown under
glass.

Nursery products include trees, shrubs,
flowers, bulbs, etc., grown in the open.

Include only mushrooms and rhubarb grown in
houses.

- 210 -

Points to cover

Procedure

8. Two or more crops
harvested from the
same land

(a) Double crops

(b) Other crops
harvested in
orchards

( d ) Interplant ing
of fruit
trees

(e) Mixed grains

(f ) Mixed hay

(g) More than one
cutting of
hay crops

Outline the following rules:-

(a) If two or more crops are grown in succession
on the same land within the same year, the
entire acreage must be reported for each
crop. This will occur most frequently in
the case of vegetables,

(b) Where another crop is grov;n between trees in
an orchard, report the acreage of the crop
as if it were grown alone. If there are 25
or more fruit trees, report also the total
area for each kind of fruit,

(c) V/hen two crops are grown together, as when
pumpkins are grown between or in rows of
corn, the total acreage is to be reported
under each crop,

(d) The interplanting of two or more kinds of
fruit trees must be converted to the equi-
valent number of acres, or fractions of an
acre, for each kind of fruit separately.

Example ; If there are 2 acres of apple
and peach trees planted in
alternate rows so that there
is one row of apples, one row
of peaches and so on, one acre
of apples would be reported in
Question 66 and one acre of
peaches in ^iuestion 68,

(e) Report grain crops sown and harvested as a
mixture in Question 15.

(f) A mixture of grasses and clovers or alfalfa
must be reported in Question 24.

(g) In reporting two or more cuttings of hay from
the sarae area of land, the acreage must be
reported but once. The total production of
all cuttings must be reported in Column 3

. of Question 21^ or 25,

- 211 -

Practice Exercise C,

1951

19S0

Section III— FIELD CROPS

Area for
harvest
in 1951

Area

harvested

in 1950

Quantity

harvested

in 1960

acres

quantity

GRAINS

10. Wheat, spring sown (except durum) .

Bushels
2

11. Wheat, fall sc

12. Wheat, durut
18. Oats for graii

)wn

n '.

1 (threihed or combined) ....

* (fsy

14. Barley

'" i,0

15. Mixed grains

16. Rye, fall sowi

17. Rye, spring s(

18. Flax seed. . . .

CK.

I..

)wn

19. Corn shelled <

(Exclude enalli
— eeeqaestloni

20. Buckwheat. . .

)r for grain.

«e and sweet or canning com
28 and 65.)

21. Peas (dry lor thi

(Exdude cannli

22. Field beans (di
28. Soybeans (tort

rashlng)

ig peas — eee question 68).

ry)

g beau— see queatlon 62.)
ireshlng) ,

HAY or FORAGE CROPS

24. All cultivated hay (except alfalfa sown alone)

Tons

25. Alfalfa sown a

26. Oats cut for h

lone

ay (or (feeding unthreahed) . .

27. Othergraincutforhay(orfeedinEunt)ir«lied)

28. Corn for ensile

29. Prairie or mm

•limrhere).

ige or fodder

"sh hay (cut on your farm or

XXXXX

POTATOES, ROOTS, Etc.

80. Potatoes (report to nearest tenth acre)

81. Turnips, swedi

nearest tenth a

82. Sugar beets for

SB and mangolds (report to
sro) ;

(cwt.)

sugar

(cwt.)
81

88. Tobacco

(Cheektype,
report toltl
acreage and

D Flue cured
O Burley
g Dark
a Cigar
aPipe
D Other

1 la Sunflower seed

2 u Rape sejsd

8 D Mustard seed
4 a Flax of fibre
varieties

0 Others, (such aa hops,
sunflower for feed,
etc)

(tons)

34. Other field,
crops

(Cheek crop,
report total

(lb.)

acreage and

(lb.)

For office use

^ Have the trainees complete the

Field Crops section of the schedule
for the following exercise. Correct
as for previous exercises.

Directions - Complete the Field

Crops section in this
exercise, as if for an
actual Farm schedule,
using the details
below.

Mr, Cooper is operating the same
land he had last year. Last year he
harvested 655 bushels of oats from
22 acr^s, and 2io bushels of barley
from 9 acres. He also had a 5g^ acre
mixture of alfalfa and brome grass for
hay. He cut this hay twice during the
year, the first cutting yielding 12
tons, and the second cutting 8 tons.
He out 2 tons of wild hay along the
road beside his farm. He had a small
patch of potatoes of about l/lO acre
and dug 10 bushels from this patch.
He also had. ^- acre of turnips yield-
ing 4.^ hundred weight and 3 acres of
sunflowers yielding 1675 pounds of
seed.

This year he has 39 acres of
oats and 2/10 of an acre of potatoes.

(5g acres of cultivated hay could be
reported as either 5 or 6 acres be-
cause there is no provision for
reporting fractions in this question,
^ acre of turnips could be reported
either as 2/lO or 3/lO, Table 1 in
Appendix C of the Enumeration Ifenual
shows that 1 bushel of potatoes
weighs 60 pounds. Thus 10 bushels
equal 6 hundred weight.)

- 212 -

VI. CONDITION OF LAND, iJUNEl, 1951

Points to cover

1. Condition of land

2, Area lander crops
; ; (Question 83)

Procedure

* Have the trainees look at Section VI of.
the General Farm schedule.

Explain that - ■

(a) these questions are designed to find out how
the land in the farm is usedo

(b) each acre of the farm can be counted only once.

(c) the acreages reported in Questions 83 to 86,
incl. must be added and the total entered in the
space provided between Questions 86 and 87.

* Refer the trainees to the part of Section
VI on the schedule marked "Enumerator".

(d) the acreages reported in Questions 83 to 88,
incl. must be added and the total entered in
the space provided under Question 88. This
total must equal the total area of the farm
as reported in Question 7.

* Refer the trainees to the space on the
schedule under Question 88.

Explain that - - • . ■

. (a) this question must include the total, acreage-

which is, or will be, under crop of any kind in
1951. : :

(b) each acre of the farm must only be counted once.

,- (c) if intercropping or double cropping is practised
. , . , on the farm then the answer to this question will
be less than the total of the individual crops.
' Such cases must be clearly explained in the
"Remarks" section of the schedule. •

- 213 -

Points to cover

Procedure

3. Area of improved
land for pasture
or grazing
(Question 84)

4. Summer fallow
(Question 85)

Refer the trainees to the note on the
schedule under this question and have
them read it. Make certain that all
trainees thoroughly understand how the
answer to this question is obtained.

This may be obtained by adding the 1951 area
of all crops in Section III, vegetables in
Section IV, fruits and nurseries in Section
V plus the. area in home gardens.

Point out that this question -

(a) includes all land which has been cultivated and
seeded to pasture and is used for grazing.

(b) does NOT include natural prairie or pasture land
(v/hich must be reported in Question 88),

(c)does NOT include land pastured after hay was cut
(such land must be included in Question 83).

■ * Refer the trainees to the note in

Question 84 on the- schedule, "Do not
include the area cut for hay-ahdre- ■;-';""^y
ported in Question 83" » ''" '

Point oiit the following:- '

(a) This question includes the total acreage which
is tilled or will be tilled as summer fallow in
1951.

(b) If a crop, such as sweet clover or buckwheat,
is sown and is to be ploughed under as green
manure, the acreage must be reported as summer
fallow,

(c) Cultivated land that is not being tilled this
year and is not -under crops, but is lying idle,
must be reported in Question 86 and NOT in this
question,

(d) Do NOT' include as summer fallow, land that will
be ploughed in the summer after a crop, such as
hay or fall rye, has been removed. Such acreage
must be reported in the crop section.

214

Points 'to cover

Procedure

5. Area of barnyards.

Include in this question the following:-

lanes, ' roads and

idle cultivated

(a) What is sometimes called the farmstead — the

land (Question 86)

farm buildings and barnyards.

(b) Any cultivated land that is being left idle and

is neither planted to crops nor summer fallowed.

(d) Areas of new breaking that have not yet been

cropped.

6, Woodland

Include in this question those' parts of the farm which are

(Question 8?)

(a) Woodland or woodlots,.

(b) Cutover land vdth young growth which has, or will

have, value as timber or fuelwood.

(d) Maple bushes.

Do NOT include large timber tracts which are run as a

separate business from the farm.

■

7. Area of other

Explain that this question includes areas of natural

land •; . ■

pasture or hay land that have not been cultivated, brush

(Question 88)

pasture, grazing or waste land, sloughs, marsh,, rocky

land, etc., that are part of the farm and must be enum-

;.. ., ,. .. .,.,..-

erated to give a complete account of the farm acreage. '

- 215 -

i Have the trainees complete Section VI (Condition of land) for the following exercise.
Correct as for previous exercises. : ■

Directions

Practice Exercise D.

Complete each of the following as if for an actual Farm schedule, using
the details provided at the side of each exercise.

•83.

100

(acres)

Section VI— CONDITION OF LAND, JUNE 1, 1951

What is the area under CROP FOR HARVEST THIS YEAR?...
(This may be obtained by adding the IMl area of aU cropa in Section III, vege-
Ublea in Section IV, fruits and nurseries in Section V plus the ares in home gar- -
dens. See the Enumerator's Manual for exceptional cases of interoopping or
double crops.)

84. What is the area of IMPROVED LAND FOR PASTURE or / /-

GRAZING? (Do not include the area cut for hay and reported in questioa 8S.) . ■

mens)

85. What is the area of SUMMER FALLOW?

(sacs)

86. What is the area in barnyards, lanes, roads and any Improved _

land that will be idle this year? 2_

(Indude new brealting but exclude summer fallow.) iscns)

ENUMERATOR— ,, j
Add acres in questions 83 to 86 inclusive. Li_i

87. What is the area of WOODLAND? (include farm woodlota, maple bushes

and cutoverland with young growth which has or will have value as wood or Umber) _—^— _

(seres)

88. What is the area of all other land such as unimproved hay „ ,

land, rough pasture, slough, marsh, waste land, etc.? 5L2_

(acres)

Add the acreage of questions 83 to 88. This total / / o
must equal the total area of the farm, question 7 ijdu_

(acres)

Mr. Wright reports that he has 60 acres
of oats, 15 acres of barley and 23
acres of alfalfa (which he expects to
cut for hay). He also has a 1 acre
vegetable garden for home use, and 1
acre of potatoes. A 15-acre field of
grass and clover mixture seeded two
years ago is used only for pasture.
He calculates that the barnyards,
lanes, etc. occupy S^ acres* The
rest of the 160-acre farm is wasteland.

(The 100 acres entered in question 83
is the total of the oats, barley,
alfalfa, vegetable garden and potatoes.
The 2-| acres in question 86 must be
reported as 3 acres as there is no
provision for the reporting of
fractions in this question).

Section VI— CONDITION OF LAND, JUNE 1, 1961

•83. What is the area under CROP FOR HARVEST THIS YEAR?..

(This may be obtained by adding the ISBl area of all crops in Section III, vege-
tables in Section IV, fruits and nurseries in Section V plus the area in home gar-
dens. See the Enumerator's Manual tor exceptional cases of Intareropplng or
double crops.)

84. What is the area of IMPROVED LAND FOR PASTURE or
GRAZING? (Do not indude the area cut for hay and reported bi question 88.) . .

(sens)

iscns)

85. What is the area of SUMMER FALLOW?

(seres)

86. What is the area in barnyards, lanes, roads and any improved a

land that will be idle this year? fi_

(Indude new breaking but exdude summer fallow.) iseres)

ENUMERATOR— i a
Add acres in questions 83 to 86 inclusive !i2

87. What is the area of WOODLAND? (indude farm woodlota, maple bushes .

and cutover land with young growth which has or will have value as wood or timber) _— — _

(acres)

88. What is the area of all other land such as unimproved hay . .

land, rough pasture, slough, marsh, waste land, etc.? LrL.

(seres)
Add the acreage of questions 83 to 88. This total a ^

must equal the total area of the farm, question 7. iil

(acres)

Mr. Rand tells you that he seeded 56
acres of wheat last summer and that
he expects to harvest it early in
August of this year. He also has a
considerable acreage in vegetables
which he sells in the local market.
On June 1 he has 3g acres in cabbage,
2g- acres in green peas, 3 acres in
sweet corn, 1 acre of cauliflower and
1 acre of radishes. He plans on
selling the radishes in about two or
three weeks and planting 1 acre of
lettuce; on the same piece of land.

He estimates that the barnyards, lanes,
etc. occupy about 2 acres and that
there is an acre of trees forming a
windbreak around the farm. There is
10 acres of wasteland on the 80-acre
farm.

(The 67 acres entered in question 83
is the total of the acreage in wheat,
cabbage, green peas, sweet corn,
cauliflower and radishes. As the
lettuce will be planted on the same
land as the radishes, this acre of land
will only be counted once in question
83 (see section on double crops) ).

> 216 -

VII. IRRIGATION, FOREST FIRES, FARM MACHINERY,
HIRED WORKERS, PART-TIME WORK

Points to cover

1. Irrigation
(Questions 89
and 90)

Procedure

Explain that -

2. Forest Fires
(Questions 92
and 93)

(a) Question 89 must be asked and an answer recorded
on every farm,

(b) irrigation is defined as the application of water
to the land by artificial means such as a system
of ditches or furrows, sprinklers, or similar
works,

(c) each .irrigated acre must only be reported once
in Question 90 even though it was irrigated more
frequently or more than one crop was harvested
from it,

(d) if irrigation is reported in Saskatchewan,
Alberta or British Columbia, the Irrigation
schedule (Form 8) must also be completed.

Point out that =

(a) only the number of fires that actually started
in the woodland of this farm during the last
10 years are to be reported in Question 92.

(b) Question 92 does NOT include the number of
fires that started on another farm and burned
woodland on this farm,

(c) the total area of farm woodland burned by all
forest fires, whether or not they originated
on this farm must be reported in Question 93.

(d) if more than one fire has burned the same area
within the last ten years, then the area
burned by each fire must be enumerated,

(e) an area may be reported as burned in Question
93 even though Question 92 indicates that no
forest fires started on this farm in the last
ten years. Such areas would be burned by a
fire which started on another farm,

(f) fires used for purposes of land clearing- are
not to be reported. Of course, if the fire
used for land clearing got out of control and
burned woodland it was not intended to burn,
then such a fire would be called a forest
fire and would be enumerated.

- 217 -

Points to cover

Procedure.. ' . ..' .

A Refer trainees to note beside "Forest Fires"

on the schedule, "exclude fires used for

purposes of land clearing".

3, Farm machinery

Stat(

3 the following rules regarding the enumeration of

(Question 94)

• (Question

94:-

(a)

The value reported must be the amount for which
the machinery or equipment would sell if there
were a willing buyer and a willing seller, and
not a forced sale.

(b)

Farm machinery owned on shares must be included
on the farm where it is found on June 1,

(c)

Do not include old equipment which is no
longer used.

(d)

Do not. report the original value or the re-

placement value unl ess it conforms with the
market value.

4, Hired workers

Explain

that -

(1)

only persons working on this farm and receiving

5, Part-time work
(1) (Question 98)

wages during the week ending June 2, 1951, are
to be reported.

(2) hired managers and family workers receiving
regular wages are to be included,

(3) for Census purposes, housework is NOT to be
included as farm labour.

..AHave the trainees pay particular attention
to the note "Exclude housework" on the
schedule.

A Read Question 98 very carefully with the
trainees.

Was the amount^ received from the sale of agri-
cultural products of this farm greater than the
income you (the operator) received from all
other sources in I950? (exclude income from
investments) ,

- 218 -

Points to cover

(2) (Cluestion 99)

Procedure

Explain that -

(1) other sources include fishing, lumbering,
mining, roadwork, carpentry, trucking, etc,

(2) amounts received from crop insurance, hail
insurance, Grovernment subsidies, etc,, are
to be counted as agricultural products

, . sold.

Emphasize that Question 98 must be answered on every
schedule.

Explain that -

(a) Non-farm work includes -

carpentry,

fishing,

blacksmith ing,

working in the woods,

working on the roads,

buying grain or live stock,

clerical work,

working for the municipality or other
organization either for cash or in
payment for taxes, etc,,

operating a filling station, grocery
store, etc.

(b) Farm work off the farm includes the following
when done for pay or wages -

ploughing,
threshing,
general farm labour, etc.

Point out that Q.uestion 99 does NOT include -

(1) exchange work, such as helping a neighbour
with threshing or haying,

(2) days of non-farm work or farm work off the
farm performed by members of the operator's
faiaily.

- 219 -

VIII. LIVE STOCK AND LIVE STOCK PRODUCTS

Points to cover

1. Live stock and live
stock products
(Questions 100 - I36)

2. Total number of
each class of
live stock

Procedure

± Have the trainees look at Section XI of the
schedule.

State the f6llo\iring rules for enumerating live stock: -

(a) Report all domestic animals on the farm, whether
they belong to the farm operator, his hired help
or members of his family..' .:- .

(b) Report animals kept on the farm which are pastured
or fed for others.

Exception; live stock kept on community

•pa^turos must be reported on

tne laiiii of the owner of the
. . ' live stock.

' another farm or ranch (unless it is a community
, pasture). Such live stock will be enumerated on
the schedule of the farm or ranch where they are '
being kept. ;

(d) Breeding animals v;hich are ovmed jointly by two

or more farmers or by government agencies and kept
in turn on the various farms shall be reported on
the farm v;here they happen to be located on June 1.

(e) Report the total number of hives of bees owned by
the farm operator, whether kept on this farm or
elsewhere. Sometimes you will find that there are
hives of bees on the farm which are owned by some-
one other than the operator; these are not to be
enumerated on this farm. VJhere tiie owner of the
bees has a farm, they must be reported on his
faim schedule, but where he does not have a farm,
the bees must be reported on Form 7 at the time
the oimer himself is enumerated.

ft Have the trainees look at the questions on the
various classes of live stock, and point out
that there is usually a question which calls
for the total number as well as for the numbers
according to age and sex.

- 220 -

Points to cover

Procedure ■

. '

Empha

size

that the enumerator must make sure that the
total of the numbers accoi*ding to ag? and sex
for each class of live stock is the same a!s
the total number reported for that class.

3. Disposal of live
stock

State the
Section: -

following rules regarding the questions in this

(Questions 137 - 143)

(a)

Include all animals, sold alive,, slaughtered
for sale, or slaughtered for home consumption
on the farm in 1950,

(b)

The animals may have been owned by persons
not living on the farm.

.... ._...,.

(c)

Where live stock are bought for fattening
and a General Farm schedule is required for
the farm, the sales and consumption must be
recorded.

...... , . ■,

(d)

If there are any animals reported as sold in
Section XII, there must be corresponding
entries. in Section XIII.

Example: If one calf is reported as sold

alive in 1950 for |50, a "1" would
be entered in Column 1 of Question
138 (a) and $50 in Question l/ii^.

, ■ ■ ■

(e)

Do NOT include the transactions of drovers
and live stock dealers where the animals are
bought and immediately re-sold.

- 221 -

IX. FOREST PRODUCTS',, MAPLE PRODUOTS' AND' F0R-^llABlNa\^BiIPJjS-'

Points to cover

Procedure

1. Forest products
(Questions 150-158)

* Have the trainees read this section of the
schedule very carefully.

Point out that -

(a) Question 150 must always have an sinswer.

(b) products cut on the farm for eithrfr home use
or for sale must be reported.

(c) forest products may be cut by someone other
than the farm operator, but they must never-
theless be reported if cut on the farm.

(d) standard cords must be reported.

♦ Refer trainees to Table- 8, Appendix C, Page 108
of the Enumeration Manual. ' '- ■

2. Maple products
(Questions 159-163)

Point out that -

(a) Question 159 must always have an answer.

(b) these questions refer to maple products pro-
duced in the spring of 1951.

3. Fur-bearing
animals
(Questions 164-166)

Emphasize that Question 164 must always have an answer.

- 222 -

X. ENWiERATING THE SALES OF FARM PRODUCTS.

.,.JPoints„ to cover.

.1. .Quest ions.,on -sales...

es V?

2, Products traded
or exchanged

3. Sales on

Institutional
Farms

k» Use of account
books and income
tax forms

Procedure

* Have the trainees look at Questions l+U ■ ■■ -

to 46, 144 to 149, 158, 163 and 166.

Explain the following points regarding sales :-

(a) All sales from the farm must be recorded, whether
the returns were received by the farm operator or
by some other person.

(b) A landlord's share of crops and live stock sold
are to be considered as sales from the operator's
farm,

(d) Sales values must be the amoiont received at the
farm or local market.

Explain that -

(a) products such as butter and eggs traded for
groceries must be included in the value of
sales.

(b) products exchanged for services must be con-
sidered as sold, even though there was no
receipt of money.

, (c) products traded or exchanged must be valued at
prices prevailing in 1950.

Explain that products of an institutional farm used by
the institution must be considered as sold
and an estimate of their value entered in
one of the sections relating to "Sales",
and NOT in Section XXI, "Value of products
used on this farm".

Point out that ;-

(a) if the farmer keeps books, the enumerator will
find these of great value in getting information
on farm sales.

223 -

Points to cover

Procedure'

5. Crop insurance
and Government
payments

6. Crop participation
payments

(b) if a farmer has a copy of his 1950 Income Tax
form, it will give the enimerator information
on sales 9

Caution the trainees concerning the use of Income Tax
forms : -

(a) Income Tax forms report only the receipts of
the farm operator himself while the sales
for the complete farm are required on the
farm schedule, regardless of who may have
shared in the receipts,

(b) Sales of products purchased for Immediate ,
resale are included in the tax statement,
but must not be reported as sales on the
Farm schedule.

Explain that payments received in' 1950 for hail damage,
crop failure, etc., from insurance
organizations or P.F.A.A. must be reported
as crop sales in Questions 44, 45, or 46.

Explain that all crop participation payments received in
1950 must be included with the crop sales.

- 224 -

XI. SAMPLE QUESTIONS

Points to Cover

• *

Procedure

1, Sample questions

Ask:

i
On what farms will Questions 16? to
191 be asked?;

; ■

Ans,

On farms that i are in the agricultural
sample, that is, on every farm where the
Farm Schedule Number ends in "2" or ."7".

Ask:

Explain the term Farm Schedule Number.

Ans.

The Farm Schedule Number is the number
given to each General Fann schedule in
the order in which the farms lie on the
enumeration route.

Ask:

Is the Farm Schedule Number the same as
the Household or Dv/elling Number?

Ans.

No.

,,=:■': ''■-■!■ .( ; ■; . ■■ ■

ote -

Make certain that the trainees fully

Dn..-™.- 1-,- ■ '■■■',

^understand the difference between thes«
two numbers. ■

2. Farm expenditures

State the f

ollow

ing general rules regarding the enumeratio

(Questions 167-174)

3. Rented land 1950
(Questions 175-179)

of farm expenditures :-

(a) Report all specified expenditures made in 1950
for the farm, whether paid in cash or obtained
on credit.

(b) For tenant-operated farms, include expenditures
for this farm made in 1950 by the landlord as
well as those made by the tenant.

* Have the trainees read Section XVII of
the Farm schedule and note that only
certain expenditures are required.

Point out that -

(a) these questions apply to land rented in 1950.

(b) the area reported in Question 176 may be
different from the area reported as rented in
1951 (Question 8 (b)).

- 225 -

Points to Oover

Procedure

4. Milk production
(Questions 180-188)

Point out that -

(a) Quantity
(Column l)

(b) Milk equivalent
-(Column 2)

(a) Questions 180 to 186 apply to the month of May.
1951.

(b) Questions 18? and 188 apply to "yesterday":
that is, the day before the enumerator com-

■ pleted the schedule for the farm.

Explain that -

(i) the quantity must always be reported' in pounds
in Questions 181, 182, 183 and 184.

(ii) the unit of measure must be marked with an "X"
for Questions 180 and 185.

Examples ;

(i) Question 180: If the farmer reports the quantity
of whole milk sold in gallons, the enumerator must,
mark an "X" in the square- opposite gallons and
enter the quantity reported in Column 1.'

(ii) Question 181 (b): If the fanner reports the

amount of cream sold in gallons, the amount must
be converted to pounds. The note under this
question says "1 gallon of cream weighs approxi-
mately IC pounds". Therefore the enumerator
must multiply the number of gallons by 10 in
order to convert the nxomber of gallons to. pounds
of cream.

Explain that -

(i) the milk equivalent column has been inserted to
. help the enumerator arrive at the total produc-
tion of milk. ■ '■

(ii) the enumerator must enter in Coliomn 2 the pounds
of whole milk that are equivalent to the quantity
of cream, butter and cheese entered in Column 1.

(iii) if Column 2 is properly filled in, the sum of
the entries of Questions 180 to 185 (Column 2)
will equal the total for Question 186, The
enumerator must make this check.

- 226 -

Points to Sover

Procedure

(iv) a milk equivalent table has been, printed on the
schedule in order to assist the enumerator in
making these conversions,

* Point out Milk Equivalent Table on schedule.

Examples ;

(i) Question 180: If the amount of whole milk sold
in May is reported in gallons, the enumerator
will mark "X" in the box opposite gallons. In
order to report the milk equivalent in Column
2, the enumerator may consult the table of Milk
Equivalents which tells him that 1 gallon of
milk weighs approximately 10 pounds. In this
case, the enumerator will multiply the gallons
of milk reported by 10 and enter the resulting
figure in Column 2»

(ii) Question 181(a): In order to convert the

number of poirnds of cream sold on a butterfat
basis, to the milk equivalent, consult the
Milk Equivalent Table. If 1 pound of butterfat
is equivalent to approximately 30 pounds of milk,
the enumerator must multiply the pounds of
butterfat sold by 30 and enter the resulting
figure, which is the milk equivalent, in Column
2.

Point out that -

(i) the quantity reported in question 185(a) should
include only that milk and. cream (in tenns of
whole milk) actually consumed in the farm house-
holds for table use and baking.

(ii) it must not include milk separated to obtain
cream for sale or buttermaking because this is
reported in questions 181 and 182.

(iii) it. must not include whole milk used for feeding
live stock because this is reported in Question
185(b).

- 227 -'■

Points -to flover

Procedure

(d) Total milk pro-
• duced in May
(Question 186)

5 . Mortgages or agree-
ments for sale
(Questions 189 and
190)

6, Value of products
used on the farm
(Question 191)

Emphasize that -

(i) this inquiry must be answered on all schedules
where there is any milk produced.

(ii) the answer to this question must equal the sum
of the entries for Questions 180 to 185 (Column
2). ... _.

(iii) this total should be checked, wherever possible,
v;ith any other figures that the farmer may have
regarding the total milk production, since the
total of the entries for Coliomn 2 of Questions
180 to 185 is based on the accuracy of the con-
version factors used.

Explain that -

(a) the enumerator must obtain information on mort-
gage and agreements for sale debt only .on farm
buildings and land owned by the operator,
whether or not. it is located in the enumerator's
sub-district.

(b) the buildings and land may be operated by the

~ farmer himself or rented to someone else. . , .

Point out that -

(a) this question refers to the estimated value of
products of the farm used by all households on
the farm in 1950.

(b) in order to help the respondent arrive at a
total figure, space has been provided on the
schedule to break this item into various'
categories. If the respondent finds that it
is easier to arrive at a total figure without
breaking it into these groups, they may be
skipped .

- 228 -

k Have the trainees oomplete the following exercise relating to Section XIX on the
General Farm schedule. Correct as for previous exercises.

Practice Exercise E.

Directions - Complete the exercise below as if for Section XIX of the actual Farm
schedule, using the details provided at the side of the exercise.

Section XIX— PRODUCTION OF WHOLE MILK IN MAY, 1961
MILK EQUIVALENT TABLE

Item

1 (cal.
mUk

lib.
butterfat

Approximate milk
equivalent

101b.

301b.

lib.
cream

10 1b.

Igal.
cream

100 lb.

lib.
butter

25 lb.

lib.
cheese

111b.

*180. Whole milk sold in MAY (chtek unit). . .
idndude milk uld retail and to dairy or tactoiy.)

181. Cream sold in MAY:

(a) on a butterfat basis

Dgal.
Bqt.
Dlb.

lb.
.lb.

(b) by measure

(Report In pounds — 1 gallon of cream welzha
approxli^tely 10 pounds.)

182. Butter, made on this farm in MAY lb.

183. Butter made on this farm and sold in MAY. .lb.

184. Cheese made on this farm in MAY lb.

185. Milk used on this farm in MAY either as

whole milk or cream:

(a) By the households on this farm ! a gal.

(ch«elc un») \ H qt.

(Include milk skimmed (or (veam.)

(b) Whole milk fed to live stock/ sj gal.

(check unlf) \ D qt.

(Do not include skim milk.)

xxxxxx

1 86. Total whole milk produced in MAY

(The sum of questions 180 to 185 (col. 2) must equal the answer to this

question)

187. How many cows were milked on this farm YESTERDAY?. No.

Quantity

i.OOO

SCO

JLA-

Milk

equivalent

lb.

1.50 0

ISA

a^ooo

150

xxxxx

/ / 0

±o_

lio

16'" 0.

/»

Mr. Forest has a dairy
farm and reports the following
information for Iviay 1951 j- He
sold 3,000 quarts of fluid milk,
5 pounds of cream on a butterfat
basis and 160 pints of cream by
measure. He also made 6 pounds
of butter and 10 pounds of cheese
for his OTivn use. He estimates
that his household consumed 32
quarts of milk and his live
stock 12 gallons of milk.
Yesterday 14 cows produced 33
gallons of milk.

188. How much milk was produced YESTERDAY? lb.

3S0

- 229 "
XII. THE ENUMERATION OF CERTAIN TYPES OF FAEMS

Points to cover

Procedure

1, Institutional
farms

2, Indian reserva-
tions and allotted
Indian lands

State the following rules regarding the enumeration of
institutional farms:-

(a) Report only the area and value of land and the
value of buildings actually used for agricultural
purposes,

(b) Do not include the value of buildings used for
the housing of inmates or for housing students,

,, reported as the farm operator,
(;d) jVrite the name of the institution at the top
"of the schedule,

(e) If it -is necessary to report as farm operator

a person, such as the executive of the institu-
tion, then the enumerator may leave blank
(Question 5 "How long have you operated this
farm?" This must, however, be explained in the
"Remarks" section of the schedule,'

(f ) Products of the farm used by the institution
must be considered as sold and an estimate of
their value entered in the proper section on
farm revenues »

Outline the following rules:-

A, Land on reservation allotted to individual
Indians, -
(i) A separate schedule must be completed for each
holding in the same manner as ordinary hold-
ings are enumerated,
(ii) Land will be reported as owned.

Land on reservation not allotted to individual

Indians nor leased p
(i) Any land belonging to an Indian reservation
and used for agricultural purposes but neither
allotted to individual Indians nor leased to a
corporation or individual, constitutes a
single farm,
( ii ) Report the Indian Agent or farm manager as
operator,
(iii) Include on this schedule any live stock

belonging to the reservation as a whole, or
live stock belonging to members of the.
reservation who have no allotted land,
(iv) Do not include the acreage of wild land not
utilized for agricultural purposes.

- 230 -

Points to cover

Procedure

3« Go-operative farms

Explain the following: -

or colonies

(a) If a number of persons operate 'a farm as a

co-operative enterprise or colony, report the

complete enterprise or colony as one

farm.

(b) The manager, president, etc., must be

reported as the farm operator.

be clearly written at the top of the

schedule.

(d) Report as hired workers only those persons

doing the farm work and receiving regular

"■".'■':.■.. '

cash wages.

4, Community pastures-

Explain that - -

(a) if the headquarters of a community pasture is

located in his sub-district, the enumerator

must complete a farm schedule covering the

complete pastures

(b) the manager of the pasture must be given as

the farm operator.

■ ■ ■

written across the top of the schedule.

:" '■ ■ '■■•-.

(d) live stock which are pastured on the

Community Pasture for other farm operators

must not be enumerated on the schedule for

the Community Pasture as they will be

enumerated on the farm of the owner.

(e) for Community Pastures operated by P,F,R.A, ,

the enumerator must fill in as much informa-

■

tion as the manager can supply. Do not ask

the manager to get information from the Head

Office of P,F,R»A» in Regina,

. (f ) the enumerator must make a note in the

"Remarks"' section of the schedule of data

that can only be secured from the Regina

Head Office.

- 231 -

XIII. REVIEWING GENERAL FARM ..SCHEDULES

Points to cover

Procedure

; . ^ '

A Refer the trainees to Sections 184, to I89,

Pages loo and 101 in tlie Enumeration Manual.

•1 , General

Remind the trainees that -

instructions

. (a) enumerators must review each General Farm

schedule section by section before they

leave the farm and before they sign the

Enumerator's Record,

(b) entries. must be legible and made vjith the

ball point pen<,

acre except where provision has been made

on the schedule to report certain crops to

.the nearest tenth acre. '^

(d) all questions on value must be answered to

the nearest dollar, omitting cents.' ■' ' '

2. Questions always

t. Explain to the trainees that certain questions

requiring an

must always have an answer on every schedule.

answer

Have them look at each question of this type

on the schedule.

Questions always requiring an entry =

(a) ^iuestions 1 to 5 (See Section 97s Page 8^ of

the Enumeration Manual for the exception in

the case of (Question 5 on Institutional

Farms ) .

(b) Q,uestions 6 to 9»

kl, U9, U, 72, 78, 89, 95, 98, I50, 159,

164, 175 » 189, 192, 193 0

(d) The Enumerator's Record.

3, Acreage questions

Explain the following points :==

in Sections II, III,

IV, V and VI oic' the

(a) Question 7 must agree with the areas of

schedule must be in

land listed. in Question 6.

agreement

(b) The total of the areas giv'en in. Question 8

must equal the area given in Question 7.

harvest in 1951 (Section III, Column 1),

together with the areas given in Questions

50 to 63, 66 to 71, 74 to 77 and Question 82,

. '

must have a close relationship to the area

given in Question 83.

- 232

Points to cover

Procedure

4e Live stock numbers
and wool clip in
Section XI of the

schedule must
always be checked

5, Live stock and
live stock products
sold in 1950
(Section XIII)

6« ' Production of- vyhole
• milk in May, I95I
(Section XIX) -

(d),

The difference will be the area of vegetables,
fruits, nursery and greenhouse products grown
mainly for home use. Normally, this difference
should not be more than an acre or two. How-
ever, if there is intercropping or double
cropping (See Enumeration Manual, .Section 13^,
Page 89), this will mean that the .acreage in
(Question. 83 will be.less than the total of the
individual entries,'

The total of the areas given in Section 71 of
the schedule (Q,uestions 83 to 88 inclusive)
must equal the area given in Q,uestion 7.

Emphasize the following:-

(a) (Questions 101 to I04 inclusive must equal
(Question 100,

A Refer trainees to note under Q,uestioh
104 on the schedule,

(b) yjuestions I06 to 110 inclusive must equal
Ciuestion 105 »

A Refer trainees to note xinder Question 110,

i. Refer trainees to note under Q^uestion II5,

(d) Q,uestions II7 to II9 inclusive must, equal
(Question 11 6,

A Refer trainees to note under Question II9,

(e) Questions 121(b) and 121(c) must equal
Question 121(a) ,

A Refer trainees to note under Question
121(c).

(f) Questions 123 to 126 inclusive- must equal
Question 122,

A Refer trainees to note under Question 126,

Explain to trainees that Questions 144, 146, 147 and

148 must have some degree of re-
lationship to the entries made in
Section XII (numbers of these
animals sold) ,

A Refer trainees to the note under Question 186
which says "The sum of Questions 180 to I85
(Col, 2) must equal the answer to this question".

- 233 -

XIV. Tlffi USE OF IviaPS
(For Field Supervisors in Kanitoba, Saskatchevvan and Alberta)

Points to cover

1, Completing the map

2, Method of marking
the map

Procedure

± Have the tra:inees look at the specimen map in
Section 95, Page 83 of the Enumeration Manual,

Explain that -

(a) the enumerator of agricultural areas must
account on the map for all the land in his
sub-district,

(b) each quarter section or part of a quarter
•^section must be clearly marked as to whether

it is farm land or non-farm land,

Explain that there are three different types of marks
to be put on the map -

(i) Farm Schedule Number must be entered on
the map for every quarter section or
part of a quarter section enuiaerated. In
cases where the farm area is so small
that the Farm Schedule Nujaber cannot be
entered in the proper location on the
map, the Farm Schedule Number may be
entered in the margin and an arrow
drawn to the exact location of the land
on the map,
(ii) An "0" must be entered on the map for
farm land lying within the sub-district
that will be enumerated by the enumera-
tor in another sub-district. This will
occur where the farm headquarters is
located .in another sub-district, .

Emphasize that the enumerator must
be certain that this land will be
included on the farm schedule of a
farm operator in another sub-
district,

(iii) An "X" must be marked on the map for
non-farm areas, abandoned or idle
land. This will include areas such as
forests, coulees, abandoned or idle land
(not part of occupied farns), lakes and
large rivers.

. - 234 -
XV. IRRIGATION SCHEDULE (FORI-I 8)

(For Field Supervisors in Saskatchewan, Alberta, and British Columbia)

Points to oover

Procedure

1, Where used

2, When used

3. Definition of
irrigation

4. Grains irrigated
•in 1950
(Questions 7 to
12)

5 . Hay and pasture
irrigated in 1950
(Questions 13 and
14) -.

* Have the trainees look at a copy of
the Irrigation schedule (Form 8).

Explain that the Irrigation schedule v/ill only be used

in Saskatchewan, Alberta and British Columbia,

Point out that -

(a) this schedule must be filled out v/hen the farm
operator answers "Yes" to Question 89 on the
General Farm schedule "Have you a crop irriga-
tion system on this farm?"

(b) it will be completed in addition to the General
Farm schedule (Form 6) for farms reporting a
crop irrigation system.

* Refer the trainees to the statement
at the top of the Irrigation schedule.

Define Irrigation as the application of water to the land

by artificial means, through a system
of ditches, furrows, sprinklers or
similar v^rorks,

Point out that -

(a) provision is made on the schedule in Questions
7 to 12 to report the area of certain grain
crops irrigated in 1950.

(b) the area of grains irrigated but not listed on
■ the schedule must be reported in Question 20.

State, .the following rules :-

• (a) All cultivated hay land that was irrigated in
1950 and cut for fodder must be reported in
Question 13 .

(b) Cultivated hay land that was irrigated in 1950
and used for pasture or grazing (but not cut)
must be reported in Question 14.

(c) Natxiral or prairie hay land that was irrigated
in 1950 and used for pasture or grazing (but
not cut) must be reported in Question 14.

(d). Natural or prairie hay land that was irrigated
in 1950 and cut for hay or fodder must be
reported in Question 20.

- 235 -

Points to cover

Vegetables and

fruits grown

mainly for sale

((iuestions 17,

18, 19)

Total area
irrigated in 1950
(Ciuestion 21)

Area irrigated by
a sprinkler system
in 1950
(Question 22)

Reviewing the
Irrigation,,
schedule

Procedure

Emphasize that -

(a) only irrigated areas of vegetables and fruits
grown mainly for sale are to be reported,

(b) the total area of vegetables must be reported
in "Question 17.

(d) the total area of small fruits must be reported
in Question 19,

Point out that -

(a) each irrigated acre must be reported only once in
this question, even though the area may have been
irrigated more than once in I95O,

(b) the answer to Question 21 will be the total of
Questions 7 to 20 only when double cropping or
intercropping does not occur (See Enumeration
Manual, Section 13A). Each irrigated acre must
be reported only once in this question even
though more than one crop was harvested from it,

(c) the answer to Question 21 on the Irrigation
schedule must be thevsame as the answer to Ques-
tion 90 on the General Farm schedule (Form 6).

Explain that the enumerator must report in this question
the area irrigated in I95O with water sprayed
from sprinklers either from an overhead system
or from a system on the surface of the ground.

Emphasize that the enumerator must carefully review each
completed Irrigation schedule before leaving
the farm and before signing his name in the
Enumerator's Record,

k Refer trainees to Section I98, Page 102 of the
Enumeration Manual outlining the checks that
must be made.

State the rules for checking this schedule :-

(a) Questions 1, 2, 3, 5, 6 and 21 must always have
an answer, and the Enumerator's Record must be
completed,
. . .(b). The total area of farm (Question ,5) and the areas
reported in Questions 7 to 20 inclusive must be
carefully checked with the entries made on the
General Farm schedule „ These entries on the
Irrigation schedule must never be greater than
the entries on the General Farm schedule,

schedule must be the same as the answer to Ques-
tion 90 on the General Farm schedule (Form 6),

- 236-

A Haye enumerators in Irrigation areas complete Questions 7 to 22 of
the Irrigation sohedule for the following example. After asking
one or two for their answers, give the correct answers.

Practice Exercise F«

Directions - Complete the exercise below as if for an actual Form 8,
using the details provided at the side of the exercise.

How many acres of the following were irrigated in 1950?

(Report to nearest whole acre except in questions 16, 17, 18, 19)

Grains

7. Wheat, all

8. Bailey ,

9. Oats fOI^ grain (threshed or combined)

10. Rye, all.

11. Flax for seed

12..Peas (dry for threshing)

(Exclude canning peas — see question 17)

Hay and Pasture

13. All cultivated hay cut in 1950

14. Pasture or grazing land not cut for hay (both natural and cultivated),.

Sugar beets and Potatoes

15. Sugar beets for sugar

16. Potatoes (Report to the nearest tenth acre)

Vegetables and buits grown mainly for sale

(Report to nearest tenth acre)

17. Vegetables

18. Fruits, tree

19. Fruits (small cultivated such as strawberries, grapes, etc)

Otiier Iirigated Area

20. Other irrigated land

(include crops not mentioned above and summer fallow)

Naiiii "

21. Total area irrigated in 1950 .'. .'.

22. Area irrigated by a sprinkler system in 1950

JJL

^3-

£.

z.5^

Mr. James reports that
the following acreages
were irrigated by a
sprinkler system three
times in 1950: 5 acres
of summer fallow, j^
acre of potatoes, loj^
acres of apples and 9
acres of peaches (this
fruit was grown mainly
for sale).

"'SS^^^'^^'oTi^'^0.

ci3"

G»t80l^

Internet Archive Audio

Featured

Top

Images

Featured

Top

Software

Featured

Top

Books

Featured

Top

Video

Featured

Top

Mobile Apps

Browser Extensions

Archive-It Subscription

Save Page Now

Full text of "Training manual."

See other formats